HP | Series 7 | User guide | HP Series 7 User guide

HP Series 7 User guide
HP LaserJet 4345mfp Series
User Guide
Copyright and License
Trademark Credits
© 2004 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Adobe®, Acrobat®, and PostScript® are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation
without prior written permission is
prohibited, except as allowed under the
copyright laws.
Corel® is a trademark or registered
trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel
Corporation Limited.
The information contained in this document
is subject to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such
products and services. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable
for technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained herein.
Part number Q3942-90951
Edition 1, 11/2004
Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of
Linus Torvalds.
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT®
are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
ENERGY STAR® and the ENERGY STAR
logo® are U.S. registered marks of the
United States Environmental Protection
Agency.
HP customer care
Online services
For 24-hour access to information by using a modem or Internet connection
World Wide Web: Updated HP printer software, product and support information, and printer
drivers in several languages can be obtained from http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.
(The site is in English.)
Online troubleshooting tools
HP Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE) is a suite of Web-based troubleshooting tools
for desktop computing and printing products. ISPE helps you quickly identify, diagnose, and
resolve computing and printing problems. The ISPE tools are available at
http://instantsupport.hp.com.
Telephone support
Hewlett-Packard Company provides free telephone support during the warranty period.
When you call, you will be connected to a responsive team that is waiting to help you. For
the telephone number for your country/region, see the flyer that came in the box with the
product, or visit http://www.hp.com/support/callcenters. Before calling HP, have the following
information ready: the product name and serial number, the date of purchase, and a
description of the problem.
You can also find support on the Internet at http://www.hp.com. Click the support & drivers
block.
Software utilities, drivers, and electronic information
Go to http://www.hp.com/go/lj4345mfp_software. (The site is in English, but printer drivers
can be downloaded in several languages.)
For information over the telephone, see the flyer that came in the box with the printer.
HP direct ordering for accessories or supplies
Order supplies from the following Web sites:
United States: http://www.hp.com/sbso/product/supplies
Canada: http://www.hp.ca/catalog/supplies
Europe: http://www.hp.com/go/supplies
Asia-Pacific: http://www.hp.com/paper/
Order accessories from http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp. For more information, see
Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies.
To order supplies or accessories over the telephone, call the following numbers:
United States businesses: 800-282-6672
United States small and medium businesses: 800-888-9909
United States home and home offices: 800-752-0900
Canada: 800-387-3154
To find the phone numbers for other countries/regions, see the flyer that came in the box
with the printer.
HP service information
ENWW
iii
To locate HP-Authorized Dealers in the United States or Canada, call 800-243-9816 (United
States) or 800-387-3867 (Canada). Or, go to http://www.hp.com/go/cposupportguide.
For service for your HP product in other countries/regions, call the customer support number
for your country/region. See the flyer that came in the box with the printer.
HP service agreements
Call: 800-HPINVENT [800-474-6836 (U.S.)] or 800-268-1221 (Canada).
Out-of-Warranty Service: 800-633-3600.
Extended Service: Call: 800-HPINVENT [800-474-6836 (U.S.)] or 800-268-1221 (Canada).
Or, go to the HP Care Pack Services Web site at http://www.hpexpress-services.com.
HP Toolbox
To check the printer status and settings and to view troubleshooting information and online
documentation, use the HP Toolbox software. You can view the HP Toolbox when the
printer is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network. You must
have performed a complete software installation to use the HP Toolbox. See Using the
HP Toolbox.
HP support and information for Macintosh computers
Visit: http://www.hp.com/go/macosx for Mac OS X support information and HP subscription
service for driver updates.
Visit: http://www.hp.com/go/mac-connect for products designed specifically for the Macintosh
user.
iv
ENWW
Table of contents
1 MFP basics
HP LaserJet 4345mfp configurations.........................................................................................2
HP LaserJet 4345mfp (Q3942A—base model)...................................................................2
HP LaserJet 4345x mfp (Q3943A)......................................................................................2
HP LaserJet 4345xs mfp (Q3944A)....................................................................................2
HP LaserJet 4345xm mfp (Q3945A)...................................................................................3
Features and benefits of the MFP..............................................................................................4
Functions ............................................................................................................................4
Speed and throughput ........................................................................................................4
Resolution ...........................................................................................................................4
Memory ...............................................................................................................................4
User interface .....................................................................................................................4
Language and fonts ...........................................................................................................5
Copying and sending ..........................................................................................................5
Print cartridge .....................................................................................................................5
Paper-handling ...................................................................................................................6
Connectivity ........................................................................................................................6
Environmental features .......................................................................................................6
Security features .................................................................................................................6
Minimum system requirements............................................................................................7
MFP parts and accessories........................................................................................................8
Accessories and supplies....................................................................................................9
Interface ports....................................................................................................................10
Moving the MFP.................................................................................................................10
Locking and unlocking optional accessories.....................................................................11
Software ..................................................................................................................................12
Operating systems and MFP components .......................................................................12
Printer drivers ...................................................................................................................13
HP disk management utility ..............................................................................................17
Software for Macintosh computers ...................................................................................17
Installing the printing system software .............................................................................17
Uninstalling the software ..................................................................................................22
Loading input trays...................................................................................................................23
Loading tray 1 ...................................................................................................................23
Loading trays 2, 3, 4 and 5 ...............................................................................................24
Configuring the trays by using the Paper handling menu ..............................................28
2 Using the control panel
Control-panel layout ................................................................................................................30
Control-panel features .............................................................................................................31
Home-screen navigation .........................................................................................................32
Help system .............................................................................................................................33
"What is this?" Help ..........................................................................................................33
"Show me how" Help ........................................................................................................33
Menu map ...............................................................................................................................34
ENWW
v
Retrieve job menu ...................................................................................................................35
Information menu ....................................................................................................................36
Paper handling menu ..............................................................................................................37
Configure device menu ...........................................................................................................40
Originals submenu ............................................................................................................40
Copying submenu .............................................................................................................41
Enhancement submenu ....................................................................................................41
Sending submenu .............................................................................................................42
Printing submenu ..............................................................................................................44
PCL submenu ...................................................................................................................46
Print quality submenu .......................................................................................................48
System setup submenu ....................................................................................................51
Copy/send settings............................................................................................................55
MBM-3 Configuration submenu.........................................................................................56
Stapler/stacker submenu...................................................................................................56
I/O submenu .....................................................................................................................57
EIO X Jetdirect submenu ..................................................................................................58
Embedded Jetdirect submenu ..........................................................................................58
Resets submenu ...............................................................................................................61
Fax menu ................................................................................................................................63
Diagnostics menu ....................................................................................................................64
Service menu ..........................................................................................................................67
3 Printing
Orienting media .......................................................................................................................70
Printing documents .................................................................................................................72
To print a document ..........................................................................................................72
Selecting which tray is used for printing .................................................................................73
Understanding tray order ..................................................................................................73
Customizing tray 1 operation ............................................................................................73
Printing by type and size of media (locking trays) ............................................................74
Manually feeding media from tray 1 .................................................................................75
Selecting the correct fuser mode ............................................................................................76
Selecting the output bin ...........................................................................................................77
3-bin mailbox output bins ..................................................................................................77
Selecting an output location .............................................................................................77
Selecting face-up or face-down output for copy jobs........................................................78
Printing on envelopes ..............................................................................................................79
Loading envelopes in tray 1 ..............................................................................................79
Printing on special media ........................................................................................................81
Printing on labels ..............................................................................................................81
Printing on transparencies ................................................................................................81
Printing on letterhead, prepunched, or preprinted paper .................................................82
Printing on paper that has a special finish .......................................................................83
Printing on small sizes, custom sizes, or heavy paper .....................................................83
Setting custom paper sizes ..............................................................................................84
Printing on both sides of paper (optional duplexer) ................................................................86
Guidelines for printing on both sides of paper ..................................................................86
Orientation of paper for duplexing ....................................................................................87
Layout options for printing on both sides of paper ...........................................................87
To print on both sides by using the optional duplex-printing accessory ..........................88
Setting the registration ............................................................................................................89
To set the registration .......................................................................................................89
Using features in the printer driver ..........................................................................................90
Creating and using quick sets ..........................................................................................90
vi
ENWW
Creating and using watermarks ........................................................................................90
Resizing documents..........................................................................................................91
Setting a custom paper size from the printer driver..........................................................91
Printing on different paper for the first page of a print job ................................................91
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper .................................................................92
Setting the stapling options...............................................................................................92
Selecting face-up or face-down output in the printer driver..............................................93
Using job storage features ......................................................................................................94
To gain access to the job storage features ......................................................................94
Printing a private job .........................................................................................................94
Deleting a private job ........................................................................................................95
Storing a print job .............................................................................................................95
Creating a QuickCopying job ............................................................................................96
Printing additional copies of QuickCopy jobs ...................................................................96
Deleting a QuickCopy job .................................................................................................97
Proofing and holding a job ................................................................................................97
Printing the remaining copies of a held job ......................................................................97
Deleting a held job ............................................................................................................98
4 Copying
Copy-screen navigation ........................................................................................................100
Cancel button ..................................................................................................................100
OK button ........................................................................................................................100
Basic copying instructions .....................................................................................................101
Copying by using the default settings .............................................................................101
Copying by using user-defined settings .........................................................................101
Copying by using the scanner glass ...............................................................................103
Copying by using the ADF ..............................................................................................103
Using Job Mode ..............................................................................................................103
Modifying copy settings for the current job ...........................................................................104
Adjusting the copy contrast ............................................................................................104
Reducing or enlarging copies .........................................................................................104
Background removal .......................................................................................................104
Sharpness .......................................................................................................................104
Contrast ..........................................................................................................................104
Copying multiple sized originals ............................................................................................105
Creating a stored copy job ....................................................................................................105
5 Scanning and sending to e-mail
What is SMTP?......................................................................................................................108
What is LDAP?.......................................................................................................................108
E-mail configuration...............................................................................................................109
Automatic e-mail configuration........................................................................................109
Manual e-mail configuration............................................................................................109
To find gateways by using an e-mail program................................................................110
E-mail screen navigation .......................................................................................................111
Help button .....................................................................................................................111
From: field .......................................................................................................................111
To:, CC:, and BCC: fields................................................................................................111
Clear All button ...............................................................................................................111
E-mail basics .........................................................................................................................112
Loading documents ........................................................................................................112
Sending documents ........................................................................................................112
Using the address book ........................................................................................................114
Creating a recipient list ...................................................................................................114
ENWW
vii
Using the local address book .........................................................................................114
Additional e-mail features.......................................................................................................116
Secondary e-mail.............................................................................................................116
Send to folder..................................................................................................................116
Send to workflow.............................................................................................................116
6 Faxing
Analog faxing.........................................................................................................................118
Installing the fax accessory.............................................................................................118
Connecting the fax accessory to a phone line................................................................120
Configuring and using the fax features............................................................................121
Digital faxing...........................................................................................................................122
7 Optional output and input devices
3-bin mailbox..........................................................................................................................124
Mailbox mode..................................................................................................................124
Stacker mode...................................................................................................................124
Function-separator mode................................................................................................124
Using the 3-bin mailbox...................................................................................................124
Stapler/stacker accessory .....................................................................................................127
To configure the printer driver to recognize the optional stapler/stacker........................127
To select the stapler in the software (Windows) ............................................................127
To select the stapler in the software (Mac) ....................................................................127
To select the stapler at the control panel for printed jobs ..............................................128
To select the stapler in the printer driver for printed jobs (Windows)..............................128
To select the stapler in the printer driver for printed jobs (Mac)......................................128
To set the stapler at the control panel for all copy jobs...................................................128
To set the stapler at the control panel for a single copy job............................................129
To configure the MFP to stop or continue when the staple cartridge is empty...............129
Loading staples ...............................................................................................................129
500-sheet feeders and the cabinet/stand..............................................................................131
Envelope feeder.....................................................................................................................132
Installing the optional envelope feeder ...........................................................................132
Removing the optional envelope feeder .........................................................................133
Loading envelopes in the optional envelope feeder .......................................................133
Troubleshooting the output and input accessories................................................................136
8 Security features
Securing the embedded Web server.....................................................................................138
To secure the embedded Web server.............................................................................138
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) ...........................................................................................139
Requirements .................................................................................................................139
Using the FIH ..................................................................................................................139
Secure Disk Erase ................................................................................................................141
Data affected ..................................................................................................................141
Gaining access to Secure Disk Erase ............................................................................141
Additional Information .....................................................................................................141
Job-storage features .............................................................................................................142
DSS authentication ...............................................................................................................143
Locking the control-panel menus...........................................................................................144
To lock the control-panel menus.....................................................................................144
Locking the formatter cage....................................................................................................145
viii
ENWW
9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
Using the embedded Web server .........................................................................................148
Opening the embedded Web server ..............................................................................148
Information tab ................................................................................................................149
Settings tab .....................................................................................................................149
Digital Sending tab..........................................................................................................150
Networking tab ................................................................................................................150
Other links .......................................................................................................................151
Using the HP Toolbox ...........................................................................................................152
Supported operating systems .........................................................................................152
Supported browsers .......................................................................................................152
To view the HP Toolbox .................................................................................................153
Status tab ........................................................................................................................153
Alerts tab .........................................................................................................................153
Device Settings window ..................................................................................................154
Toolbox links ...................................................................................................................154
Other links .......................................................................................................................154
Using HP Web Jetadmin software ........................................................................................155
Configuring and verifying an IP address ...............................................................................156
TCP/IP assignment .........................................................................................................156
Verifying the TCP/IP configuration .................................................................................156
Changing an IP address .................................................................................................156
Setting the real-time clock .....................................................................................................158
Setting the date and time ................................................................................................158
Setting the wake time......................................................................................................159
Setting the sleep delay....................................................................................................160
Checking the MFP configuration ...........................................................................................161
To print an information page ..........................................................................................161
Menu map .......................................................................................................................161
Configuration page .........................................................................................................161
HP Jetdirect page ...........................................................................................................163
Supplies status page ......................................................................................................163
Usage page ....................................................................................................................164
PCL or PS font list ..........................................................................................................165
Managing the print cartridge .................................................................................................166
HP print cartridges ..........................................................................................................166
Non-HP print cartridges ..................................................................................................166
Print-cartridge authentication .........................................................................................166
Print-cartridge storage ....................................................................................................166
Print-cartridge life expectancy ........................................................................................166
Checking the supply level ...............................................................................................167
Cartridge-low and cartridge-out conditions ....................................................................167
Upgrading the firmware..........................................................................................................169
Determining the current level of firmware........................................................................169
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site....................................................169
Transferring the new firmware to the MFP......................................................................169
Upgrading the HP Jetdirect firmware..............................................................................171
Cleaning the MFP..................................................................................................................173
Cleaning the outside of the MFP ....................................................................................173
Cleaning the touchscreen ...............................................................................................173
To clean the scanner glass .............................................................................................173
Cleaning the fuser ..........................................................................................................173
Cleaning the ADF delivery system .................................................................................174
Calibrating the scanner..........................................................................................................178
To print the calibration target...........................................................................................178
Performing preventive maintenance......................................................................................179
ENWW
ix
Printer preventive maintenance ......................................................................................179
The ADF maintenance kit................................................................................................179
10 Solving problems
Solving general problems .....................................................................................................182
Troubleshooting checklist ...............................................................................................182
Determining MFP problems ..................................................................................................184
Clearing jams.........................................................................................................................185
Clearing jams from the top-cover and print-cartridge areas............................................186
Clearing jams from the optional envelope-feeder area...................................................188
Clearing jams from the tray 1 area..................................................................................189
Clearing jams from the tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas................................................................191
Clearing jams from the optional duplexer........................................................................192
Clearing jams from the output areas...............................................................................193
Clearing jams from the fuser...........................................................................................195
Clearing jams from the ADF............................................................................................198
Clearing staple jams........................................................................................................199
Solving repeated jams ....................................................................................................201
Using the paper-path test................................................................................................201
Understanding MFP messages .............................................................................................203
Using the MFP help system ............................................................................................203
If a message persists ......................................................................................................203
Resolving control-panel messages........................................................................................204
Understanding accessory lights for the 3-bin mailbox and stapler/stacker ..........................216
Accessory lights ..............................................................................................................216
Replacing accessories or accessory components .........................................................217
Understanding lights on the formatter....................................................................................218
HP Jetdirect LEDs...........................................................................................................218
Heartbeat LED.................................................................................................................218
Fax LED...........................................................................................................................219
Correcting print-quality and copy-quality problems ..............................................................220
Print-quality checklist ......................................................................................................220
Image defect examples ..................................................................................................220
Light print (partial page) ..................................................................................................222
Light print (entire page) ..................................................................................................223
Specks ............................................................................................................................223
Dropouts .........................................................................................................................223
Lines ...............................................................................................................................224
Gray background ............................................................................................................224
Toner smear ...................................................................................................................225
Loose toner .....................................................................................................................225
Repeating defects ...........................................................................................................226
Repeating image ............................................................................................................226
Misformed characters .....................................................................................................227
Page skew ......................................................................................................................227
Curl or wave ....................................................................................................................227
Wrinkles or creases ........................................................................................................228
Vertical white lines ..........................................................................................................228
Tire tracks .......................................................................................................................229
White spots on black ......................................................................................................229
Scattered lines ................................................................................................................229
Blurred print ....................................................................................................................230
Random image repetition ...............................................................................................230
Blank page (ADF)............................................................................................................231
Horizontal lines (ADF).....................................................................................................231
x
ENWW
Page skew (ADF)............................................................................................................232
Vertical lines (ADF)..........................................................................................................232
Image shifted (ADF)........................................................................................................232
Unexpected image (ADF)................................................................................................233
Repetitive defect ruler......................................................................................................234
Solving e-mail problems.........................................................................................................235
To validate the SMTP gateway address..........................................................................235
To validate the LDAP gateway address..........................................................................235
Solving network connectivity problems..................................................................................236
Troubleshooting network printing problems ...................................................................236
Verifying communication over the network.....................................................................236
Appendix A Supplies and accessories
Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies ............................................................................240
Ordering directly from HP ...............................................................................................240
Ordering through service or support providers ...............................................................240
Ordering directly through the embedded Web server (for printers that are
connected to a network) ..............................................................................................240
Ordering directly through the HP Toolbox software (for printers that are directly
connected to a computer) ...........................................................................................240
Part numbers .........................................................................................................................241
Accessories ....................................................................................................................241
Print cartridges ................................................................................................................241
Maintenance kits .............................................................................................................242
Memory ...........................................................................................................................242
Cables and interfaces .....................................................................................................243
Print media ......................................................................................................................243
Appendix B Service and support
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement ........................................................................247
Print Cartridge Limited Warranty Statement .........................................................................248
Availability of support and service .........................................................................................249
HP maintenance agreements ...............................................................................................249
Priority Onsite Service ....................................................................................................249
Next business day...........................................................................................................249
Installation and maintenance-kit replacement.................................................................249
Repacking the MFP ...............................................................................................................250
To repack the MFP .........................................................................................................250
Service information form .......................................................................................................251
Appendix C MFP specifications
Physical specifications...........................................................................................................254
Electrical specifications..........................................................................................................255
Acoustic specifications...........................................................................................................256
Environmental specifications ................................................................................................257
Image area.............................................................................................................................258
Skew specifications................................................................................................................259
Appendix D Media specifications
Print media specifications .....................................................................................................261
Printing and paper storage environment ........................................................................261
Envelopes .......................................................................................................................262
Labels .............................................................................................................................264
ENWW
xi
Transparencies ...............................................................................................................264
Supported types and sizes of print media..............................................................................265
Appendix E MFP memory and expansion
Memory overview...................................................................................................................272
Determining memory requirements .......................................................................................273
Installing memory ..................................................................................................................274
To install memory DIMMs ...............................................................................................274
To install a flash memory card .......................................................................................276
Replacing the hard-disk drive..........................................................................................278
Checking memory installation ...............................................................................................282
To verify that memory devices are installed correctly ....................................................282
Saving resources (permanent resources) .............................................................................283
Installing EIO cards ...............................................................................................................284
To install EIO cards ........................................................................................................284
Appendix F Regulatory information
Introduction ............................................................................................................................285
FCC regulations ....................................................................................................................286
Telecom..................................................................................................................................287
Environmental Product Stewardship program ......................................................................288
Protecting the environment .............................................................................................288
Ozone production ...........................................................................................................288
Energy consumption .......................................................................................................288
HP LaserJet printing supplies .........................................................................................289
Material safety data sheet ..............................................................................................290
For more information ......................................................................................................290
Declaration of conformity (HP LaserJet 4345mfp) ................................................................291
Declaration of conformity (HP LaserJet 4345x mfp, 4345xs mfp, and 4345xs mfp).............292
Country-/region-specific safety statements ...........................................................................293
Laser safety statement ...................................................................................................293
Canadian DOC statement ..............................................................................................293
Japanese VCCI statement ..............................................................................................293
Korean EMI statement ....................................................................................................293
Finnish laser statement ..................................................................................................294
Australia...........................................................................................................................294
Index
xii
ENWW
1
MFP basics
Congratulations on your purchase of the HP LaserJet 4345mfp. If you have not done so, see
the HP LaserJet 4345mfp Start Guide that is provided with the multifunction peripheral
(MFP) for setup instructions.
After the MFP is set up and ready to use, take a few moments to get to know the MFP. This
chapter introduces the following topics:
ENWW
●
HP LaserJet 4345mfp configurations
●
Features and benefits of the MFP
●
MFP parts and accessories
●
Software
●
Loading input trays
1
HP LaserJet 4345mfp configurations
The HP LaserJet 4345mfp Series is available in the following configurations.
HP LaserJet 4345mfp (Q3942A—base model)
The HP LaserJet 4345mfp comes standard with the following items:
●
A 100-sheet input tray (tray 1)
●
A 500-sheet input tray (tray 2)
●
An automatic document feeder (ADF) that holds up to 50 pages
●
An HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100Base-T network
●
128 megabytes (MB) synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM)
HP LaserJet 4345x mfp (Q3943A)
The HP LaserJet 4345x mfp has the same features as the base model and also includes the
following items:
●
An automatic duplex printing accessory (duplexer)
●
An additional 500-sheet feeder (tray 3)
●
An analog fax accessory
HP LaserJet 4345xs mfp (Q3944A)
2
Chapter 1 MFP basics
ENWW
The HP LaserJet 4345xs mfp has the same features as the base model and also includes
the following items:
●
An automatic duplex printing accessory (duplexer)
●
An additional 500-sheet feeder (tray 3)
●
An analog fax accessory
●
A stapler/stacker accessory
●
A cabinet/stand
HP LaserJet 4345xm mfp (Q3945A)
The HP LaserJet 4345xm mfp has the same features as the base model and also includes
the following items:
ENWW
●
An automatic duplex printing accessory (duplexer)
●
An additional 500-sheet feeder (tray 3)
●
An analog fax accessory
●
A 3-bin mailbox accessory
●
A cabinet/stand
HP LaserJet 4345mfp configurations
3
Features and benefits of the MFP
The HP LaserJet 4345mfp Series is designed to be shared by a workgroup. Use the MFP to
copy and print black-and-white documents or to digitally send color or black-and-white
documents. The MFP is a standalone copier that does not require connection to a computer.
With the optional HP LaserJet mfp analog fax accessory 300 (included with some models),
the MFP can also send and receive faxes. With the exception of digital sending and network
printing, you can select all functions at the MFP control panel.
Functions
●
Two-sided copying (duplexing)
●
Image modification
●
Color digital sending
●
Document finishing
Speed and throughput
●
45 pages per minute (ppm) when scanning and printing on letter-size paper; 43 (ppm)
when copying and printing on A4-size paper
●
25% to 400% scalability when using the scanner glass
●
25% to 200% scalability when using the automatic document feeder (ADF)
●
Less than 10 seconds to print the first page
●
Transmit Once, Raster Image Processing (RIP) ONCE technology
●
Duty cycle of up to 200,000 pages per month
●
400 megahertz (MHz) microprocessor
Resolution
●
600 dots per inch (dpi) with Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)
●
FastRes 1200 provides 1200 dpi quality at full speed
●
Up to 220 levels of gray
Memory
●
256 megabytes (MB) of random-access memory (RAM), expandable to 512 MB by using
industry standard 100-pin double data rate dual inline memory modules (DDR DIMMs)
●
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) that automatically compresses data to use
RAM more efficiently
User interface
4
●
Graphic display on the control panel
●
An embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies (for networkconnected products)
●
HP Toolbox software to provide MFP status and alerts and print internal information pages
Chapter 1 MFP basics
ENWW
Language and fonts
●
HP Printer Command Language (PCL) 6
●
HP PCL 5e for compatibility
●
Printer Management Language
●
PDF
●
XHTML
●
80 scalable TrueType typefaces
●
HP PostScript® 3 emulation (PS)
Copying and sending
Note
●
Modes for text, graphics, and mixed text and graphics formats
●
A job-interrupt feature (at copy boundaries)
●
Multiple pages per sheet
●
Operator attendance animations (for example, jam recovery)
●
E-mail compatibility
●
A sleep feature that saves energy
●
Automatic duplex (two-sided) scanning
An automatic duplex printing accessory is required for two-sided copying.
Print cartridge
ENWW
●
Prints up to 18,000 pages at 5% coverage.
●
No-shake cartridge design
●
Authentic HP print cartridge detection
Features and benefits of the MFP
5
Paper-handling
●
●
Input
–
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): A multipurpose tray for paper, transparencies, labels,
and envelopes. Holds up to 100 sheets of paper or 10 envelopes.
–
Tray 2 and optional trays 3, 4, and 5: 500-sheet trays. These trays automatically
detect standard paper sizes up to Legal and allow printing on custom-size paper.
–
Automatic document feeder (ADF): Holds up to 50 sheets of paper.
–
Duplex printing and copying: With the optional duplexing accessory, provides twosided printing and copying (printing on both sides of the paper).
–
ADF duplex scanning: The ADF has an autmatic duplexer for scanning two-sided
documents.
–
Optional envelope feeder: Holds up to 75 envelopes.
Output
–
Standard output bin: The standard output bin is located on the left side of the MFP.
This bin can hold up to 500 sheets of paper.
–
ADF output bin: The ADF output bin is underneath the ADF input tray. The bin
holds up to 50 sheets of paper, and the MFP automatically stops when this bin is full.
–
Optional stapler/stacker: The stapler/stacker staples up to 30 sheets and stacks
up to 500 sheets.
–
Optional 3-bin mailbox: One bin stacks up to 500 sheets, and two bins stack up to
100 sheets each for a total capacity of 700 sheets.
Connectivity
●
IEEE 1284B-compliant parallel connection
●
A Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) connection (AUX) for connecting other devices
●
Local area network (LAN) connector (RJ-45) for the embedded HP Jetdirect print server
●
Optional analog fax card
●
Optional HP Digital Sending Software (DSS)
●
Optional HP Jetdirect enhanced input/output (EIO) print server cards
–
Universal serial bus (USB), serial, and LocalTalk
–
Fast Ethernet 10/100TX
Environmental features
●
Note
The sSleep setting saves energy (meets ENERGY STAR® guidelines, Version 1.0).
See Protecting the environment for more information.
Security features
6
●
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
●
Secure Disk Erase
●
Security lock
Chapter 1 MFP basics
ENWW
●
Job retention
●
DSS authentication
Minimum system requirements
To use the e-mail functionality, the MFP must be connected to an IP-based server that
has simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP). This server can either be on the local area
network or at an outside Internet service provider (ISP). HP recommends tha tthe MFP
be located on the same local area network (LAN) as the SMTP server. If you are using
an ISP, you must connect to the ISP by using a digital subscriber line (DSL) connection.
If you are obtaining e-mail services from an ISP, ask the ISP to provide the correct
SMTP address. Dial-up connections are not supported. If you do not have an SMTP
server on your network, third-party software is available that allows you to create an
SMTP server. However, purchase and support of this software is your responsibility.
ENWW
Features and benefits of the MFP
7
MFP parts and accessories
Before using the MFP, familiarize yourself with the parts of the MFP.
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
ADF assembly
ADF top cover
Automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray
Top cover (provides access to the print cartridge)
Top-cover lever
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
Jam-access lever
Tray-number indicator
Paper-level indicator
Control-panel keypad
Control-panel display
Control-panel status lights
Scanner lock
13
14
15
16
17
18
Output bin
Optional duplexer
On/off switch
Power connection
Interface ports
Formatter cover (provides access to the flash memory cards and the hard disk)
Chapter 1 MFP basics
ENWW
Accessories and supplies
You can increase the capabilities of the MFP by adding optional accessories. For information
about ordering accessories and supplies, see Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies.
Note
Use the accessories and supplies that have been specifically designed for the MFP in order
to ensure optimum performance.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Note
ENWW
500-sheet feeder (Q5968A) (See the note that follows)
Duplexer (Q5969A)
Envelope feeder (Q2438B)
Stapler/stacker (Q5691A)
Memory DIMMs and flash memory cards
HP Jetdirect print server (EIO card)
Hard-disk accessory (EIO card)
Storage cabinet/stand (Q5970A)
3-bin mailbox (Q5692A)
Staple cartridge (C8091A)
Print cartridge (Q5945A)
HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300(Q3701A)
The MFP can accept up to three optional 500-sheet feeders. HP recommends also using a
cabinet/stand when using the optional 500-sheet feeders.
MFP parts and accessories
9
Interface ports
The MFP has five ports for connecting to a computer or a network. The ports are at the left,
rear corner of the MFP.
1
2
3
4
5
EIO slot
Network connection (embedded HP Jetdirect print server)
Foreign interface harness (FIH) port
IEEE 1284B-compliant parallel port
Fax connection (for connecting to an optional analog fax accessory)
Moving the MFP
Before moving the MFP, be sure to lock the scanner. The scanner lock is underneath the
scanner lid, to the left of the scanner glass.
The MFP is heavy and should be lifted by three people. One person should stand at the front
of the MFP and should grip the sides, and the other two people should stand at the sides of
the MFP and should grip the sides and back. Remove the ouput bin or other optional output
accessories before moving the MFP. To lift the MFP, grip the lift handles that are on the
sides and on the back of the MFP. Do not attempt to lift the MFP by gripping any other part
of the MFP. If the bottom of the MFP is attached to an optional accessory (such as a 500sheet feeder or a storage cabinet), the accessory latches must be unlocked before moving
the MFP.
WARNING!
10
To prevent possible injury to yourself or damage to the MFP, separate the MFP from any
currently installed optional accessories (for example an optional feeder or a stapler/stacker)
before lifting the MFP.
Chapter 1 MFP basics
ENWW
Locking and unlocking optional accessories
For more stability to prevent the MFP from tipping over, the optional 500-sheet feeders and
the cabinet are automatically locked to the bottom of the MFP. When accessories are
installed, verify that the lock on each accessory is in the rear (locked) position.
To unlock the accessories, slide the lever to the forward (unlocked) position.
ENWW
MFP parts and accessories
11
Software
The MFP comes with helpful software, including printer drivers and optional software. For
easy MFP setup and access to the full range of MFP features, HP recommends that you
install the software that is provided.
Check the installation notes and Readme files on the MFP CD-ROM for additional software
and languages. HP software is not available in all languages.
Operating systems and MFP components
The MFP CD-ROM contains the software components and drivers for users and network
administrators. The printer drivers that are provided on the CD-ROM must be installed in
order to take full advantage of MFP features. The other programs are recommended, but are
not required for operation. Check the installation notes and Readme files on the MFP
CD-ROM for more information.
The CD-ROM includes software that is designed for users and network administrators who
are operating in the following environments:
●
Microsoft® Windows® 98 and Windows Millennium Edition (Me)
●
Microsoft Windows NT® 4.0 (printer driver only)
●
Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
●
Apple Mac OS version 9.1 and later, and Mac OS X version 10.1 or later
The most recent printer drivers for all supported operating systems are available at
http://www.hp.com/go/lj4345mfp_software. If you do not have access to the Internet, see the
support flyer that came in the MFP box for information about obtaining the most recent
software.
The following table lists the available software for the MFP.
Software
Windows
98/Me
Windows
Mac OS
2000/XP/
Server 2003
Windows Installer
x
x
PCL 53
x
x
PCL 6
x
x
PostScript emulation
x
x
x
HP Toolbox
x
x
x2
HP Web Jetadmin1
x
Macintosh PostScript
Printer Description (PPD)
files
x
Chapter 1 MFP basics
OS/2
x
Macintosh Installer
IBM drivers1
12
x
UNIX®/
Linux
x
ENWW
Software
Windows
98/Me
Windows
Mac OS
2000/XP/
Server 2003
OS/2
UNIX®/
Linux
x
Model scripts1
1
Available only on the World Wide Web.
Mac OS X V.10.2 or higher, TCP/IP required
3
Install by using the Add Printer wizard.
2
Note
You can also purchase the optional HP Digital Sending Software, which provides digital fax
capability. For more information go to http://www.hp.com/go/lj4345mfp_software
Printer drivers
Printer drivers provide access to the MFP features and allow the computer to communicate
with the MFP (by using a printer language). Check the install notes, Readme, and latebreaking Readme files on the MFP CD-ROM for additional software and languages.
The following printer drivers are included with the MFP. The most recent drivers are
available at http://www.hp.com/go/lj4345mfp_software. Depending on the configuration of
Windows-based computers, the installation program for the MFP software automatically
checks the computer for Internet access to obtain the latest drivers.
Note
PCL5 printer drivers and printer drivers for Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 are available for
download at http://www.hp.com/go/lj4345mfp_software.
Operating system1
PCL 6
PS
PPD2
Windows 98, Me
x
x
x
Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003
x
x
x
x
x
Mac OS
1
Not all MFP features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the contextsensitive help in the printer driver for available features.
2
PostScript (PS) Printer Description files (PPDs)
Note
If your system did not automatically check the Internet for the latest drivers during software
installation, download them from http://www.hp.com/go/lj4345mfp_software.
You can obtain Model Scripts for UNIX and Linux by downloading them from the Internet or
by requesting them from an HP-authorized service or support provider. For Linux support
see http://www.hp.com/go/linux. For UNIX support see http://www.hp.com/go/
jetdirectunix_software. For additional information see the support flyer that came in the MFP
box.
Note
ENWW
If the printer driver that you want is not on the MFP CD-ROM or is not listed here, check the
install notes, Readme, and late-breaking Readme files to see if the printer driver is
supported. If it is not supported, contact the manufacturer or distributor of the program that
you are using and request a driver for the MFP.
Software
13
Additional drivers
The following drivers are not included on the CD-ROM, but are available from the Internet.
Note
●
OS/2 PCL 5 or PCL 6 printer driver.
●
OS/2 PS printer driver.
●
UNIX model scripts.
●
Linux drivers.
●
HP OpenVMS drivers.
The OS/2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS/2. They are not
available for Simplified Chinese, Korean, Japanese, or Traditional Chinese.
Select the correct printer driver for your needs
If you are using a Windows operating system, select a printer driver based on the way that
you use the MFP. Certain MFP features are available only in the PCL 6 drivers. See the
printer driver Help for available features.
Note
●
Use the PCL 6 driver to take full advantage of MFP features. For general office printing,
the PCL 6 driver is recommended to provide optimum performance and print quality.
●
Use the PS driver if you are printing primarily from PostScript-specific programs such as
Adobe® and Corel®, for compatibility with PostScript Level 3 needs, or for PS flash font
support.
The MFP automatically switches between PS and PCL printer languages.
Using the printer drivers
Use one of the following methods to open the printer drivers from your computer:
Operating
System
To change the settings
for all print jobs until
the software program
is closed
To change the print
job default settings
(for example, turn on
Print on Both Sides by
default)
To change the
configuration settings
(for example, add a
physical option such
as a tray or enable/
disable a driver feature
such as Allow Manual
Duplexing)
Windows 98, NT
4.0, and Me
On the File menu in the
software program, click
Print. Select the MFP,
and then click
Properties.
Click Start, click
Settings, and then click
Printers. Right-click the
MFP icon, and then
select Properties
(Windows 98 and Me) or
Document Defaults
(Windows NT 4.0).
Click Start, click
Settings, and then click
Printers. Right-click the
MFP icon, and then
select Properties. Click
the Configure tab.
The steps can vary; this
procedure is most
common.
14
Chapter 1 MFP basics
ENWW
Operating
System
To change the settings
for all print jobs until
the software program
is closed
To change the print
job default settings
(for example, turn on
Print on Both Sides by
default)
To change the
configuration settings
(for example, add a
physical option such
as a tray or enable/
disable a driver feature
such as Allow Manual
Duplexing)
Windows 2000,
XP, and Server
2003
On the File menu in the
software program, click
Print. Select the MFP,
and then click
Properties or
Preferences.
Click Start, click
Settings, and then click
Printers or Printers
and Faxes. Right-click
the MFP icon, and then
select Printing
Preferences.
Click Start, click
Settings, and then click
Printers or Printers
and Faxes. Right-click
the MFP icon, and then
select Properties. Click
the Device Settings tab.
The steps can vary; this
procedure is most
common.
Mac OS V9.1
On the File menu, click
Print. Change the
settings that you want
on the various pop-up
menus.
On the File menu, click
Print. As you change
settings on the pop-up
menu, click Save
Settings.
Click the desktop MFP
icon. From the Printing
menu, click Change
Setup.
Mac OS X V10.1
On the File menu, click
Print. Change the
settings that you want
on the various pop-up
menus.
On the File menu, click
Print. Change the
settings that you want
on the various pop-up
menus, and then on the
main pop-up menu, click
Save Custom Setting.
These settings are
saved as the Custom
option. To use the new
settings, you must select
the Custom option
every time that you open
a program and print.
Delete the MFP and
reinstall it. The driver will
be auto-configured with
the new options when it
is reinstalled.
On the File menu, click
Print. Change the
settings that you want
on the various pop-up
menus, and then, on the
Presets pop-up menu,
click Save as and type a
name for the preset.
These settings are
saved in the Presets
menu. To use the new
settings, you must select
the saved preset option
every time you open a
program and print.
Open Print Center by
selecting the hard drive,
clicking Applications,
clicking Utilities, then
double-clicking Print
Center. Click on the
print queue. On the
Printers menu, click
Show Info. Click the
Installable Options
menu.
Mac OS X V10.2
ENWW
On the File menu, click
Print. Change the
settings that you want
on the various pop-up
menus.
Note
Use this procedure for
AppleTalk connections
only. Configuration
settings might not be
available in Classic
mode.
Note
Configuration settings
might not be available in
Classic mode.
Software
15
Operating
System
To change the settings
for all print jobs until
the software program
is closed
To change the print
job default settings
(for example, turn on
Print on Both Sides by
default)
To change the
configuration settings
(for example, add a
physical option such
as a tray or enable/
disable a driver feature
such as Allow Manual
Duplexing)
Mac OS X V10.3
On the File menu, click
Print. Change the
settings that you want
on the various pop-up
menus.
On the File menu, click
Print. Change the
settings that you want
on the various pop-up
menus, and then, on the
Presets pop-up menu,
click Save as and type a
name for the preset.
These settings are
saved in the Presets
menu. To use the new
settings, you must select
the saved preset option
every time that you open
a program and print.
Open Printer Setup
Utility by select ing the
hard drive, clicking
Applications, clicking
Utilities, then doubleclicking Printer Setup
Utility. Click on the print
queue. On the Printers
menu, click Show Info.
Click the Installable
Options menu.
Printer driver Help (Windows)
Each printer driver has Help screens that can be activated by using the Help button, the F1
key on the computer keyboard, or a question-mark symbol in the upper-right corner of the
printer driver (depending on the Windows operating system that you are using). You can
also open printer-driver Help by right-clicking any item in the driver, and then clicking What's
This? These Help screens give detailed information about the specific driver. Printer driver
Help is separate from your program Help.
Printer driver features
The printer driver has features that enable you to perform many helpful tasks, such as the
following:
●
Print on both sides (duplex printing)
●
Print watermarks
●
Resize documents
●
Configure a custom paper size
●
Print on different paper for the first page or print covers on different paper
●
Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper
●
Set up output options such as stapling or using the 3-bin mailbox
●
Specify whether pages are delivered face-up or face-down
For complete information about using these driver features, see Printing on both sides of
paper (optional duplexer) and Using features in the printer driver.
16
Chapter 1 MFP basics
ENWW
HP disk management utility
The HP Disk Management Utility should be installed only on the computer of the system
administrator. It allows administrators to control the hard disk and flash memory features that
are not found in the drivers. Bidirectional communication is required.
Note
HP Disk Management Utility is not available for Macintosh operating systems.
Use the HP Disk Management Utility for the following tasks:
●
Initialize disk and flash memory.
●
Download to, delete from, and manage fonts on disk and flash memory across networks.
●
Download PostScript Type 1, PostScript Type 42 (TrueType fonts converted to
PostScript format), TrueType, and PCL bitmap fonts. (To download Type 1 fonts, Adobe
Type Manager must be loaded and running.)
Software for Macintosh computers
The HP installer provides PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files, and Printer Dialog
Extensions (PDEs) for use with Macintosh computers.
The embedded Web server can be used with Macintosh computers if the MFP is connected
to a network. See Using the embedded Web server for more information.
PPDs
Use PPDs in combination with the Apple PostScript drivers to gain access to the MFP
features and to allow the computer to communicate with the MFP. An installation program for
the PPDs, PDEs, and other software is provided on the CD-ROM. Use the appropriate PS
driver that comes with the operating system.
Installing the printing system software
The MFP comes with printing system software and MFP drivers on a CD-ROM. The printing
system software on the CD-ROM must be installed in order to take full advantage of the
MFP features.
If you do not have access to a CD-ROM drive, you can download the printing system
software from the Internet at http://www.hp.com/go/lj4345mfp_software.
Note
Sample model scripts for UNIX (HP-UX®, Sun Solaris) and Linux networks are available for
download from the World Wide Web. For Linux support see http://www.hp.com/go/linux. For
UNIX support see http://www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software.
You can download the latest software free of charge at http://www.hp.com/go/
lj4345mfp_software.
After you have followed the installation instructions and loaded the software, see Using
features in the printer driver to get the most out of your MFP.
Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections
This section explains how to install the printing system software for Microsoft Windows 98,
Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
ENWW
Software
17
When installing the printing software in a direct-connect environment, always install the
software before connecting the parallel cable. If the parallel cable was connected before the
software installation, see Installing the software after the parallel cable has been connected.
Use an IEEE 1284-compatible parallel cable.
To install the printing system software
1. Close all software programs that are open or running.
2. Insert the MFP CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure:
a. On the Start menu, click Run.
b. Type the following (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive): X:\setup
c.
Click OK.
3. When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4. Click Finish when the installation has completed.
5. Restart the computer.
6. Print a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly
installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and Readme
files on the MFP CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the MFP box, or go to http://www.hp.com/
go/lj4345mfp_software for help or more information. You can also obtain assistance from the
HP Instant Support service, which is available through the embedded Web server. See
Using the embedded Web server.
Installing Windows printing system software for networks
The software on the MFP CD-ROM supports network installation with a Microsoft network
(except Windows 3.1x). For network installation on other operating systems, go to
http://www.hp.com/go/lj4345mfp_software.
Note
Windows NT 4.0 drivers must be installed through the Windows Add-Printer Wizard.
The installer does not support printer installation or printer object creation on Novell servers.
It supports only direct-mode network installations between Windows computers and a
printer. To install your MFP and create objects on a Novell server, use an HP utility, such as
HP Web Jetadmin, or a Novell utility, such as NWadmin.
The easiest way to install the software is by using the Installer Customization Wizard,
which is available on the first installation screen. If you choose not to use this wizard, use the
following procedure to install the software.
18
Chapter 1 MFP basics
ENWW
To install the printing system software
1. If you are installing the software on Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or
Windows Server 2003 make sure that you have administrator privileges.
Print a configuration page to make sure that the HP Jetdirect print server is configured
correctly for the network. See Checking the MFP configuration. On the second page,
locate the MFP IP address. You might need this address to complete network installation.
2. Close all software programs that are open or running.
3. Insert the MFP CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
4. If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure:
a. On the Start menu, click Run.
b. Type the following (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive): X:\setup
c.
Click OK.
5. When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
6. Click Finish when the installation is complete.
7. Restart the computer.
8. Print a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly
installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and Readme
files on the MFP CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the MFP box, or go to http://www.hp.com/
go/lj4345mfp_software for help or more information. You can also obtain assistance from the
HP Instant Support service, which is available through the embedded Web server. See
Using the embedded Web server.
To set up a Windows computer to use the network MFP with Windows-sharing
You can share the MFP on the network so that other network users can print to it.
See your Windows documentation to set up Windows-sharing. After the MFP is shared,
install the MFP software on all computers that share the MFP.
Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks
This section describes how to install Macintosh printing system software. The printing
system software supports Apple Mac OS 9.x and later and Mac OS X V10.1 and later.
The printing system software includes PostScript Printer Description files (PPDs). PPDs, in
combination with the Apple LaserWriter 8 printer driver, provide access to the MFP features
and allow the computer to communicate with the MFP. An installation program for the PPDs
and other software is provided on the CD-ROM that came with the MFP. In addition, use the
Apple LaserWriter 8 printer driver that comes with the computer.
To install printer drivers in Mac OS 9.x
1. Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.
ENWW
Software
19
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD-ROM menu runs automatically. If
the CD-ROM menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD-ROM icon on the
desktop, and then double-click the Installer icon. This icon is located in the Installer/
<language> folder of the Starter CD-ROM, where <language> is your language
preference. For example, the Installer/English folder contains the Installer icon for the
English MFP software.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen.
4. From HD, click Applications, click Utilities, and then open Desktop Printer Utility.
5. Double click Printer (AppleTalk).
6. Next to AppleTalk Printer Selection, click Change.
7. Select the MFP, click Auto Setup, and then click Create.
8. On the Printing menu, click Set Default Printer.
To install printer drivers in Mac OS X V10.1 and later
1. Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD-ROM menu runs automatically. If
the CD-ROM menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD-ROM icon on the
desktop, and then double-click the Installer icon. This icon is located in the Installer/
<language> folder of the Starter CD-ROM, where <language> is your language
preference. For example, the Installer/English folder contains the Installer icon for the
English MFP software.
3. Double-click the HP LaserJet Installers folder.
4. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
5. Double-click the Installer icon for the appropriate language.
Note
If Mac OS X and Mac OS 9.x (Classic) are installed on the same computer, the installer will
show both the Classic and the Mac OS X installation options.
6. On your computer hard drive, double-click Applications, double-click Utilities, and then
double-click Print Center or Print Setup Utility.
Note
If you are using Mac OS X V10.3, "Print Setup Utility" has replaced "Print Center".
7. Click Add Printer.
8. Select your connection type.
9. Select HP LaserJet 4345 MFP from the list.
10. Click Add Printer.
11. Close the Print Center or the Print Setup Utility by clicking the close button in the upperleft corner.
Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections
Note
20
Macintosh computers do not support parallel port connections. To connect the MFP directly
to a Macintosh computer, order an HP Jetdirect Connectivity card, which has USB port. See
Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies for information about ordering this card. (Order
part number J4135A.)
Chapter 1 MFP basics
ENWW
This section explains how to install the printing system software for OS 9.x and later and
OS X V10.1 and later.
The Apple LaserWriter driver must be installed in order to use the PPD files. Use the Apple
LaserWriter 8 driver that came with your Macintosh computer.
To install the printing system software
1. Connect a USB cable between the USB port on the EIO card and the USB port on the
computer. Use a standard 2-meter USB cable.
2. Insert the MFP CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and run the installer.
The CD-ROM menu runs automatically. If the CD-ROM menu does not run
automatically, double-click the CD-ROM icon on the desktop, and then double-click the
Installer icon. This icon is located in the Installer/<language> folder of the Starter
CD-ROM, where <language> is your language preference.
3. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4. For Mac OS 9.x:
a. From the computer hard drive, double-click Applications, double-click Utilities, and
then double-click Desktop Printer Utility.
b. Double-click Printer (USB), and then click OK.
c.
Next to USB Printer Selection, click Change.
d. Select HP LaserJet 4345 MFP, and then click OK.
e. Next to Postscript Printer Description (PPD) File, click Auto Setup, and then click
Create.
f.
On the Printing menu, click Set Default Printer.
For Mac OS X:
a. From HD, click Applications, then click Utilities, and then click Print Center or
Printer Setup Utility to start the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
b. If the MFP appears in the Printer list, delete the MFP.
c.
Click Add.
d. On the drop-down menu at the top, click USB.
e. In the Printer Model List, click HP.
f.
Under Model Name, click HP LaserJet 4345mfp Series, and then click Add.
5. Print a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly
installed.
Installing the software after the parallel cable has been connected
If you have already connected a parallel cable to a Windows computer, the New Hardware
Found dialog box appears when you turn on the computer.
To install the software for Windows 98 or Windows Me
1. In the New Hardware Found dialog box, click Search CD-ROM drive.
2. Click Next.
3. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
ENWW
Software
21
4. Print a page from any software program to make sure that the MFP software is correctly
installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and Readme
files on the MFP CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the MFP box, or go to http://www.hp.com/
go/lj4345mfp_software for help or more information. You can also obtain assistance from the
HP Instant Support service, which is available through the embedded Web server. See
Using the embedded Web server.
To install the software for Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
1. In the New Hardware Found dialog box, click Search.
2. On the Locate Driver Files screen, select the Specify a Location check box, clear all
other check boxes, and then click Next.
3. Type the following text, where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive: X:\2000XP
4. Click Next.
5. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
6. Click Finish when installation is complete.
7. Select a language and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
8. Print a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly
installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and Readme
files on the MFP CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the MFP box, or go to http://www.hp.com/
go/lj4345mfp_software for help or more information. You can also obtain assistance from the
HP Instant Support service, which is available through the embedded Web server. See
Using the embedded Web server.
Uninstalling the software
This section explains how to uninstall the printing system software.
To remove software from Windows operating systems
Use the Uninstaller to select and remove any or all of the Windows HP printing-system
components.
1. Click Start and then point to Programs.
2. Point to HP LaserJet 4345mfp Series, and then click Uninstaller.
3. Click Next.
4. Select the HP printing-system components that you want to uninstall.
5. Click OK.
6. Follow the instructions on the computer screen to complete the uninstallation.
22
Chapter 1 MFP basics
ENWW
Loading input trays
This section contains information about loading standard- and custom-size media into the
input trays.
CAUTION
To avoid a jam, never add or remove paper from a tray while printing or copying from that
tray. To avoid damaging the MFP, print labels and envelopes from tray 1 only. Print on only
one side of labels, envelopes, and transparencies.
Loading tray 1
Tray 1 holds up to 100 sheets of paper or 10 envelopes. For more information about
supported media, see Supported types and sizes of print media.
To load tray 1 when the same media is used for multiple print jobs
Use the following procedure if tray 1 is loaded continually with the same type of media, and
the media is not usually removed from tray 1 between print jobs. The following procedure
can also increase the MFP performance when printing from tray 1.
CAUTION
To avoid a jam, never add or remove media from a tray while printing from that tray.
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch PAPER HANDLING.
3. Touch TRAY 1 SIZE.
4. Touch the correct media size. SETTING SAVED appears on the control-panel display.
Note
If you select CUSTOM as the media size, also select the unit of measure and the X and Y
dimensions.
5. Touch TRAY 1 TYPE.
6. Touch the correct paper type. SETTING SAVED appears on the control-panel display.
7. Touch EXIT to exit the menus.
8. Open tray 1.
9. Load paper according to size and finishing options. See Orienting media for information
about loading preprinted, letterhead, and prepunched paper.
CAUTION
ENWW
To avoid jams, print sheets of labels one sheet at a time.
Loading input trays
23
10. Adjust the media guides so they lightly touch the media stack, but do not bend the media.
11. Make sure the media fits under the tabs on the guides and not above the load level
indicators.
If printing on long media also pull out the tray extension until it stops.
Note
12. Touch EXIT to exit the menus. The tray is ready to use.
Loading trays 2, 3, 4 and 5
Trays 2 , 3, 4, and 5 hold up to 500 sheets of standard media. For information about paper
specifications, see Supported types and sizes of print media.
The following are the detectable standard sizes, which are marked inside the tray:
●
A4
●
Letter
●
Legal
●
Executive
●
B5 (JIS)
●
A5
The following are the undetectable standard sizes:
●
16K
●
Executive (JIS)
●
8.5 x 13 (216 x 330 mm).
When loading undectable sizes, you need to manually set the size at the control panel. For
information about loading custom-size media, see Loading custom-size media in trays 2, 3,
4, and 5.
CAUTION
To avoid a jam, never add or remove paper from a tray while printing from that tray.
To load standard-size media in trays 2, 3, 4, and 5
Note
24
Do not load envelopes in trays 2, 3, 4, or 5. Use only tray 1 for printing on envelopes.
Chapter 1 MFP basics
ENWW
1. Open the tray until it stops.
2. Load the media into the tray.
Note
See Orienting media for information about loading preprinted, letterhead, and prepunched
paper.
3. Adjust the media-length guide by pressing the tab on the guide and moving it until it
touches the media stack.
4. Adjust the media-width guide by pressing the tab on the guide and moving it until it
touches the media stack.
5. Close the tray.
ENWW
Loading input trays
25
Note
Depending on the size that you selected, the MFP might prompt you to move the media
guides. Follow the instructions on the control panel.
Loading custom-size media in trays 2, 3, 4, and 5
1. Open the tray until it stops.
2. Press the tab on the left media guide and slide the guide all the way out.
3. Press the tab on the front media guide and slide the guide all the way out.
4. Load the media into the tray.
Note
26
See Orienting media for information about loading preprinted, letterhead, and prepunched
paper.
Chapter 1 MFP basics
ENWW
5. Adjust the left media guide by pressing the tab on the guide and sliding the guide until it
gently touches the media stack
6. Adjust the front media guide by pressing the tab on the guide and sliding the guide until
it gently touches the media stack.
7. Look at the package for the ream of paper. Note the value of the width (X dimension)
and the length (Y dimension). You will need this information for a later step.
8. Close the tray.
9. If the size that appears on the control panel is CUSTOM, then the tray size is set to ANY
CUSTOM. The tray will match any custom-size print job, even if the print-job dimensions
are different from the dimensions of the media that is loaded in the tray. If you prefer,
you can specify the exact dimensions of the custom-size media that is loaded in the tray.
When you specify exact dimensions, the dimensions appear as the size, rather than
CUSTOM.
Touch CUSTOM. The UNIT OF MEASURE menu appears.
Note
The MFP might prompt you to move the media guides. Follow the instructions on the control
panel.
10. Touch MILLIMETERS or touch INCHES.
11. Use the numeric keypad to select the X dimension (short edge).
12. Touch OK.
13. Use the numeric keypad to select the Y dimension (long edge).
14. Touch OK. SETTING SAVED appears on the control-panel display for a moment. The
tray size then appears.
15. Touch EXIT to accept the settings. The tray is ready to use.
ENWW
Loading input trays
27
Configuring the trays by using the Paper handling menu
You can configure the media type and size for the input trays without a prompt on the MFP
control panel display. Use the following procedure to gain access to the PAPER HANDLING
menu and configure the trays.
To configure the media size for a tray
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch PAPER HANDLING.
3. Touch TRAY <N> SIZE.
4. Touch the media size that is loaded.
5. Touch EXIT to exit the menus.
Note
Depending on the size that you selected, the MFP might prompt you to move the media
guides. Follow the instructions on the control panel, and then close the tray.
To configure the media type for a tray
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch PAPER HANDLING.
3. Touch TRAY <N> TYPE.
4. Touch the media type that is loaded.
5. Touch EXIT to exit the menus.
28
Chapter 1 MFP basics
ENWW
2
Using the control panel
The MFP control panel has a touchscreen graphical display that offers an integrated
approach to copying, e-mail, and printing.
The control panel provides you with all of the features of a standard photocopier, plus
printing and e-mail capabilities. Use the control panel to describe the features of the original
document, to specify any modifications to the scanned image, and to select the features that
you want in the copy. For example, you can describe the original document as an A4-sized,
duplexed, text document, and then you can apply scaling or contrast changes in the copy.
Next, select copy options such as tray and paper size to be used for copying. The graphical
display shows a representative image (page icon) of both the original document and the copy.
In addition, use the control-panel menus to set system defaults, to customize settings for a
particular job, and to store and retrieve printed and scanned jobs.
This chapter introduces the following control-panel topics:
●
Control-panel layout
●
Control-panel features
●
Home-screen navigation
●
Help system
●
Menu map
●
Retrieve job menu
●
Information menu
●
Paper handling menu
●
Configure device menu
●
Fax menu
●
Diagnostics menu
●
Service menu
Specific information about printing, copying, and sending tasks appears in later chapters.
ENWW
29
Control-panel layout
The control panel includes a touchscreen graphical display, job-control buttons, a numeric
keypad, and three light-emitting diode (LED) status lights.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
30
Touchscreen graphical display
Numeric keypad
SLEEP button
MENU button
STATUS button
STOP button
RESET button
START button
Attention light
Data light
Ready light
Display contrast adjustment
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Control-panel features
Features/buttons
(Help button)
ENWW
Function
Provides access to "What is this?" Help. This
function is embedded in the touchscreen menus.
Reset
Resets the job settings to factory or user-defined
default values.
Stop
Cancels the active job.
Start
Begins a copy job, starts digital sending, or
continues a job that has been interrupted.
Numeric keypad
Allows you to type numeric values for number of
copies required and other numeric values.
Control-panel features
31
Home-screen navigation
Use the following control-panel elements in the graphical display to gain access to MFP
features.
1
2
3
Note
32
Touch this to use the copy screen. For more information, see Copy-screen navigation.
Touch this to use the e-mail screen. For more information, see E-mail screen navigation.
Touch this to use the fax screen. For more information, see Faxing and see the HP LaserJet
Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide.
If you install the optional HP Digital Sending Software (DSS), additional fields appear on the
control-panel display. You might need to scroll sideways to see all the fields.
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Help system
At any time, you can gain access to the help system on the touchscreen of the graphical
display by touching
.
"What is this?" Help
The MFP provides information about any topic on the touchscreen of the graphical display.
On the top level screen, touch
(Help button), and then touch What is this?. After
touching an item, a pop-up dialog box opens and displays information about the item you
touched. After reading the information, touch a clear space on the screen to remove the
What is this? pop-up dialog box.
On other levels of the touchscreen, you can gain access to the Help system by touching
(Help button), which is located in the upper-left corner of each screen.
"Show me how" Help
The Show me how Help contains information about how to use the MFP features.
1. On the graphical touchscreen display on the control panel, touch
(Help button).
2. Touch Show me how. Choose a topic from the Show Me How Index screen by using
the scroll bar to highlight a topic.
3. Touch OK.
Show me how also appears in a What is this? pop-up dialog box if the item that you select is
a function that includes instructions. For example, if you touch What is this? Help, and then
touch Enhance, you see a Show me how button in the pop-up dialog box. Touch the Show
me how button for information about how to enhance your copies.
ENWW
Help system
33
Menu map
To see the current settings for the menus and items that are available in the control panel,
print a control-panel-menu map:
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch INFORMATION.
3. Touch PRINT MENU MAP.
Many of these values can be overridden from the driver or program. You might want to store
the menu map near the MFP for reference.
The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options currently installed in the
MFP. For a complete list of control-panel items and possible values, see the sections for
each menu in this chapter.
34
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Retrieve job menu
Note
If no private, stored, quick copy, or proof-and-hold jobs are stored on the MFP hard disk or in
RAM memory, the message NO STORED JOBS appears when the menu is selected.
1. A list of user names appears on the control-panel display.
2. Select a user name, and then a list of stored jobs for that user appears.
3. Select a job name, and then print or delete the job. If a job requires a PIN to print,
(lock symbol) appears next to the PRINT command and a PIN must be provided. If a job
requires a PIN to delete,
PIN must be provided.
(lock symbol) appears next to the DELETE command and a
4. If you select PRINT, the MFP prompts for the number of copies to print (1 to 32,000).
ENWW
Retrieve job menu
35
Information menu
To print an information page, scroll to and touch the information page that you want.
Item
Explanation
PRINT MENU MAP
Generates a menu map that shows layout and
current settings of the control menu items.
The MFP will return to the Ready state when the
page is completed.
PRINT CONFIGURATION
Generates a page detailing the current
configuration of the MFP.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state
when the page is completed.
PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE
Generates a page that shows the number of
pages remaining for each supply in the MFP.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state
when the page is completed.
PRINT USAGE PAGE
Generates a page that contains information that
could be used for cost accounting.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state
when the page is completed.
PRINT FILE DIRECTORY
Generates a directory page containing
information for all installed mass storage devices.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state
when the page is completed.
PRINT PCL FONT LIST
Generates a typeface list of all PCL fonts
available on the MFP.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state
when the page is completed.
PRINT PS FONT LIST
Generates a typeface list of all PS fonts
available on the MFP.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state
when the page is completed.
36
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Paper handling menu
When paper-handling settings are correctly configured through the control panel, you can
print by selecting the type and size of paper from the driver or software application. For more
information, see Selecting which tray is used for printing.
Some items in this menu (such as duplex and manual feed) are available from a software
program, or from the printer driver (if the correct printer driver is installed). Printer-driver and
software-program settings override control-panel settings. For more information, see Using
features in the printer driver.
Note
Items that have an asterisk (*) are the default values.
Item
Values
Explanation
ENVELOPE FEEDER SIZE
ENVELOPE #10
Allows you to set the envelope
size for the optional envelope
feeder.
ENVELOPE MONARCH
ENVELOPE C5
ENVELOPE DL
ENVELOPE B5
ENVELOPE FEEDER TYPE
ENVELOPE
Note
This item appears only if an
optional envelope feeder is
installed.
Allows you to set the media
type for the optional envelope
feeder.
Note
This item appears only if an
optional envelope feeder is
installed.
ENWW
Paper handling menu
37
Item
Values
Explanation
TRAY 1 SIZE
ANY SIZE*
Allows you to set the media
size for tray 1.
LETTER
LEGAL
EXECUTIVE
STATEMENT
8.5X13
A4
A5
B5(JIS)
EXECUTIVE(JIS)
DPOSTCARD(JIS)
16K
ENVELOPE #10
ENVELOPE MONARCH
ENVELOPE C5
ENVELOPE DL
ENVELOPE B5
CUSTOM
ANY CUSTOM
TRAY 1 TYPE
ANY TYPE*
PLAIN
Allows you to specify the type
of media in tray 1.
PREPRINTED
LETTERHEAD
TRANSPARENCY
PREPUNCHED
LABELS
BOND
RECYCLED
COLOR
ROUGH 90-105 G/M2
ENVELOPE
38
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
TRAY <N> SIZE
ANY SIZE
Allows you to set the media
size for tray 2, tray 3, tray 4,
and tray 5. Substitute the tray
number for <N>.
LETTER*
LEGAL
EXECUTIVE
8.5X13
A4
A5
B5(JIS)
EXECUTIVE(JIS)
16K
CUSTOM
ANY CUSTOM
TRAY <N> TYPE
ANY TYPE
PLAIN*
PREPRINTED
Allows you to specify the type
of media in each tray.
Substitute the tray number for
<N>.
LETTERHEAD
TRANSPARENCY
PREPUNCHED
LABELS
BOND
RECYCLED
COLOR
ROUGH 90-105 G/M2
ENWW
Paper handling menu
39
Configure device menu
This menu contains all of the administrative functions.
Note
Items that have an asterisk (*) are the default values.
Originals submenu
Although you can gain access to each item using the touchscreen graphical display, you can
also select copying and sending items through the MFP menus. To gain access to this
menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch ORIGINALS.
Item
Values
Explanation
PAPER SIZE
LETTER*
Sets the paper size of the
original document.
LEGAL
MIXED LTR/LGL
EXECUTIVE
A4
A5
B5(JIS)
NUMBER OF SIDES
1*
2
Indicates whether one side or
both sides of the original
document are scanned.
The MFP prompts you to turn
the page over if 2 is selected
and the original is placed on
the glass.
ORIENTATION
PORTRAIT*
LANDSCAPE
CONTENT
MIXED*
PHOTO
TEXT
Indicates whether the
orientation of the original is
portrait (short-edge top) or
landscape (long-edge top).
Describes the type of image on
the original.
Select PHOTO if the original
consists of graphic images, or
TEXT if the image consists of
text only.
Select MIXED if the original
contains graphics and text.
Describe the TEXT/PHOTO
MIX with a value from 0 to 8,
where 0 represents mostly text,
and 8 represents mostly
graphics.
40
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
DENSITY
0 to 8
Specifies the contrast and
brightness of the image. You
can choose from nine
increments.
0=darkest
8=lightest
Copying submenu
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch COPYING.
Item
Values
Explanation
NUMBER OF SIDES
1*
Indicates whether images should be
printed on one side or both sides of the
copy.
2
COLLATE
ON*
OFF
PAPER DESTINATION
OUTPUT BIN 1*
OUTPUT BIN 2
OUTPUT BIN 3
Indicates whether copies should be
collated or not collated.
Select the output bin on the optional
3-bin mailbox.
Note
This item appears only if an optional
3-bin mailbox is installed.
COPIES
1-999
Indicates the number of copies made
when you press START without
selecting the number of copies by
using the numeric keypad.
FIRST COPY SPEED
NO EARLY
WARM UP*
Select NO EARLY WARM UP to
disable the Fast First Copy feature.
Using the Fast First Copy feature can
cause excessive wear on the MFP.
This is the default setting.
EARLY WARM
UP
Select EARLY WARM UP to enable
the Fast First Copy feature, which
decreases the time that the MFP
requires to make a copy when it has
been idle for awhile.
STAPLE
NONE*
To enable stapling, select CORNER.
CORNER
Note
This item is available only if the stapler/
stacker is installed.
Enhancement submenu
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch ENHANCEMENT.
ENWW
Configure device menu
41
Item
Values
Explanation
SHARPNESS
0 to 4
Specifies the sharpness setting.
0=minimum sharpness
4=maximum sharpness
BACKGROUND REMOVAL
0 to 8
Controls the amount of
background material from the
original that is eliminated on
the copy. Background removal
is useful when you copy both
sides and do not want the
material on the first side to be
visible on the second side of
the copy.
0=minimum background
removal (more background is
visible)
8=maximum background
removal (less background is
visible)
Sending submenu
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch SENDING.
42
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Values
Options
Explanation
E-MAIL
SCAN PREFERENCE
COLOR*
Determines whether
the document is
scanned in color or
black and white.
BLACK AND WHITE
FILE TYPE
PDF*
TIFF
Specifies the file
format of the e-mail
attachment.
M-TIFF
JPEG
FILE SIZE
SMALL
STANDARD*
LARGE
RESOLUTION
75 DPI
150 DPI*
200 DPI
300 DPI
ADDRESS
VALIDATION
REPLICATE MFP
ON*
OFF
Specifies the
compression of a file,
which determines the
file size.
Specifies the
resolution of a
document or image; a
lower DPI setting
results in a smaller file
size, but image quality
might be affected.
Enables the MFP to
check e-mail syntax.
Valid e-mail addresses
require the "@" sign
and a ".".
FIND SEND
GATEWAYS
The MFP searches the
network for SMTP and
LDAP gateways that
the MFP can use to
send e-mail.
SMTP GATEWAY
The IP address of the
SMTP server used to
send e-mail.
LDAP GATEWAY
The IP address of the
LDAP gateway that
the MFP uses to look
up e-mail information.
TEST SEND
GATEWAYS
Tests the configured
gateways to see if they
are functional.
Copies the send
settings from one MFP
to another.
Note
This feature might not
work with older MFPs.
ENWW
Configure device menu
43
Item
Values
Options
LDAP SETTINGS
LDAP SEARCH ROOT
LDAP LOGON
METHOD
Explanation
Provides information
for setting up the
LDAP searching
capability.
ANONYMOUS
Touch the correct
logon method.
SIMPLE
GSS
LDAP USERNAME
Type the LDAP
username.
PASSWORD
Type the password.
DOMAIN
Type the correct
domain name.
Printing submenu
Some items in the Printing submenu are available in a software program, or in the printer
driver (if the correct printer driver is installed). Driver and program settings override
control-panel settings. For more information, see Using features in the printer driver.
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch PRINTING.
Item
Values
Explanation
COPIES
1 to 32,000
Set the default number of
copies by selecting any number
from 1 to 32,000. Use the
numeric keypad to select the
number of copies.
Note
It is recommended that you set
the number of copies in the
printer driver or in the software
program. (Printer driver
settings and software program
settings override control-panel
settings.)
44
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
DEFAULT PAPER SIZE
LETTER*
Set the default image size for
paper and envelopes. (The
item name will change from
PAPER to ENVELOPE as you
scroll through the available
sizes.)
LEGAL
EXECUTIVE
8.5X13
A4
A5
B5(JIS)
EXECUTIVE(JIS)
DPOSTCARD(JIS)
16K
ENVELOPE #10
ENVELOPE MONARCH
ENVELOPE C5
ENVELOPE DL
ENVELOPE B5
CUSTOM
DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER
SIZE
UNIT OF MEASURE
X DIMENSION
Y DIMENSION
PAPER DESTINATION
OUTPUT BIN 1*
OUTPUT BIN 2
OUTPUT BIN 3
Allows you to set a custom
paper size for any of the
installed trays. Substitute the
tray number for <N>. Select the
X and Y dimensions of the
custom paper size.
Select the output bin on the
optional 3-bin mailbox.
Note
This item appears only if an
optional 3-bin mailbox is
installed, and if it is not
configured for stacker mode.
DUPLEX
OFF*
ON
Set the value to ON to print on
both sides (duplex) or OFF to
print on one side (simplex) of a
sheet of paper.
For more information, see
Printing on both sides of paper
(optional duplexer).
OVERRIDE A4/LETTER
YES*
NO
ENWW
This command is used to print
on Letter-size media when an
A4 job is sent but no A4-size
media is loaded in the MFP (or
to print on A4-size media when
a Letter job is sent, but no
Letter-size media is loaded in
the MFP).
Configure device menu
45
Item
Values
Explanation
MANUAL FEED
OFF*
Feed the paper manually from
tray 1, rather than automatically
from a tray. When MANUAL
FEED=ON and tray 1 is empty,
the MFP goes offline when it
receives a print job. It then
displays MANUALLY FEED
<PAPER SIZE>.
ON
For more information, see
Manually feeding media from
tray 1.
COURIER FONT
REGULAR*
DARK
Select the version of Courier
font to use:
REGULAR: The internal
Courier font available on the
HP LaserJet 4 Series printers.
DARK: The internal Courier
font available on the
HP LaserJet III Series printers.
Both fonts are not available at
the same time.
WIDE A4
YES
NO*
The Wide A4 setting changes
the number of characters that
can be printed on a single line
of A4 paper.
YES: Up to 80 10-pitch
characters can be printed on
one line.
NO: Up to 78 10-pitch
characters can be printed on
one line.
PRINT PS ERRORS
ON
OFF*
PRINT PDF ERRORS
ON
OFF*
PCL SUBMENU
Select ON to print the PS error
page when PS errors occur.
Select ON to print the PDF
error page when PDF errors
occur.
For information about this
option, see PCL submenu.
PCL submenu
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, touch PRINTING, and then touch
PCL SUBMENU.
46
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
FORM LENGTH
5 to 128
Sets vertical spacing from 5 to
128 lines for default paper size.
Enter the value by using the
numeric keypad.
ORIENTATION
PORTRAIT*
Select the default page
orientation.
LANDSCAPE
Note
It is recommended that you set
the page orientation in the
printer driver or in the software
program. (Printer-driver
settings and software-program
settings override control-panel
settings.)
FONT SOURCE
INTERNAL*
INTERNAL: Internal fonts.
CARD SLOT X
CARD SLOT 1, CARD SLOT
2, or CARD SLOT 3: Fonts
stored in one of the three flash
memory slots.
FONT NUMBER
0 to 999
The MFP assigns a number to
each font and lists them on the
PCL Font List (see Checking
the MFP configuration ). The
font number appears in the
Font # column of the printout.
FONT PITCH
0.44 to 99.99
Use the numeric keypad to
enter a value. This item might
not appear, depending on the
font selected.
SYMBOL SET
Variety of available symbol sets
Select any one of several
available symbol sets at the
MFP control panel. A symbol
set is a unique grouping of all
the characters in a font. PC-8
or PC-850 is recommended for
line-draw characters.
APPEND CR TO LF
YES
Select YES to append a
carriage return to each line
feed that is encountered in
backward-compatible PCL jobs
(pure text, no job control).
Some environments, such as
UNIX, indicate a new line by
using only the line-feed control
code. This option allows the
user to append the required
carriage return to each line feed.
NO*
SUPPRESS BLANK PAGES
NO*
YES
ENWW
When set to YES, form feeds
are ignored if the page is blank.
Configure device menu
47
Print quality submenu
You can gain access to some of the items in this menu in either a software program, or in
the printer driver (if the correct printer driver is installed). Printer driver settings and software
program settings override control-panel settings. For more information, see Using features in
the printer driver.
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch PRINT QUALITY.
Item
Values
Explanation
SET REGISTRATION
PRINT TEST PAGE
Shift the margin alignment to
center the image on the page
from top to bottom, and left to
right. You can also align the
image on the front, with the
image printed on the back.
SOURCE
ADJUST TRAY <X>
FUSER MODES
List of media types
Configure the fuser mode
associated with each media
type. The fuser mode can be
changed only in this menu
option at the control panel.
NORMAL: Normal
temperature; prints at full speed.
HIGH1: Raises the
temperature; prints at 3/4 speed.
HIGH2: Raises the
temperature; prints at 1/2 speed.
LOW 1: Low temperature;
prints at 3/4 speed; used for
lightweight media.
LOW 2: Low temperature;
prints at full speed; used for
transparencies.
For a complete list of supported
media types, see Supported
types and sizes of print media.
CAUTION
If you change the fuser mode
to HIGH1 or HIGH2, be sure to
change it back to the default
when you are done printing.
Setting a paper type to HIGH1
or HIGH2 might shorten the life
of some consumables, such as
the fuser, and might cause
other failures or jams.
48
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
OPTIMIZE
HIGH TRANSFER
This item optimizes a number
of MFP parameters for all jobs
rather than by media type. The
default setting for each value is
OFF.
LINE DETAIL
RESTORE OPTIMIZE
Turn HIGH TRANSFER on if
parts of the printed image
appear to have extra toner.
Turn LINE DETAIL on if lines
and text are blurred.
RESTORE OPTIMIZE resets
all of the optimize parameters
to the default settings.
RESOLUTION
300
600
FASTRES 1200*
PRORES 1200
Select the resolution from the
following values:
300: Produces draft print
quality at maximum MFP
speed. 300 dpi (dots per inch)
is recommended for some
bitmapped fonts and graphics,
and for compatibility with the
HP LaserJet III family of printers.
600: Produces high print quality
at maximum product speed.
FASTRES 1200: Produces
optimum print quality
(comparable to 1200 dpi) at
maximum product speed.
PRORES 1200: Effectively
prints at 1200 dots per inch
(dpi) . This setting improves the
quality of the print output, but it
might result in longer printing
times.
Note
It is recommended that you
change the resolution in the
printer driver or in the software
program. (Printer-driver
settings and software-program
settings override control-panel
settings.)
ENWW
Configure device menu
49
Item
Values
Explanation
RET
OFF
Use the Resolution
Enhancement technology (REt)
setting to produce print output
with smooth angles, curves,
and edges.
LIGHT
MEDIUM*
DARK
All print resolutions, including
FastRes 1200, benefit from REt.
Note
It is recommended that you
change the REt setting in the
printer driver or in the software
program. (Printer driver
settings and software program
settings override control-panel
settings.)
ECONOMODE
ON
OFF*
When EconoMode is set to ON,
the MFP prints with a reduced
amount of toner per page;
however, the print quality of the
page is drastically reduced.
HP does not recommend fulltime use of EconoMode. If
EconoMode is used full-time
when the average toner
coverage is significantly less
than 5%, it is possible that the
toner supply will outlast the
mechanical parts in the print
cartridge. If print quality begins
to degrade under these
circumstances, you will need to
install a new print cartridge,
even if a toner supply remains
in the cartridge.
TONER DENSITY
1 to 5
Lighten or darken the print on
the page by changing the toner
density setting. The settings
range from 1 (light) to 5 (dark),
but the default setting of 3
usually produces the best
results.
Note
It is recommended that you
change the toner density in the
printer driver or in the software
program. (Printer-driver
settings and software-program
settings override control-panel
settings.)
50
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
AUTO CLEANING
ON*
When auto-cleaning is on, the
MFP prints a cleaning page
when the page count reaches
the value set in CLEANING
INTERVAL.
OFF
CLEANING INTERVAL
1000
2000
Select the frequency that you
want the MFP to automatically
print a cleaning page.
5000
10000
20000
AUTO CLEANING SIZE
LETTER
A4
PROCESS CLEANING PAGE
No value to select
Use this item to specify the
paper size that the MFP uses
to print the cleaning page.
Use this item to clean the fuser.
The cleaning process might
take up to 2.5 minutes.
System setup submenu
Items in this menu affect the MFP function. Configure the MFP according to your printing
needs.
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch SYSTEM SETUP.
Item
Values
Explanation
DATE/TIME
DATE
Sets the start date and time for
the MFP.
DATE FORMAT
TIME
TIME FORMAT
JOB STORAGE LIMIT
1 to 100
Specifies the number of
QuickCopy and Proof-and-Hold
jobs that can be stored on the
MFP hard-disk accessory.
JOB HELD TIMEOUT
OFF*
Sets the amount of time that
QuickCopy and proof-and-hold
jobs are kept before being
automatically deleted from the
queue.
1 HOUR
4 HOURS
1 DAY
1 WEEK
ENWW
If you change the Job Held
Timeout value, only jobs that
are stored after this change are
affected by the change. Any
jobs that were stored before
you changed the value will
retain the original timeout
setting.
Configure device menu
51
Item
Values
Explanation
SHOW ADDRESS
AUTO
This item defines whether the
IP address is shown on the
control-panel display next to
the Ready message.
OFF*
The default setting is OFF.
TRAY BEHAVIOR
USE REQUESTED TRAY
MANUAL FEED PROMPT
PS DEFER MEDIA
SIZE/TYPE PROMPT
Specifies the behavior of the
tray by indicating which tray the
MFP should print from.
USE REQUESTED TRAY sets
the tray that the MFP should
print from for specified jobs.
The values for this menu item
are EXCLUSIVELY (default) or
FIRST.
MANUAL FEED PROMPT
determines whether or not the
MFP prompts the user when a
job does not match a requested
configured tray. The values for
this menu item are ALWAYS
(default) or UNLESS LOADED.
PS DEFER MEDIA determines
whether the paper-handling
model is based on PostScript
rules or HP rules. The values
for this menu item are
ENABLED (follows the HP
rules) or DISABLED.
SIZE/TYPE PROMPT: Use this
menu item to control whether
the tray configuration message
and its prompts are shown
whenever a tray is configured
for a type or size other than the
type or size that is loaded in
the tray.
52
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
SLEEP DELAY
1 MINUTE
30 MINUTES
Sets how long the MFP
remains idle before it enters
sleep mode.Using sleep mode
offers the following advantages::
60 MINUTES*
●
Minimizes the amount of
power that the MFP
consumes when it is idle
●
Reduces wear on
electronic components in
the MFP
15 MINUTES
90 MINUTES
2 HOURS
4 HOURS
Note
Sleep mode turns off the
backlight on the display, but the
display is still readable.
The MFP automatically exits
sleep mode when you send a
print job, receive a fax, touch
any button on the control panel,
touch any part of the
touchscreen, open the scanner
lid, or load media into the ADF.
To enable or disable sleep
mode, see Resets submenu.
WAKE TIME
List of days of the week
COPY/SEND SETTINGS
For information about these
settings, see the separate table
Copy/send settings .
PERSONALITY
AUTO*
PCL
PS
PDF
XHTML
MIME
ENWW
Sets the time that the MFP
automatically comes out of
sleep mode. This feature can
be set for a different time for
each day of the week.
Select the default MFP
language (personality).
Possible values are determined
by which valid languages are
installed in the MFP.
Normally you should not
change the product language
(the default is AUTO). If you
change the setting to a specific
product language, the MFP
does not automatically switch
from one language to another
unless specific software
commands are sent to the MFP.
Configure device menu
53
Item
Values
Explanation
CLEARABLE WARNINGS
ON
Set the amount of time that a
clearable warning appears on
the MFP control panel.
JOB*
ON: Warning messages appear
on the control panel until they
are cleared.
JOB: Warning messages
appear on the control panel
until the end of the job from
which they were generated.
AUTO CONTINUE
ON*
OFF
This item determines how the
MFP reacts to errors.
ON: If an error prevents
printing, the message is
displayed, and the MFP goes
offline for 10 seconds before
returning online.
OFF: If an error prevents
printing, the message remains
on the display, and the MFP
does not print until you touch
CONTINUE.
CARTRIDGE LOW
CONTINUE*
STOP
Determine how the MFP
functions when toner is low.
The ORDER CARTRIDGE
message first appears when
approximately two weeks of
typical printing remain in the
cartridge. This allows you
sufficient time to order a new
print cartridge.
CONTINUE: The MFP
continues to print while the
ORDER CARTRIDGE
message is displayed.
STOP: The MFP goes offline
and waits for further action.
For more information, see
Managing the print cartridge
CARTRIDGE OUT
STOP
CONTINUE*
Determine how the MFP
behaves when toner is out.
CONTINUE: The MFP displays
REPLACE CARTRIDGE until
the cartridge is replaced. The
MFP continues to print.
STOP: The MFP goes offline
and waits until the cartridge is
replaced.
54
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
JAM RECOVERY
AUTO*
Determine how the MFP
functions when a jam occurs.
ON
OFF
AUTO: The MFP automatically
selects the best mode for jam
recovery (usually ON). This is
the default setting.
ON: The MFP automatically
reprints pages after a jam is
cleared.
OFF: The MFP does not reprint
pages following a jam. Printing
performance might be
increased with this setting.
LANGUAGE
List of available languages
Sets the language of the
control panel.
Copy/send settings
This table lists the options that are available for the COPY/SEND SETTINGS, which are part
of the SYSTEM SETUP submenu.
ENWW
Values
Explanation
INACTIVITY TIMEOUT
Defines the amount of time until the copy settings return to the
default settings after any control-panel activity is completed.
AUTO SETTINGS RESET
Controls whether copy/send settings revert to default settings
after the defined INACTIVITY TIMEOUT period.
TIMEOUT AFTER SEND
Defines the amount of time before the send settings return to the
default settings after any control-panel activity is completed.
HOLD OFF PRINT JOB
Prevents network print jobs from starting within a specified period
after a copy is completed.
HOLD OFF TIME
Defines the amount of time that print jobs must wait if HOLD OFF
PRINT JOB is set to ON.
SCAN AHEAD
Allows a copy job to be scanned even if the MFP is printing
another job. The job will be scanned and held until it can be
printed. If this setting is set to OFF, the job is not scanned until the
print job is completed.
AUTO JOB INTERRUPT
Allows a copy job to automatically interrupt any currently printing
network print job. The copy job is placed between full copies of
the job that is currently printing. If this setting is set to OFF, the
job is not printed until all copies of the print job are completed.
COPY JOB INTERRUPT
Allows you to interrupt the current copy job to make a different
copy. When you press the START button, the MFP shows a
message that asks if you want to interrupt the current copy job.
Configure device menu
55
Values
Explanation
EDGE-TO-EDGE COPIES
Indicates whether copies are printed edge-to-edge (within 2 mm,
or 0.08 inch, of the edge of the paper) or whether they have the
normal, unprintable border (6.35 mm, or 0.25 inch).
AUDIBLE FEEDBACK
Gives an audible indication when you press a button or when you
touch an interactive area of the touchscreen.
MBM-3 Configuration submenu
Use the items in this menu to set up the output bins on the 3-bin mailbox.
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch MBM-3
CONFIGURATION.
Note
This menu appears only when the 3-bin mailbox is installed.
Item
Values
Explanation
OPERATION MODE
FUNCTION SEPARATOR
Select the operation mode that
you want to use. For more
information, see 3-bin mailbox.
MAILBOX*
STACKER
Note
The MFP restarts automatically
whenever the operation mode
is changed.
Stapler/stacker submenu
Use the items in this menu to configure the stapling options.
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch STAPLER/
STACKER.
Note
This menu appears only when the stapler/stacker is installed.
Item
Values
Explanation
STAPLE
ONE
To enable stapling, select ONE.
NONE*
Note
Printer-driver settings override
control-panel settings.
STAPLES OUT
STOP*
CONTINUE
56
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
Use this item to configure the
MFP to either stop or continue
when the staple cartridge is
empty. If you select
CONTINUE, jobs are stacked
in the output bin, but they are
not stapled.
ENWW
I/O submenu
Items in the I/O (input/output) submenu affect the communication between the MFP and the
computer.
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch I/O.
Item
Values
Explanation
I/O TIMEOUT
5 to 300
Use this to select the I/O
timeout period in seconds. (I/O
timeout refers to the time,
measured in seconds, that the
MFP waits before ending a
print job.)
Use this setting to adjust
timeout for best performance. If
data from other ports appear in
the middle of your print job,
increase the timeout value.
PARALLEL INPUT
HIGH SPEED
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS
HIGH SPEED accepts faster
parallel communications used
for connections with newer
computers.
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS
turns the bidirectional parallel
communication on or off. The
default is set for a bidirectional
parallel port (IEEE-1284). This
setting allows the MFP to send
status readback messages to
the computer. (Turning the
parallel advanced functions on
might slow language switching.)
ENWW
FIND SEND GATEWAYS
No value to select
This item searches the network
for both SMTP and LDAP
gateways that can be used to
send e-mail.
SMTP GATEWAY
No value to select
This is the IP address of the
SMTP Gateway that is used for
sending e-mail.
LDAP GATEWAY
No value to select
This is the IP address of the
LDAP Gateway that is used for
looking up e-mail address
information.
Configure device menu
57
EIO X Jetdirect submenu
The EIO (enhanced input/output) submenu appears only when an EIO device (such as an
HP Jetdirect print server) is installed in an EIO slot on the MFP. The items in the menu
depend on the particular accessory product that is installed. If the MFP contains an
HP Jetdirect print server EIO card, you can configure basic networking parameters by using
the EIO menu. These and other parameters can also be configured by using HP Web
Jetadmin or other network configuration tools (such as by using Telnet or browsing the
embedded Web server).
For more information about the EIO submenu, see the documentation that came with the
HP Jetdirect card.
Embedded Jetdirect submenu
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch EMBEDDED
JETDIRECT.
58
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Options
Values
Explanation
TCP/IP
ENABLE
ON
ON: (default) Enable the TCP/IP
protocol.
OFF
OFF: Disable the TCP/IP protocol.
HOST NAME
CONFIG
METHOD
An alphanumeric string, up to 32
characters, that is used to identify the
device. This name is listed on the
Jetdirect configuration page. The
default host name is NPIxxxxxx,
where xxxxxx is the last six digits of
the LAN hardware (MAC) address.
BOOTP
DHCP
AUTO IP
MANUAL
Select BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol)
for automatic configuration from a
BootP server.
Select DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol) for automatic
configuration from a DHCP server.
Select AUTO IP for automatic linklocal IP addressing. An address in the
form 169.254.x.x will be automatically
assigned.
Use the MANUAL settings menu to
configure TCP/IP parameters.
MANUAL
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
SYSLOG
SERVER
DEFAULT
GATEWAY
IDLE TIMEOUT
IP ADDRESS: The unique IP address
of the MFP.
SUBNET MASK: The subnet mask for
the MFP.
SYSLOG SERVER: The IP address of
the syslog server used to receive and
log syslog messages.
DEFAULT GATEWAY: The IP
address of the gateway or router used
for communications with other
networks.
IDLE TIMEOUT: The time period, in
seconds, after which an idle TCP print
data connection is closed. (The
default is 270 seconds).
ENWW
Configure device menu
59
Item
Options
Values
Explanation
TCP/IP
DEFAULT IP
AUTO IP
AUTO IP: A link-local IP address
169.254.x.x will be set.
LEGACY
LEGACY: The address 192.0.0.192
will be set, consistent with older
Jetdirect products.
PRIMARY DNS
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of the
Primary Domain Name System (DNS)
Server.
SECONDARY
DNS
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of the
Secondary Domain Name System
(DNS) Server.
PROXY SERVER
Specifies the proxy server to be used
by embedded software in your MFP. A
proxy server is typically used by
network clients for Internet access. It
caches Web pages, and provides a
degree of Internet security, for those
clients.
To specify a proxy server, enter its IP
address or fully-qualified domain
name. The name can be up to 64
characters.
For some networks, you might need to
contact your Independent Service
Provider (ISP) for the proxy server
address.
PROXY PORT
IPX/SPX
ENABLE
FRAME TYPE
Enter the port number used by the
proxy server for client support. The
port number identifies the port
reserved for proxy activity on your
network, and can be a value from 0 to
65535.
ON
ON: Enable the IPX/SPX protocol.
OFF
OFF: Disable the IPX/SPX protocol.
AUTO
Select the frame-type setting for your
network.
EN_8023EN_IIEN
_8022EN_SNAP
AUTO: (default) Automatically sets
and limits the frame type to the first
one detected.
EN_8023EN_IIEN_8022EN_SNAP:
Frame type selections for Ethernet
networks.
APPLETALK
ENABLE
ON
OFF
DLC/LLC
ENABLE
ON
OFF
60
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
Enable or disable the AppleTalk
protocol.
Enable or disable the DLC/LLC
protocol.
ENWW
Item
Options
LINK SPEED
AUTO
Values
Explanation
The print server will automatically
configure itself to match the network
link speed and communication mode.
If this process fails, 100TX HALF is set.
10T HALF
10T FULL
10T HALF: 10 Mbps, half-duplex
operation.
100TX HALF
100TX FULL
10T FULL: 10 Mbps, full-duplex
operation.
100TX HALF: 100 Mbps, half-duplex
operation.
100TX FULL: 100 Mbps, full-duplex
operation.
Resets submenu
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch RESETS.
Note
Use this menu with caution. You can lose buffered page data or MFP configuration settings
when you select these items. Reset the MFP only under the following circumstances:
●
You want to restore the MFP default settings.
●
Communication between the MFP and computer has been interrupted, and you are not
able to resolve the problem by any other method. See Solving network connectivity
problems.
●
You are having problems with a port.
The items in the Resets submenu will clear all memory in the MFP, while pressing the RESET
button clears only the current job.
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
RESTORE FACTORY
SETTINGS
No value to select
This item restores all
control-panel settings to the
original factory settings.
CLEAR MAINTENANCE
MESSAGE
No value to select
Use this item to temporarily
clear the ORDER
MAINTENANCE KIT and
REPLACE MAINTENANCE
KIT warning messages. The
REPLACE MAINTENANCE
KIT message will reappear
periodically until you replace
the maintenance kit.
Configure device menu
61
Item
Values
Explanation
CLEAR DOCUMENT FEEDER
MESSAGE
No value to select
Use this item to to temporarily
clear the ORDER DOCUMENT
FEEDER KIT and REPLACE
DOCUMENT FEEDER KIT
warning messages. The
REPLACE DOCUMENT
FEEDER KIT message will
reappear periodically until you
replace the maintenance kit.
SLEEP MODE
ON*
Turns sleep mode on or off.
Using sleep mode offers the
following advantages:
OFF
●
Minimizes the amount of
power that the MFP
consumes when it is idle
●
Reduces wear on
electronic components in
the MFP
The MFP automatically exits
sleep mode when you send a
print job, receive a fax, touch
any button on the control panel,
touch any part of the
touchscreen, open the scanner
lid, or load media into the ADF.
You can set how long the MFP
remains idle before it enters
sleep mode. See the SLEEP
DELAY information in the
System setup submenu.
LOCK CARRIAGE
No value to select
This item must be selected
before engaging the Scanner
Head Lock. It moves the
carriage into a position where it
can be locked.
CLEAR ADDRESS BOOK
No value to select
This item clears all addresses
from the address book.
RESET SUPPLIES
NEW MAINTENANCE KIT
Use this item to notify the MFP
that a new maintenance kit or
document feeder kit has been
installed.
NEW DOCUMENT FEEDER
KIT
62
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Fax menu
This menu will appear only if the HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 is installed. For
information about the Fax menu, see the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User
Guide. A printed copy of this guide is provided with the HP LaserJet 4345x mfp, 4345xs mfp,
and 4345xm mfp.
ENWW
Fax menu
63
Diagnostics menu
Item
64
Options
Values
Explanation
PRINT EVENT LOG
Generates a localized
list of the 50 most
recent entries in the
error log. For each
entry, the printed
event log shows the
error number, page
count, error code, and
description or
personality.
SHOW EVENT LOG
At the control panel,
scroll through the
contents of the event
log, which lists the 50
most recent events.
CALIBRATE
SCANNER
Use this item to
calibrate the scanner.
You might need to
calibrate the scanner if
it is not capturing the
correct sections of
scanned documents.
PAPER PATH
SENSOR TEST
Initiates a paper path
sensor test. You can
then enter the menus
to print internal pages
(including the paper
path test), set menu
items, and send jobs
from the computer.
The sensors are
updated as paper
passes each sensor,
but no messages are
generated this state.
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Options
PAPER PATH TEST
PRINT TEST PAGE
Values
Explanation
Generates a test page
that is useful for
testing the paper
handling features of
the MFP.
Specifies which paper
paths are tested.
SOURCE
ALL TRAYS
TRAY 1
Specifies to print a test
page from a specific
tray or from all trays.
TRAY 2*
TRAY <N>
DESTINATION
ALL BINS
OUTPUT BIN 1*
Specify which output
bin to use during the
paper path test.
OUTPUT BIN 2
OUTPUT BIN 3
DUPLEX
ON
OFF*
COPIES
1*
10
50
100
Specifies if the
duplexer is included
when the test is
performed.
Specifies how many
sheets of paper from
the specified source
are sent when the test
is performed.
500
MANUAL SENSOR
TEST
Tests the paper path
sensors and switches
for correct operation.
During this test, the
MFP is offline.
On the control-panel
display, each sensor is
represented by a
string of alphabetic
letters followed by a
corresponding status
for each sensor.
COMPONENT TEST
ENWW
List of MFP
components
This menu item is
used by a service
technician to exercise
individual parts of the
MFP to isolate the
source of any problems.
Diagnostics menu
65
Item
Options
Values
Explanation
PRINT/STOP TEST
STOP TIME
0 to 60000
This menu item is
used by a service
technician to isolate
the potential source of
print-quality problems
with the MFP. The
time is expressed in
milliseconds.
SCANNER TESTS
List of ADF components
This menu item is
used by a service
technician to diagnose
potential problems
with the MFP scanner.
CONTROL PANEL
LED'S
This menu item is
used by a service
technician to diagnose
potential problems
with the MFP control
panel.
DISPLAY
BUTTONS
TOUCHSCREEN
66
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
Service menu
The Service menu is locked. A service technician must type a PIN to open the menu.
ENWW
Service menu
67
68
Chapter 2 Using the control panel
ENWW
3
Printing
This chapter addresses the following topics:
ENWW
●
Orienting media
●
Printing documents
●
Selecting which tray is used for printing
●
Selecting the correct fuser mode
●
Selecting the output bin
●
Printing on envelopes
●
Printing on special media
●
Printing on both sides of paper (optional duplexer)
●
Setting the registration
●
Using features in the printer driver
●
Using job storage features
69
Orienting media
Orient media types and sizes according to the tray from which the media will print and
according to whether the media will be duplexed (printed on both sides).
Use the following table to determine how to orient paper and other media in the trays.
Type of media
Tray
Two-sided
(duplexed)
Media orientation
Paper, including
letterhead (weights
up to 200 g/m2)(53 lb
bond)
1
No1
Side to be printed on facing up, top-edge first.
Paper, including
letterhead (weights
up to 200 g/m2)
(53 lb bond)
1
Yes
First side facing down.
Note: For better
duplexing
performance, set the
size and type for
tray 1
Note: When printing on paper that is both
prepunched and preprinted/letterhead, orient
the paper in the same way that you would
orient preprinted/letterhead paper.
Paper, including
letterhead (weights
up to 120 g/m2)
(32 lb bond)
2, 3, 4, or 5
No1
Side to be printed on facing down, top-edge
to the right.
Note: When printing on paper that is both
prepunched and preprinted/letterhead, orient
the paper in the same way that you would
orient preprinted/letterhead paper.
70
Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Type of media
Tray
Two-sided
(duplexed)
Media orientation
Paper, including
letterhead (weights
up to 120 g/m2)
(32 lb bond)
2, 3, 4, or 5
Yes
First side facing up.
Prepunched letter
or A4-size paper
(weights up to 200 g/
m2)(53 lb bond)
1
Either
Holes toward the front; side to be printed on
facing up.
Note: For better
duplexing
performance, set the
size and type for
tray 1
Note: When printing on paper that is both
prepunched and preprinted/letterhead, orient
the paper in the same way that you would
orient preprinted/letterhead paper.
Envelopes
Tray 1 or
envelope
feeder only
No (never
duplex)
Side to be printed on facing up and the
postage end toward the MFP.
Note
Do not load envelopes face down.
1
When Alternative Letterhead mode is enabled in the printer driver and Letterhead or
Preprinted is selected as the media type, you must orient the media for two-sided (duplex)
printing. For more information, see Printing on both sides of paper (optional duplexer).
ENWW
Orienting media
71
Printing documents
This section provides instructions for printing when you want to set options for the MFP for
Microsoft Windows or Macintosh operating systems. If possible, set the MFP options in the
software program or in the Print dialog box. In most Windows and Macintosh programs, you
can set the MFP options. If a setting is not available in the program or printer driver, you
must set it by using the MFP control panel.
To print a document
1. Make sure that paper is loaded in the MFP. See Loading input trays or Orienting media
for instructions.
2. If you loaded a custom-size paper in tray 2, tray 3, tray 4, or tray 5, or if you loaded any
size paper in tray 1, set the tray to the size of paper that you loaded. See Loading input
trays for instructions.
3. Set the paper size.
●
For Windows: On the File menu, click Page Setup or Print. If you select Print, make
sure that this MFP is selected and then click Properties.
●
For Macintosh: On the File menu, select Page Setup. Make sure that this MFP is
selected.
4. In the paper size box, select one of the following:
●
The size of paper that you are using
●
Custom (then specify the paper dimensions)
5. Select the orientation, such as Portrait or Landscape.
6. If the printer driver is not already open, on the File menu click Print. In Windows
programs, also click Properties.
7. In the paper source box, select the paper type and size, or select the tray from which
you want paper pulled. See Selecting which tray is used for printing.
8. Select any other settings that you want, such as duplexing, watermarks, or different first
page. For more information about these settings, see the tasks in this section.
9. Click Print to print the job.
72
Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Selecting which tray is used for printing
You can select how the MFP pulls media from the trays. The following sections provide
information about configuring the MFP to pull media from specific trays.
Understanding tray order
When the MFP receives a print job, it selects the tray by trying to match the requested media
type and size with what has been loaded in the trays. Using an "autoselect" process, it
searches all available trays for the media that satisfies the request, starting with the bottom
tray and ending with the top tray (tray 1). The MFP begins printing the job as soon as it finds
the correct type and size.
Note
The "autoselect" process occurs only if no specific tray is requested for the job. If a specific
tray is requested, the job prints from the requested tray.
●
If media is loaded in tray 1 and tray 1 is set TRAY 1 TYPE=ANY and TRAY 1
SIZE=ANY on the PAPER HANDLING menu, the MFP will always pull media from
tray 1 first. See Customizing tray 1 operation for more information.
●
If the search fails, a message appears on the MFP control-panel display requesting that
you load the correct media type and size. You can load that media type and size, or you
can override the request by selecting a different type and size at the MFP control panel.
●
If a tray runs out of media during a print job, the MFP automatically switches to any tray
that contains the same media type and size.
The autoselect process changes somewhat if you customize tray 1 operation (as explained
in Customizing tray 1 operation) or if you set tray 1 for manual feed (as explained in
Manually feeding media from tray 1).
Customizing tray 1 operation
The MFP can be set to print from tray 1 if it is loaded, or to print only from tray 1 if the type of
media that is loaded is specifically requested. See Paper handling menu.
Setting
Explanation
TRAY 1 TYPE=ANY
The MFP usually pulls media from tray 1 first
unless it is empty or closed. If you do not keep
media in tray 1 all the time, or if you use tray 1
only to manually feed media, keep the default
setting of TRAY 1 TYPE=ANY and TRAY 1
SIZE=ANY on the PAPER HANDLING menu.
TRAY 1 SIZE=ANY
TRAY 1 TYPE= or TRAY 1 SIZE= a type other
than ANY
The MFP treats tray 1 like the other trays.
Instead of looking for media in tray 1 first, the
MFP pulls media from the tray that matches type
and size settings that are selected in the software.
In the printer driver, you can select media from
any tray (including tray 1) by type, size, or
source. To print by type and size of paper, see
Printing by type and size of media (locking trays).
ENWW
Selecting which tray is used for printing
73
You can also determine whether the MFP shows a prompt to ask if it can pull media from
tray 1 if it cannot find the type and size that you requested in another tray. You can set the
MFP to always prompt you before pulling from tray 1 or only prompt you if tray 1 is empty.
Set the USE REQUESTED TRAY setting on the SYSTEM SETUP submenu of the
CONFIGURE DEVICE menu.
Printing by type and size of media (locking trays)
Printing by type and size is a way to be sure that print jobs always print on the media that
you want. You can configure the trays for the type, such as plain or letterhead, and size,
such as letter or A4, that is loaded in them.
If you configure the trays this way and then select a certain type and size in the printer
driver, the MFP automatically selects the tray that is loaded with that type or size. You do not
have to select a specific tray (selecting by source). Configuring the MFP this way is
especially helpful if the MFP is shared, and more than one person loads or removes media
frequently.
Some older model printers have a feature that "locks out" trays to prevent printing on the
wrong media. Printing by type and size eliminates the need to lock trays. For more
information about the types and sizes that each tray supports, see Supported types and
sizes of print media.
Note
To print by type and size from tray 2, the optional trays, or the optional envelope feeder, you
might have to to unload tray 1 and close it, or set TRAY 1 TYPE and TRAY 1 SIZE to types
other than ANY on the PAPER HANDLING menu at the MFP control panel. For more
information, see Customizing tray 1 operation. Settings in a program or the printer driver
override control-panel settings. (Program settings generally override printer-driver settings.)
To print by type and size of paper
1. Be sure to load the trays correctly. See Loading input trays.)
2. At the MFP control panel, open the PAPER HANDLING menu. Select the paper type for
each tray. If you are unsure which type you are loading, such as bond or recycled, check
the label on the media package.
3. Select the paper-size settings at the MFP control panel.
●
Tray 1: Set the paper size on the PAPER HANDLING menu if the MFP is set to
TRAY 1 TYPE= a type other than ANY. If custom paper is loaded, also set the
custom-paper size on the PAPER HANDLING menu. For more information, see
Printing on small sizes, custom sizes, or heavy paper.
●
Tray 2 and optional 500-sheet trays: See Loading input trays for information about
tray adjustments. If custom paper is loaded, configure the custom-paper size on the
PAPER HANDLING menu. For more information, see Loading input trays.
●
Optional envelope feeder: Set the size on the PAPER HANDLING menu.
4. In the program or printer driver, select a type other than Auto Select.
Note
74
The type and size settings can also be configured in the HP Web Jetadmin software for
networked MFPs.
Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Manually feeding media from tray 1
The manual feed feature is another way of printing on special media from tray 1. Setting
MANUAL FEED to ON either in the printer driver or at the MFP control panel stops the MFP
after each job is sent, allowing you time to load special paper or other print media in tray 1.
If tray 1 contains media when you send the print job, and the MFP control panel has TRAY 1
TYPE=ANY and TRAY 1 SIZE=ANY as the default configuration for tray 1 operation, the
MFP will not stop and wait for media to be loaded. To have the MFP wait, set TRAY 1 TYPE
and TRAY 1 SIZE to types other than ANY on the PAPER HANDLING menu.
Note
If the TRAY 1 SIZE and TRAY 1 TYPE are set to ANY, and MANUAL FEED PROMPT is set
to UNLESS LOADED, then the media will be pulled from tray 1 without prompting. If
MANUAL FEED PROMPT is set to ALWAYS, then the MFP will prompt you to load media,
even if tray 1 is set to TRAY 1 TYPE=ANY and TRAY 1 SIZE=ANY.
If you have selected MANUAL FEED=ON at the MFP control panel, this setting will override
the printer driver, and all print jobs that you send to the MFP will request manually fed paper
in tray 1 unless a specific tray has been selected in the printer driver. If this feature is to be
used only occasionally, it is best to set MANUAL FEED=OFF at the MFP control panel and
to select the manual feed option in the printer driver on a job-by-job basis.
ENWW
Selecting which tray is used for printing
75
Selecting the correct fuser mode
The MFP automatically adjusts the fuser mode based on the media type for which the tray is
set. For example, heavy paper, such as card stock, might need a higher fuser-mode setting
in order to make the toner adhere better to the page, but transparencies need the LOW 2
fuser-mode setting to avoid damage to the MFP. The default setting generally provides the
best performance for most print-media types.
The fuser mode can be changed only if the media type has been set for the tray that you are
using. See Printing by type and size of media (locking trays). After the media type has been
set for the tray, then the fuser mode for that type can be changed on the CONFIGURE
DEVICE menu in the PRINT QUALITY submenu at the MFP control panel. See Print quality
submenu.
Note
Using a higher fuser mode, such as HIGH 1 or HIGH 2, improves the ability of the toner to
adhere to paper, but it might cause other problems, such as excessive curl. The MFP might
print at a slower speed when the fuser mode is set to HIGH 1 or HIGH 2.
To reset the fuser modes to the default settings, open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at
the MFP control panel. On the PRINT QUALITY submenu, select FUSER MODES, and then
select RESTORE MODES.
76
Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Selecting the output bin
The MFP has two output-bin locations: the ADF output bin and the standard output bin(s) on
the output device.
1
2
Standard output bin
ADF output bin
When documents are scanned or copied by using the ADF, the original documents are
automatically delivered to the ADF output bin. Copies are delivered to the standard output
bin or the output bin(s) on the stapler/stacker or to the 3-bin mailbox.
Documents that are sent to the MFP from a computer are delivered to the standard output
bin or the output bin(s) on the stapler/stacker or to the 3-bin mailbox.
3-bin mailbox output bins
If you are using the 3-bin mailbox, three output bins are available. You can configure these
bins to act as individual mailboxes, or they can be combined as a single bin to stack
documents. You can set up these options in the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, on the MBM-3
CONFIGURATION submenu. This menu is available only when the 3-bin mailbox is
installed. For more information about using the 3-bin mailbox, see 3-bin mailbox.
The top two bins hold up to 100 sheets of paper. A sensor causes the MFP to stop when the
bin is full. MFP operation continues when you empty or reduce the amount of media in the
bin.
The lower bin holds up to 500 sheets of paper.
Selecting an output location
It is recommended that you select an output location (bin) through your program or driver.
Where and how you make selections depends on your program or driver. If you cannot
select an output location from the program or driver, set the default output location from the
MFP control panel.
To select an output location at the control panel
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Scroll to and touch PRINTING.
4. Scroll to and touch PAPER DESTINATION to view the output bin options.
5. Scroll to and touch the output bin that you want. The message SETTING SAVED
appears on the control-panel display for a moment.
ENWW
Selecting the output bin
77
Selecting face-up or face-down output for copy jobs
The MFP can deliver pages either face-up or face-down. The default setting is to deliver jobs
face-down. Documents that have multiple pages are delivered with the correct page order.
Face-down output is the fastest delivery method.
Select face-up output when you want to use the straightest paper path, such as when
printing on heavy media. Documents that have multiple pages are delivered with the pages
in reverse order.
You can select face-up or face-down output on the Output tab in the printer driver. See
Selecting face-up or face-down output in the printer driver.
Note
78
If you select Face-up (Straightest Path), the stapler/stacker cannot staple the job.
Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Printing on envelopes
You can print on envelopes from tray 1 or the optional envelope feeder. Tray 1 holds up to
10 envelopes and supports standard or custom sizes. The optional envelope feeder holds up
to 75 envelopes and supports only standard envelope sizes.
For printing on any size of envelope, make sure to set the margins in your program at least
15 mm (0.6 inch) from the edge of the envelope.
Printing performance depends on the construction of the envelope. Always test a few
sample envelopes before purchasing a large quantity. For envelope specifications, see
Envelopes.
WARNING!
Never use envelopes that contain coated linings, exposed self-stick adhesives, or other
synthetic materials. These items can emit noxious fumes.
CAUTION
Envelopes that have clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, exposed self-stick adhesives,
or other synthetic materials can severely damage the MFP. To avoid jamming and possible
MFP damage, never try to print on both sides of an envelope. Before you load envelopes,
make sure that they are flat and are not damaged or stuck together. Do not use envelopes
that have pressure-sensitive adhesive.
Note
The MFP prints at a slower speed when printing on envelopes.
Loading envelopes in tray 1
Many types of envelopes can be printed on from tray 1. Up to 10 can be stacked in the tray.
See Envelopes for specifications.
To load envelopes in tray 1
1. Open tray 1, but do not pull out the extension. Most envelopes feed best without the
extension. However, oversize envelopes might need the extension.
2. Load up to 10 envelopes in the center of tray 1 with the front side facing up, and the
postage-end toward the MFP. Slide the envelopes into the MFP as far as they will go
without forcing them.
ENWW
Printing on envelopes
79
3. Adjust the guides to touch the envelope stack without bending the envelopes. Make sure
that the envelopes fit under the tabs and maximum-height indicators on the guides.
80
Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Printing on special media
This section discusses printing on types of media that require special handling.
Printing on labels
Use only labels that are recommended for use in laser printers. Make sure that labels meet
the correct specifications. See Labels.
Follow these guidelines when printing on labels:
●
Print on a stack of up to 50 label sheets from tray 1 or a stack of up to 100 label sheets
from other trays.
●
Load labels in tray 1 with the front side facing up, and the top, short edge toward the
MFP. For other trays, load media with the front side facing down, and the top edge
toward the right.
Do not load or print on labels in the following ways:
CAUTION
Failure to follow these instructions can damage the MFP.
●
Do not load the trays to maximum capacity, because labels are heavier than paper.
●
Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet, wrinkled, or damaged in
any way.
●
Do not use labels that have the backing sheet exposed. (Labels must cover the entire
backing sheet, leaving no exposed spaces.)
●
Do not feed a sheet of labels through the MFP more than once. The adhesive backing is
designed for only one pass through the MFP.
●
Do not print on both sides of labels.
●
Do not print on sheets from which labels have been removed.
Printing on transparencies
Use only transparencies that are recommended for use in laser printers. For transparency
specifications, see Transparencies.
●
CAUTION
ENWW
At the MFP control panel, open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu. On the PRINT
QUALITY submenu, select FUSER MODES. Make sure that the fuser mode is set to
TRANSPARENCY=LOW.
Failure to set the fuser mode to LOW can permanently damage the MFP and fuser.
●
In the printer driver, set the paper type to Transparency.
●
At the MFP control panel, open the PAPER HANDLING menu. Set the tray type to
TRANSPARENCY for the tray that you are using.
●
Load transparencies face up in tray 1 with the top toward the MFP. Up to
50 transparencies can be loaded in tray 1.
●
A stack of up to 100 transparencies can be printed from tray 2 and the optional trays
(although stacking more than 50 at a time is not recommended).
●
Because transparencies are heavier than paper, do not load trays to maximum capacity.
Printing on special media
81
●
Load transparencies in tray 2 or the optional trays with the side to be printed on facing
down, and the top, short edge toward the right.
●
To prevent transparencies from becoming too hot or from sticking together, remove each
transparency from the output bin before printing another.
●
Print on only one side of a transparency.
●
Place transparencies on a flat surface to cool after removing them from the MFP.
●
If two or more transparencies feed at the same time, try fanning the stack.
●
Do not feed transparencies through the MFP more than once.
Printing on letterhead, prepunched, or preprinted paper
When printing on letterhead, prepunched, or preprinted paper, it is important to orient the
paper correctly. For most printing situations, follow the guidelines in this section for printing
on one side only. For duplexing guidelines, see Printing on both sides of paper
(optional duplexer).
Note
If you want to always load letterhead or preprinted paper the same way for all print jobs,
whether you are printing on one side of the sheet or on both sides of the sheet, use the
Alternative Letterhead Mode setting in the printer driver. Load the paper as you would for
printing on both sides. See Printing on both sides of paper (optional duplexer). When this
option is selected, the MFP speed slows to the speed that is required for printing on both
sides. The information presented in this section is for printing without using Alternative
Letterhead Mode.
Note
For more information about paper that has a special finish, such as laid or bond paper, see
Printing on paper that has a special finish.
For tray 1, load the paper with the front side facing up, and the top, short edge toward the
MFP.
For tray 2 and the optional 500-sheet trays, load the paper with the front side facing down,
and the top, short edge toward the right.
82
Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Printing on paper that has a special finish
Some paper has a special finish, such as laid paper, bond paper, and cockled paper. These
types of paper can cause issues in regard to toner adhesion and print quality. Follow these
guidelines when printing on paper that has a special finish.
●
Note
At the MFP control panel, open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu. On the PRINT
QUALITY submenu, select FUSER MODES, and then select the paper type that you are
using (such as BOND). Set the fuser mode to HIGH 1 or HIGH 2. HIGH 2 provides
better toner adhesion and optimal print quality for paper that has a highly textured finish.
Open the PAPER HANDLING menu and set TRAY TYPE to the type of paper that you
are using (such as BOND) to turn on the appropriate fuser mode.
The MFP might print at a slower speed when set at HIGH 1 or HIGH 2. Use the HIGH 1 and
HIGH 2 settings only if you are experiencing toner-adhesion problems. The HIGH 1 and
HIGH 2 settings might increase problems with curl and jams.
●
Some makers of these types of paper are now coating one side of the paper to enhance
toner adhesion and print quality. To take advantage of this feature, make sure to load
the paper correctly. The side on which you can read the watermark correctly is the front
side, or the side to be printed on.
For tray 1, load paper with the front side facing up, and the top, short edge toward the MFP.
For tray 2 and the optional 500-sheet trays, load paper with the front side facing down, and
the top, short edge toward the right.
Printing on small sizes, custom sizes, or heavy paper
Custom-size paper can be printed from tray 1, tray 2, or an optional 500-sheet tray.
Note
The MFP might print at a slower speed when printing on small sizes, custom sizes, and
heavy paper. For more information about paper that has a special finish, such as laid or
bond paper, see Printing on paper that has a special finish.
Weight and sizes
See the following table for specifications when printing on custom or heavy paper. For more
information, see Print media specifications.
ENWW
Printing on special media
83
Tray
Minimum size
Maximum size
Supported weights
Tray 1
76 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 inches)
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
60 to 200 g/m2
(16 to 53 lb)
Tray 2 and optional
500-sheet tray
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.2 inches)
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
60 to 120 g/m2
(16 to 32 lb)
Guidelines for heavy paper
To help prevent toner from rubbing off of the paper, some heavier paper types should be
printed using a higher fuser mode. At the MFP control panel, open the CONFIGURE
DEVICE menu. On the PRINT QUALITY submenu, select FUSER MODES, and then select
the media type that you want to modify. Select either HIGH1 or HIGH2 as the fuser mode.
Using these modes helps prevent toner from rubbing off the page, but using them might slow
the MFP speed or create other problems, such as increased curl.
Guidelines for custom-size paper
Follow these guidelines when printing on any custom-size paper:
●
Feed the paper short-edge first.
●
In your program, set page margins at least 4.23 mm (0.17 inch) away from the edges.
●
Set the custom size in the program, in the printer driver, or at the MFP control panel.
See Setting custom paper sizes.
Additional guidelines for small or narrow paper
Follow these additional guidelines when printing on small or narrow paper:
●
Do not attempt to print on paper smaller than 76 mm (3 inches) wide or 127 mm
(5 inches) long.
●
HP does not recommend printing large quantities of small or narrow paper. This could
result in excessive wear on the print-cartridge components that might result in printquality problems or toner leaking into the MFP.
Setting custom paper sizes
When custom paper is loaded, size settings need to be selected in the program (the
preferred method), in the printer driver, or at the MFP control panel.
Load custom-size paper into tray 1 with the short edge feeding first.
84
Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Load custom-size paper into tray 2 or the optional trays with the short edges at the left and
right (the long edges are at the front and back). Adjust the media guides so that they are
gently touching the media stack.
1
2
X dimension (short edge)
Y dimension (long edge)
If the settings are not available in your program, set the custom paper size at the MFP
control panel.
To set custom paper sizes
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch PAPER HANDLING.
3. Touch TRAY <N> SIZE (where N is the number of the tray).
4. Scroll to and touch CUSTOM.
5. Touch INCHES or MILLIMETERS. This selects the measurement units for determining
the size of your custom paper.
6. Use the numeric keypad to set the X dimension (the short edge of the paper). The
X dimension can range from 76 to 216 mm (3 to 8.5 inches).
7. Use the numeric keypad to set the Y dimension (the long edge of the paper). The
Y dimension can range from 127 to 356 mm (5 to 14 inches). For example, if the custom
paper is 203 x 254 mm, set X=203 mm and Y=254 mm.
ENWW
Printing on special media
85
Printing on both sides of paper (optional duplexer)
The MFP can automatically print and copy on both sides of paper when an automatic duplex
printing accessory is installed. This is called duplexing or two-sided printing. The duplexer
supports the following paper sizes: Letter, Legal, Executive, A4, A5, Executive (JIS), 8.5x13,
and JIS B5.
The ADF has automatic duplex scanning, so you can automatically scan two-sided
documents. However, you must have an automatic duplex printing accessory installed to
produce two-sided copies.
The automatic duplexer is included with the HP LaserJet 4345x mfp, HP LaserJet
4345xs mfp, and HP LaserJet 4345xm mfp.
Note
For models that do not include an automatic duplexer, you can order the duplexer as an
accessory. See Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies.
The duplex cover that is located on the left side of the MFP must be removed when the
duplexer is installed. See the documentation that is included with the duplexer for installation
instructions. When duplexing very complex pages, additional memory might be required.
See Installing memory.
Guidelines for printing on both sides of paper
CAUTION
Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies, envelopes, vellum, custom sizes, or
paper heavier than 28 lb (105 g/m2) because jams or damage to the MFP might occur.
Note the following guidelines:
86
●
Before using the duplexer, ensure that the printer driver is set to recognize it. The
procedure varies according to the operating system that you are using. For details, see
Using the printer drivers. Look for the instructions in the column labeled "To change
configuration settings."
●
To print on both sides of paper, make the selection in your program or the printer driver.
(See the printer driver online Help.)
●
If you do not use the printer driver that came with the MFP, you might need to change
the duplex setting at the MFP control panel: set DUPLEX=ON on the CONFIGURE
DEVICE menu in the PRINTING submenu. Also on the PRINTING submenu, set
DUPLEX BINDING to LONG EDGE or SHORT EDGE. (For more information, see
Layout options for printing on both sides of paper.)
Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Orientation of paper for duplexing
Several kinds of paper (such as letterhead, preprinted paper, prepunched paper, and paper
with watermarks) require a specific orientation for duplex printing. The duplexer prints the
second side of paper first. The proper orientation of the paper in the trays is shown below.
1
2
Tray 1
All other trays
For tray 1, load the front side facing down and the top edge toward you. For all other trays,
load the front side facing up and the top edge toward the MFP.
Layout options for printing on both sides of paper
The four duplex orientation options are shown below. These options can be selected in the
printer driver (the preferred method) or at the MFP control panel. If you use the MFP control
panel, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, then touch PRINTING. Touch DUPLEX BINDING. On
the PCLPCL SUBMENU, select a setting for ORIENTATION.
1
4
3
2
2
2
3
2
5
3
2
5
3
5
3
5
ENWW
1. Long-edge landscape*
This layout is often used in accounting, data processing, and
spreadsheet programs. Every other printed image is oriented
upside-down. Facing pages are read continuously from top to
bottom.
2. Short-edge landscape
Each printed image is oriented right-side-up. Facing pages are
read from top to bottom on the left page, then from top to bottom
on the right page.
3. Long-edge portrait
This is the default MFP setting, and the most common layout
used, with every printed image oriented right-side-up. Facing
pages are read from top to bottom on the left page, then from top
to bottom on the right page.
Printing on both sides of paper (optional duplexer)
87
4. Short-edge portrait*
This layout is often used with clipboards. Every other printed
image is oriented upside-down. Facing pages are read
continuously from top to bottom.
* When using Windows drivers, select Flip Pages Up to get the designated binding options.
To print on both sides by using the optional duplex-printing
accessory
1. Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are
loading special paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:
CAUTION
●
For tray 1, load the letterhead paper with the front side down, bottom-edge first.
●
For all other trays, load the letterhead paper with front side up, and the top edge on
the left side of the tray.
Do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond). Jamming could result.
2. Open the printer driver (see Using the printer drivers).
3. For Windows, on the Finishing tab, click Print on Both Sides.
For Macintosh, on the Layout tab, click Print on Both Sides.
4. Click OK.
5. Send the print job to the MFP.
88
Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Setting the registration
Use the SET REGISTRATION feature to center the front and back images on a page that
has been duplexed (printed on both sides). This feature also allows edge-to-edge printing to
be set to within approximately 2 mm (0.08 inch) of all edges of the paper. Image placement
varies slightly for each input tray. The alignment procedure must be performed for each tray.
The administrator can use an internal tray-registration page to calibrate each tray.
To set the registration
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Touch PRINT QUALITY.
4. Touch SET REGISTRATION.
You can select a tray by specifying a source. The default source is tray 2. If you want to
set the registration for tray 2, go to step 7. Otherwise, proceed to the next step.
5. Touch SOURCE.
6. Touch the name of a tray. After you touch the name of the tray, the control-panel display
returns to the SET REGISTRATION menu.
7. Touch PRINT TEST PAGE.
8. Follow the instructions on the printed page.
ENWW
Setting the registration
89
Using features in the printer driver
When you print from a software program, many of the MFP features are available from the
printer driver. For more information about Windows drivers, see Using the printer drivers.
Note
Settings in the printer driver and software program generally override control-panel settings.
(Software-program settings generally override printer-driver settings.)
Creating and using quick sets
Use quick sets to save the current driver settings for reuse. For example, you can save the
page orientation, print on both sides, and paper source settings in a quick set . For
convenience, quick sets are available on most printer-driver tabs.
Note
You can save 25 Print Task Quick Sets. The printer driver might report that 25 Print Task
Quick Sets have been defined when fewer than 25 are visible. Some predefined Print Task
Quick Sets, which do not apply to the configuration of your MFP, might be hidden but they
are still counted in the total number that can be saved.
To create a quick set
1. Open the printer driver (see Using the printer drivers).
2. Select the print settings that you want to use.
3. In the Print Task Quick Sets box, type a name for the selected settings (for example
"Quarterly Report" or "My Project Status").
4. Click Save.
To use quick sets
1. Open the printer driver (see Using the printer drivers).
2. Select the quick set that you want to use from the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down list.
3. Click OK. The MFP is now set to print according to the saved settings in the quick set.
Note
To restore printer-driver default settings, select Default Print Settings from the Print Task
Quick Sets drop-down list.
Creating and using watermarks
A watermark is a notice, such as "Top Secret," that is printed in the background of each
page in a document.
To use an existing watermark
1. Open the printer driver (see Using the printer drivers).
2. From the Effects tab, click the Watermarks drop-down list.
3. Click the watermark that you want to use.
4. If you want the watermark to appear only on the first page of the document, click First
Page Only.
5. Click OK. The MFP is now set to print the watermark that you have selected.
90
Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
To remove the watermark, click (none) in the Watermarks drop-down list.
Resizing documents
Use the document resizing options to scale a document to a percentage of its normal size.
You can also choose to print a document on a different size paper, with or without scaling.
To reduce or enlarge a document
1. Open the printer driver (see Using the printer drivers).
2. On the Effects tab, type the percentage by which you want to reduce or enlarge your
document.
You can also use the scroll bar to adjust the reduce/enlarge percentage.
3. Click OK. The MFP is now set to scale the document to the reduce/enlarge percentage
that you selected.
To print a document onto a different paper size
1. Open the printer driver (see Using the printer drivers).
2. From the Effects tab, click Print Document On.
3. Select the target paper size to print on.
4. To print the document on the target paper size without scaling it to fit, make sure that the
Scale to Fit option is not selected.
5. Click OK. The MFP is now set to print the document as you specified.
Setting a custom paper size from the printer driver
Instead of setting custom paper sizes by using the control panel, you can also set the
custom paper size in the printer driver.
Note
Settings in the printer driver and software program generally override control-panel settings.
(Software-program settings generally override printer-driver settings.)
1. Open the printer driver (see Using the printer drivers).
2. From the Paper or Paper/Quality tab, click Custom.
3. From the Custom Size Paper window, type the name of the custom paper size.
4. Type the paper-size length and width. If you type a size that is too small or too large, the
driver automatically adjusts the size to the minimum or maximum size that is allowed.
5. If necessary, click the button to change the unit of measure between millimeters and
inches.
6. Click Save.
7. Click Close. The MFP is now set to print the document on the custom-size paper that
you selected. The name that you saved appears in the paper-size list for future use.
Printing on different paper for the first page of a print job
Follow these instructions for printing a first page that is different from other pages in the print
job.
ENWW
Using features in the printer driver
91
To print on different paper
1. Open the printer driver (see Using the printer drivers).
2. From the Paper or Paper/Quality tab, select the appropriate paper for the first page of
the print job.
3. Click Use different Paper/Covers.
4. In the list box, click the pages or covers that you want to print on different paper.
5. To print front or back covers, you must also select Add Blank or Preprinted Cover.
6. Select the appropriate paper type or source for the other pages of the print job. The MFP
is now set to print the document on the paper that you selected.
Note
The paper size must be the same for all pages of the print job.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature is available in
some drivers and provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.
To print more than one page on a sheet of paper, look for a layout or pages-per-sheet option
in the driver. (This is sometimes called 2-up, 4-up, or n-up printing.)
To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper
1. Open the printer driver (see Using the printer drivers).
2. Select the Finishing tab.
3. In the section for Document Options, select the number of pages that you want to print
on each sheet (1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16).
4. Click Print Page Borders if you want to print a border around each page on the sheet.
Print Page Borders is available only if Pages per Sheet is more than 1.
5. If the number of pages is greater than 1, click Page Order to select the order and
placement of the pages on the sheet.
6. Click OK. The MFP is now set to print the number of pages per sheet that you have
selected.
Setting the stapling options
You can select whether a job is stapled by using the printer driver.
92
Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
To set the stapling options
1. Open the printer-driver properties, and click the Configure tab. (The Configure tab is
not available from within software programs.)
Note
The procedure to open the printer-driver properties depends on the operating system that
you are using. For information about opening the printer-driver properties for your operating
system, see Using the printer drivers. Look for the column titled "To change the configuration
settings".
2. In the area for configuring additional output devices, select the stapler/stacker, and then
click OK.
3. Open the printer driver (see Using the printer drivers).
4. Click the Output tab.
5. In the Staple box, select the stapling option that you want to use for the print job.
6. Click OK. The MFP is now set to use the stapling option that you selected.
Selecting face-up or face-down output in the printer driver
The MFP can deliver pages either face-up or face-down. When jobs are delivered facedown, multiple-page documents are delivered in the correct page order. Face-down output is
the fastest delivery method.
Select face-up output when you want to use the straightest paper path, such as when
printing on heavy media. Multiple-page documents are delivered with the pages in reverse
order.
To specify face-up or face-down output, use the following procedure.
To select face-up or face-down output
1. Open the printer driver (see Using the printer drivers).
2. Select the Output tab.
3. In the section for Output bin options, select either Face Down (Faster) or Face Up
(Straightest Path).
ENWW
Using features in the printer driver
93
Using job storage features
The following special job-storage features are available for this MFP:
●
Private jobs: When you send a private job to the MFP, the job does not print until you
enter a PIN at the control panel.
●
Job storage: You can download a job such as a personnel form, time sheet, or calendar
to the MFP and allow other users to print the job at any time. Stored jobs are copied to
the hard disk and are not deleted if retention space on the MFP becomes limited.
●
QuickCopy jobs: You can print the requested number of copies of a job and then store
a copy of the job on the hard disk in the MFP. Storing the job allows you to print
additional copies of the job later.
●
Proof and hold jobs: This feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one
copy of a job and then print the additional copies.
Follow the instructions in this section to gain access to the job storage features at the
computer. See the specific section for the type of job that you want to create.
CAUTION
If you turn the MFP off, all QuickCopy, Proof and hold, and Private jobs are deleted.
To gain access to the job storage features
For Windows
1. On the File menu, click Print.
2. Click Properties and click the Job Storage tab.
3. Select the Job Storage Mode that you want.
For Macintosh
In newer drivers: Select Job Storage in the pull-down menu in the Print dialog box. In older
drivers, select Printer Specific Options.
Printing a private job
Use the private printing feature to specify that a job is not printed until you release it. First,
set a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN) by typing the PIN at the MFP control panel.
Next, enter the PIN in the printer driver. The PIN is sent to the MFP as part of the print job.
To create private jobs
To specify that a job is private, in the driver, select the Private Job option, type a User
Name and Job Name, and then type a four-digit PIN. The job will not print until you enter the
PIN at the MFP control panel.
Releasing private jobs
You can print a private job at the control panel after the job has been sent to the MFP.
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch Retrieve Job.
94
Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
3. Scroll to and touch your name.
4. Scroll to and touch your job.
5. Touch Print. (Print should have
[lock symbol] next to it.)
6. Use the numeric keypad to type the PIN, and then touch OK.
Deleting a private job
A private job is automatically deleted from the MFP hard disk after you release it for printing.
If you want to delete the job without printing it, use this procedure.
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch Retrieve Job.
3. Scroll to and touch your name.
4. Scroll to and touch your job.
5. Scroll to Delete. (Delete should have
[lock symbol] next to it.)
6. Use the numeric keypad to type the PIN, and then touch OK.
Storing a print job
You can download a print job to the MFP hard disk without printing it. You can then print the
job at any time at the MFP control panel. For example, you might want to download a
personnel form, calendar, time sheet, or accounting form that other users can print when
they need it.
To store a print job on the hard disk, select the Job Storage option in the driver when
printing from the MFP.
To create stored jobs
In the driver, select the Job Storage option and type a user name and job name. The job
does not print until someone requests it at the MFP control panel. See Printing a stored job.
Printing a stored job
At the control panel, you can print a job that is stored on the MFP hard disk.
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to Retrieve Job.
3. Touch User Name to see a list of names.
4. Scroll to and touch your name to see a list of jobs.
5. Scroll to and touch your job.
6. Touch Print.
7. To print the default number of copies, touch OK. The screen changes to Copies=n. To
change the number, use the numeric keypad or scroll to select a new number, and touch
OK.
If Print has (lock symbol) next to it, the job is a private job and requires a PIN. See
Printing a private job.
ENWW
Using job storage features
95
Deleting a stored job
Jobs stored on the MFP hard disk can be deleted at the control panel.
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to and touch Retrieve Job.
3. Scroll to and touch your name.
4. Scroll to and touch your job.
5. Scroll to and touch Delete.
6. Touch Yes.
If Delete has
private job.
(lock symbol) next to it, the job requires a PIN to delete. See Printing a
Creating a QuickCopying job
The QuickCopy feature prints the requested number of copies of a job and stores a copy on
the MFP hard disk. Additional copies of the job can be printed later. This feature can be
turned off in the printer driver.
The default number of different QuickCopy jobs that can be stored on the MFP is 32. At the
control panel, you can set a different default number. See System setup submenu
To create QuickCopy jobs
CAUTION
If the MFP needs additional space to store newer QuickCopy jobs, the MFP deletes other
stored QuickCopy jobs, starting with the oldest job. To permanently store a job and prevent
the MFP from deleting it when space is needed, select the Job Storage option instead of the
QuickCopy option.
In the driver, select the QuickCopy option and type a user name and a job name.
When you send the job to print, the MFP prints the number of copies that you set in the
driver. To print more quick copies at the MFP control panel, see Printing additional copies of
QuickCopy jobs.
Printing additional copies of QuickCopy jobs
This section describes how to print additional copies of a job stored on the MFP hard disk at
the control panel.
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch Retrieve Job.
3. Touch User Name to see a list of names.
4. Scroll to your job and touch OK.
5. To print the default number of copies, touch Print. The screen changes to Copies=n. To
change the number, use the numeric keypad or scroll to select a new number, and touch
OK.
96
Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Deleting a QuickCopy job
Delete a QuickCopy job at the MFP control panel when you no longer need it. If the MFP
requires additional space to store new QuickCopy jobs, the MFP automatically deletes other
stored QuickCopy jobs, starting with the oldest job.
Note
Stored QuickCopy jobs can be deleted at the control panel or in HP Web Jetadmin.
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch Retrieve Job.
3. Touch your name.
4. Scroll to and touch your job.
5. Touch Delete.
6. Touch Yes.
Proofing and holding a job
The proof and hold feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of a
job and then to print the additional copies.
To permanently store the job and prevent the MFP from deleting it when space is needed for
something else, select the Job Storage option in the driver.
To create a proof and hold job
CAUTION
If the MFP needs additional space to store newer proof and hold jobs, the MFP deletes other
stored proof and hold jobs, starting with the oldest job. To permanently store a job and
prevent the MFP from deleting it when space is needed, select the Job Storage option in
the driver instead of the Proof and Hold option.
In the driver, select the Proof and Hold option and type a user name and job name.
The MFP prints one copy of the job for you to proof. Then, see Printing the remaining copies
of a held job.
Printing the remaining copies of a held job
At the MFP control panel, use the following procedure to print the remaining copies of a job
held on the hard disk.
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch Retrieve Job.
3. Scroll to User Name.
4. Touch your user name.
5. Scroll to your job, and touch the job.
6. Touch Print. The screen changes to Copies=n. To change the number, use the numeric
keypad or scroll to select a new number, and touch OK.
ENWW
Using job storage features
97
Deleting a held job
When you send a proof and hold job, the MFP automatically deletes your previous proof and
hold job. If the job name does not have a proof and hold job associated with it, and the MFP
needs additional space, the MFP might delete other proof and hold jobs, starting with the
oldest one.
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch Retrieve Job.
3. Scroll to and touch your name.
4. Scroll to and touch your job.
5. Touch Delete.
6. Touch Yes.
98
Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
4
Copying
This MFP can function as a standalone, walk-up copier. It is not necessary to install the
printing system software on the computer, nor is it necessary to have the computer turned
on to make photocopies. You can adjust the copy settings at the control panel. You can also
copy originals by using either the ADF or the scanner glass. The MFP can process copying,
printing, and digital-sending jobs simultaneously.
This chapter provides information about how to make copies and how to change copy
settings, including the following topics:
●
Copy-screen navigation
●
Basic copying instructions
●
Modifying copy settings for the current job
●
Copying multiple sized originals
●
Creating a stored copy job
It is recommended that you review the basic control-panel information before using the MFP
copying functions. See Using the control panel for more information.
ENWW
99
Copy-screen navigation
Navigate through the control-panel features and options by using the touchscreen graphical
display.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Original section
Image modification section
Copy section
Describe original button
Original page-size icon
Reduce/enlarge
Contrast adjustment
Copy page icon
Start button
Back button
Copy settings button
User-attention error messages appear in a pop-up dialog box that prohibits normal screen
interaction until the message is cleared.
Cancel button
Each lower-level screen (any screen after the home screen) has a Cancel button. Touching
the Cancel button negates any changes you made, and takes you back to the previous
screen.
OK button
Each lower-level screen on the touchscreen has an OK button. Touching the OK button
accepts any changes that you made, and takes you to the next screen.
100
Chapter 4 Copying
ENWW
Basic copying instructions
This section provides the basic instructions for copying.
Copying by using the default settings
The default settings for copying are the following:
●
Number of copies: One
●
Size: Letter/A4-size original and Letter/A4-size copy
●
Page Orientation: Portrait
●
Number of Sides: One-sided copying
●
Page Content: Mixed (mixed text and graphics)
●
Job Mode: Off
●
Heavy Paper: Off
To copy by using the default settings
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or in the ADF.
2. Press START.
Copying by using user-defined settings
Use the following procedure to change the settings for your copies.
To make copies by using settings other than the default settings
1. Place the original face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the ADF.
On the touchscreen of the graphical display, do the following:
2. Touch Copy.
3. Touch Describe Original to view the options. You can select Basic options or
Advanced options.
4. Touch the Basic items that describe your original. The following options are available:
●
Paper Size: Select the paper size of your original.
●
Page Orientation: Select Portrait or Landscape. For portrait orientation, the top of
the original document is along the short edge of the page. For landscape orientation,
the top of the original document is along the long edge of the page.
●
Number of Sides: Select 1 or 2.
●
Page Content: Select Text, Photo, or Mixed.
5. Touch the Advanced tab to change the Job Mode setting. If you are combining multiple
scans into a single job, select On. For more information, see Using Job Mode.
ENWW
Basic copying instructions
101
6. After you make your selections, touch OK.
Note
The page icon in the Original section of the graphical display shows a representative image
of the original document.
7. Make any necessary adjustments to the contrast and reduction or enlargement by using
the Contrast Control bar and the Reduce/Enlarge button in the image modification
section of the graphical display.
8. Touch Copy to view your options. You can select Basic options or Advanced options.
9. Touch the Basic items that describe the characteristics of the copies you are making.
The following options are available:
Size and Type: Select Auto (paper size is matched to original size), or the copy size
that you want. Be sure that you have loaded the correct paper size in the tray.
Number of Sides: Select 1-sided or 2-sided. (This option is available only when a
duplexer is installed.)
Back Side Orientation: Select Normal or Flip (applies when 2-sided copying is chosen).
Pages per sheet: Select 1, 2, 4, or Booklet.
If you select 4 pages per sheet, "Z" or "N" ordering is tailored to the page orientation,
and the option to put a border around each smaller page is displayed.
"N" ordering
"Z" ordering
Borders: Select Border or No Border. This item is available only when printing multiple
pages on one sheet.
Staple: Stapling options depend on your output device and the paper size selected.
10. Touch the Advanced options, if necessary. Some of the options include the following
items:
Note
●
Collation: Select Collated or Uncollated.
●
Output Bin: Select the appropriate bin.
●
Job Storage: Select On to indicate that the copy job should be stored on the MFP
rather than printed. Select Off to copy the job normally. See Creating a stored copy
job for more information.
●
Enhance: Touch Sharpness or Background Removal.
●
Scale to Fit: Select On to automatically scale the copy to fit on the paper that is
loaded in the MFP.
The page icon in the Copy section of the graphical display shows a representative image of
the copy.
11. After you make your selections, touch OK.
102
Chapter 4 Copying
ENWW
12. Use the numeric keypad to type the number of copies, and then press START.
Copying by using the scanner glass
Use the scanner glass to copy small, lightweight (less than 60 g/m2 or 16 lb), or irregularlysized originals such as receipts, newspaper clippings, photographs, or old or worn
documents.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass.
2. Make any image modifications, and select any copy settings, if necessary.
3. If you are making only one copy, press START. If you are making multiple copies, use the
numeric keypad to type the number of copies (up to 999), and then press START to begin
copying. If you are copying more than one page from the scanner glass, see Using Job
Mode to make a multi-page copy job.
Copying by using the ADF
Use the ADF to make as many as 999 copies of a document that has up to 50 pages
(depending on the thickness of the pages).
1. Load the document face-up in the ADF.
2. Make any image modifications, and select any copy settings.
3. If you are making only one copy, press START. If you are making multiple copies, use the
numeric keypad to type the required number of copies, and then press START.
The ADF can distinguish between letter- and legal-sized original documents. If the document
that you are copying has mixed sizes, specify Mixed Originals in the Describe Original
settings. Copying is slower when using this feature.
Using Job Mode
Use the Job Mode feature to build a single copy job from multiple scans. You can use either
the ADF or the scanner glass. The settings for the first scan are used for subsequent scans.
1. Touch Copy.
2. Touch Describe Original.
3. Touch Advanced.
4. In the Job Mode check box, touch On.
5. Select any output settings, if necessary
6. After each page is scanned, the control panel prompts you for more pages.
7. Do one of the following:
If the job contains more pages, load the next page, and then press START.
If the job contains no more pages, touch Finished to print.
Note
ENWW
In Job Mode, if you scan the first page of a document by using the ADF, then you must scan
all of the pages in that document by using the ADF. If you scan the first page of a document
by using the scanner glass, then you must scan all of the pages in that document by using
the scanner glass.
Basic copying instructions
103
Modifying copy settings for the current job
You can modify your copies by adjusting the contrast, reducing or enlarging the size, or
enhancing the quality.
Adjusting the copy contrast
You can adjust the contrast by touching the arrows on the Contrast Control bar. The slider
moves to the lighter or darker area of the Contrast Control bar.
Reducing or enlarging copies
The MFP has an autoscaling feature. If the original paper size differs from the copy paper
size, the MFP can autodetect a size mismatch between the original page size and the copy
page size. The scanned image of the original page is reduced or enlarged automatically to
match the copy paper size. You can override autoscaling by using the reduce and enlarge
feature.
The MFP can reduce copies to as little as 25% of the original size and enlarge copies to as
much as 400% of the original (200% when using the ADF).
To reduce or enlarge your copies, touch the arrows on the Reduce/Enlarge button until you
reach the size that you want. The scale percentage box in the center of the Reduce/Enlarge
button indicates the percentage of reduction or enlargement. You can also touch 100% to
display the keypad to type the number that you want. Touch OK to save the changes.
Background removal
If you copy a document that is printed on colored paper, or if you use two-sided copying, you
can enhance the copy quality by removing any background that might cause your copy to
streak or blur. Touch Copy Settings, and then touch the Advanced tab to gain access to
the embedded Background Removal screen. Adjust the amount of background removal by
touching the arrows on the Background Removal control. The slider moves to the lighter or
darker area of the Background Removal control bar.
Sharpness
The Sharpness control specifies the sharpness setting that the flatbed scanner uses when
the MFP scans your original. Touch Copy Settings, and then touch the Advanced tab to
gain access to the Sharpness screen. Sharpness enhances the edges of the original so that
faint or fine text and graphics are reproduced more sharply. Adjust the amount of sharpness
by touching the arrows on the Sharpness control bar.
Contrast
The Contrast control allows you to determine the contrast and brightness of your copy.
Touch the arrows on the Contrast control, and move the slider to the lighter or darker area
of the Contrast control bar.
104
Chapter 4 Copying
ENWW
Copying multiple sized originals
If the original document contains mixed-size originals, for example, a letter-size document
with several legal-size charts, see Copying submenu and Copying by using the ADF for
more information.
Creating a stored copy job
Turning on the job storage setting indicates that you want the copy job to be stored on the
hard disk, and that you will print the job later. You must provide the following information to
create a stored job:
1. Touch Copy.
2. Select your basic copy settings (see Copying by using user-defined settings).
3. Touch the Advanced tab.
4. At the Job Storage box, select On. A popup dialog box is displayed, asking for the User
Name, and Job Name. If Authentication Required is selected, a Personal
Identification Number (PIN), if required. To enter the PIN, touch the small box next to
Authentication Required. The keyboard is displayed when you select User Name and
Job Name. The PIN is a four-digit number that can be typed on the numeric keypad.
5. Type the User Name.
6. Type the Job Name.
7. Type the PIN, if required.
8. Touch OK.
9. Press START.
See Printing a stored job for information on printing a stored job.
ENWW
Creating a stored copy job
105
106
Chapter 4 Copying
ENWW
5
Scanning and sending to
e-mail
The MFP offers color-scanning and digital-sending capabilities. By using the control panel,
you can scan black-and-white or color documents and send them to an e-mail address as an
e-mail attachment. To use digital sending, the MFP must be connected to a local area
network (LAN). The MFP connects directly to your LAN.
Note
The MFP cannot copy or print in color, but it can scan and send color images.
This chapter addresses both scanning and sending, because they are fully integrated
functions. The following topics are addressed in this chapter:
ENWW
●
What is SMTP?
●
What is LDAP?
●
E-mail configuration
●
E-mail screen navigation
●
E-mail basics
●
Using the address book
●
Additional e-mail features
107
What is SMTP?
Simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP) is a set of rules that define the interaction between
programs that send and receive e-mail. In order for the MFP to send documents to e-mail, it
must be connected to a LAN that has a valid SMTP IP address. The SMTP server must also
have Internet access.
If you are using a LAN connection, contact your system administrator to obtain the IP
address for your SMTP server. If you are connecting through a DSL connection, contact the
service provider to obtain the SMTP server IP address.
What is LDAP?
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is used to gain access to a database of
information. When the MFP uses LDAP, it searches a global list of e-mail addresses. As you
begin to type the e-mail address, LDAP uses an auto-complete feature that supplies a list of
e-mail addresses that match the characters you type. As you type additional characters, the
list of matching e-mail addresses becomes smaller.
The MFP supports LDAP, but a connection to an LDAP server is not required in order for the
MFP to be able to send to e-mail.
108
Chapter 5 Scanning and sending to e-mail
ENWW
E-mail configuration
Before you can send a document to e-mail, you must configure the MFP for e-mailing. The
MFP has an auto-configuration feature that attempts to find the correct IP addresses for the
SMTP server and the LDAP server. You can also configure the IP addresses manually.
Note
The instructions that follow are for configuring the MFP at the control panel. You can also
perform these procedures by using the embedded Web server. For more information, see
Using the embedded Web server.
Automatic e-mail configuration
1. On the MFP control panel, touch Menu.
2. Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch SENDING.
3. Touch E-MAIL, and then touch FIND SEND GATEWAYS. The MFP searches the local
network to try to determine the IP address for the SMTP server and the LDAP server. If
the process is not successful, the IP addresses appear as all zeros on the control-panel
display. If this happens, configure the IP addresses manually.
Manual e-mail configuration
Consult your system administrator to find the IP address for the SMTP server and the LDAP
server. Then use this procedure to manually configure the IP addresses.
To configure the SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Touch SENDING.
4. Touch E-MAIL.
5. Touch SMTP GATEWAY.
6. Type the SMTP gateway address. The gateway address consists of up to 12 digits that
are arrayed as four groups of three digits (for instance, 123.123.123.123). Touch OK.
7. Scroll to and touch LDAP GATEWAY.
8. Type the LDAP gateway. After typing the SMTP and LDAP gateways, test the
configuration by using the TEST SEND GATEWAYS self-test, and then send an e-mail
to yourself.
To use the Test Send Gateways self-test procedure
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Touch SENDING.
4. Touch E-MAIL.
5. Touch TEST SEND GATEWAYS. If the configuration is correct, GATEWAYS OK
appears on the control-panel display.
ENWW
E-mail configuration
109
If the first test was successful, send an e-mail to yourself by using the digital-send feature. If
you receive the e-mail, you have successfully configured the the digital-sending feature.
If you do not receive the e-mail, use these actions to resolve issues with the digital-sending
software:
●
Check the SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses to make sure that you typed them
correctly.
●
Print a configuration page. Verify that the LDAP and SMTP gateway addresses are
correct.
●
Make sure that the network is operating correctly. Send an e-mail to yourself from a
computer. If you receive the e-mail, the network is operating correctly. If you do not
receive the e-mail, contact your network administrator or Internet service provider (ISP).
●
Run the DISCOVER.EXE file. This program attempts to find the gateways. You can
download the file from the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.
To find gateways by using an e-mail program
Because most e-mail programs also use SMTP to send e-mail and LDAP to address e-mail
messages, you might be able to find the hostname of the SMTP gateway and LDAP server
by looking at the settings for your e-mail program. In many cases, the SMTP and LDAP
servers are contained under one hostname. After you have the hostname, you can find its IP
address by using the following procedure.
1. At your computer, open the Command Prompt (also known as the MS-DOS prompt).
2. Type nslookup followed by a space and then the hostname.
3. Press Enter.
When you have found the IP address of the SMTP and LDAP servers, use them to manually
configure digital sending. See Manual e-mail configuration.
110
Chapter 5 Scanning and sending to e-mail
ENWW
E-mail screen navigation
Use the touchscreen graphical display to navigate through the options on the E-mail screen.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Help button
From: field
To: field
CC: field
Subject: field
BCC: field
Clear All button
Scroll button
Start button
Back button
E-mail Settings area
Page preview image
Help button
For Help, touch the
(Help) button, and then touch What is this? or Show me how. For
more information, see Help system.
From: field
Touch From: to type your e-mail address. The administrator can set up the From: field to
contain an e-mail address that other users cannot change.
To:, CC:, and BCC: fields
Touch these buttons to set up e-mail recipients. To set up e-mail recipients, you can type
e-mail addresses by using the touchscreen or by using the address book. For more
information, see Using the address book.
Clear All button
Touching the Clear All button clears all text and fields that you have typed.
User-attention error messages appear in a pop-up dialog box that prohibits normal screen
interaction until the message is cleared.
ENWW
E-mail screen navigation
111
E-mail basics
The MFP e-mail feature offers the following benefits:
●
Sends documents to multiple e-mail addresses, saving time and delivery costs.
●
Delivers files in black-and-white or in color. Files can be sent in different file formats that
the recipient can manipulate.
With e-mail, documents are scanned into the MFP memory and sent to an e-mail address or
multiple addresses as an e-mail attachment. Digital documents can be sent in several
graphics formats, such as .TFF and .JPG, which allows recipients to manipulate the
document file in various programs to meet their specific needs. Documents arrive in nearoriginal quality, and then can be printed, stored, or forwarded.
The HP Digital Sending software, which can be purchased separately, offers the additional
benefits of sending to a fax machine, authenticating the user for security purposes, and
scanning to a folder. For the HP LaserJet 4345mfp (base model), you can also install an
analog fax accessory that provides e-mail capability. For more information see Faxing.
In order to use the e-mail feature, the MFP needs to be connected to a valid SMTP local
area network that includes Internet access.
Loading documents
You can scan a document by using either the glass or the ADF. The glass and ADF can
accommodate Letter-, Executive-, A4-, and A5-size originals. The ADF can also
accommodate Legal-size originals. Smaller originals, receipts, irregular and worn
documents, stapled documents, previously folded documents, and photographs should be
scanned by using the glass. Multiple-page documents can be scanned easily by using the
ADF.
Sending documents
The MFP scans both black-and-white and color originals. You can use default settings or
change the scanning preferences and file formats. The following are the default settings:
●
Color
●
PDF (requires the recipient to have an Adobe Acrobat® viewer to view the e-mail
attachment)
To send documents
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the ADF.
2. Touch E-MAIL.
3. If prompted, type your user name and password.
4. Complete the From:, To:, and Subject: fields. Complete the CC: and BCC: fields if
appropriate. Your user name or other default information might appear in the From:
field. If so, you might not be able to change it.
5. (Optional) Touch E-mail Settings and then touch Describe original to change the
default settings for the document that you are sending (for example, the document size).
If you are sending a double-sided document, you must describe the original as a twosided document.
112
Chapter 5 Scanning and sending to e-mail
ENWW
6. (Optional) Touch E-mail Settings to change the default settings for the scanned
document that you are creating (for example, to change the type of file format).
7. Press START to begin sending.
8. The MFP prompts you to CONTINUE or to RESET.
●
CONTINUE: Retains all of the information that you just entered. You can easily send
another e-mail or fax that uses these settings.
●
RESET: Clears all the settings that you just entered. However, pressing RESET
does not cancel the e-mail or fax that you just sent.
9. When you are finished, remove the original document from the scanner glass or ADF.
Using the auto-complete function
When you type characters into the To:, CC:, or From: fields on the Send to E-mail screen,
the auto-complete function is activated. As you type the required address or name by using
the keyboard screen, the MFP automatically searches the address book list and completes
the address or name by using the first match. You can then select that name by touching
Enter, or continue typing the name until auto-complete finds the correct entry. If you type a
character that does not match any entry in the list, the auto-complete text is removed from
the display to indicate that you are typing an address that is not in the address book.
ENWW
E-mail basics
113
Using the address book
You can send e-mail to a list of recipients by using the address book feature of the MFP.
See your system administrator for information about configuring address lists.
Note
You can also use the embedded Web server to create and manage the e-mail address book.
For more information, see Using the embedded Web server.
Creating a recipient list
On the touchscreen of the graphical display, complete the following steps:
1. Touch E-MAIL.
2. Touch To: to open the keyboard screen.
3. Type the first letter of the recipient's name.
4. Touch
(address book icon) to open the address book.
5. Navigate the entries in the address book by using the scroll bar. Hold down the arrow to
scroll quickly through the list.
6. Highlight the name to select a recipient, and then touch Add.
You can also select a distribution list by touching All, or add a recipient from a local list
by touching the Local button. Highlight the appropriate names, and then touch Add to
add the name to your list of recipients.
You can remove a recipient from your list by scrolling to highlight the recipient, and then
touching Remove.
7. The names in the recipient list are placed in the text line of the keyboard screen. If you
want, you can add a recipient that is not found in the address book by typing the e-mail
address on the keyboard. After you are satisfied with your recipient list, touch OK.
8. Touch OK on the keyboard screen.
9. Finish typing information in the CC: and Subject: fields on the Send to E-mail screen, if
necessary. You can check the list of recipients by touching the down arrow in the To:
text line.
10. Press START.
Using the local address book
Use the local address book to store frequently-used e-mail addresses. The local address
book can be shared between MFPs that use the same server to gain access to the
HP Digital Sending software.
You can use the address book when you type e-mail addresses in the From:, To:, CC:, or
BCC: fields. You can also add or delete addresses in the address book.
To open the address book, touch the address book button on the keyboard screen. When
you touch Local, the Edit button appears. Touch this button to add or delete items from the
address book.
To add e-mail addresses to the local address book
1. Touch Local.
114
Chapter 5 Scanning and sending to e-mail
ENWW
2. Touch Edit.
3. Touch Add.
4. In the Address field, type the e-mail address for the new entry (required).
5. In the Name field, type a name for the new entry (optional). The Name is the alias for the
e-mail address. If you do not type an alias name, the alias will be the e-mail address itself.
6. Do one of the following:
●
To add the e-mail address to the local address book without closing the Add screen,
touch Save.
●
To return to the Edit screen without saving the e-mail address, touch Cancel.
●
To save the e-mail address and return to the Edit screen, touch OK.
After you add an address, the following confirmation message appears: Address was
stored successfully. The e-mail address is added to the public address book. All users
will have access to this address.
To delete e-mail addresses from the local address book
You can delete e-mail addresses that you no longer use.
Note
To change an e-mail address, you must first delete the address and then add the corrected
address as a new address in the local address book.
1. Touch Local.
2. Touch Edit.
3. Touch DELETE to see a list of e-mail addresses that you can delete from the local
address book. If no addresses are available to delete, the list appears blank.
4. Touch the check box for each e-mail address that you want to delete, and then touch OK.
The following confirmation message appears: Do you want to delete the selected
address(es)? <Yes> <No>
5. Touch YES to delete the e-mail address(es) or touch NO to return to the Delete screen.
6. To return to the Edit screen, touch OK.
ENWW
Using the address book
115
Additional e-mail features
If you install the optional HP Digital Sending Software (HP DSS), additional e-mail features
become available.
Secondary e-mail
If the system administrator has made the feature available, a Secondary E-mail option
might appear on the control-panel display. Secondary E-mail is designed for solutions that
require an extra measure of data security. It differs from the regular e-mail feature in that the
data between the device and the HP DSS server is encrypted. An rfc822-compliant e-mail
message, which has the scanned data as an attachment, is created in the \HPEMAIL2 folder
in the DSS program directory. The third-party software program, which is monitoring this
folder, processes the e-mail message and sends it out in a secure format.
See the information that came with the HP DSS software for more information about
configuring the Secondary E-mail feature. The process for sending an e-mail message by
using the Secondary E-mail option is exactly the same as it is for normal e-mail.
Send to folder
If the system administrator has made the feature available, the MFP can scan a file and
send it to a folder on the network. Supported operating systems for folder destinations
include Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003,
and Novell.
Note
Authentication might be required in order to use this option, or to send to certain folders. See
your system administrator for more information.
See the information that came with the HP DSS software for more information about using
the Send to Folder feature.
Send to workflow
If the system administrator has enabled the workflow functionality, you can scan a document
and send it to a custom workflow destination. A workflow destination gives you the ability to
send additional information, along with the scanned document, to a specified network or file
transfer protocol (FTP) location. Prompts for specific information appear on the control-panel
display. A third-party software program that monitors the network folder or FTP site can then
retrieve and decipher the information, and perform the specified operation on the scanned
image. The system administrator can also designate a printer as a workflow destination,
which allows you to scan a document and then send it directly to a network printer for printing.
See the information that came with the HP DSS software for more information about using
the Send to Workflow feature.
116
Chapter 5 Scanning and sending to e-mail
ENWW
6
Faxing
The HP LaserJet 4345x mfp, HP LaserJet 4345xs mfp, and HP LaserJet 4345xm mfp
models come with an HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 already installed. Windows
users can also install the optional HP Digital Sending Software (DSS), which provides digital
faxing services.
For complete instructions for configuring the fax accessory and for using the fax features,
see the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide. A printed copy of this guide is
included with the HP LaserJet 4345x mfp, HP LaserJet 4345xs mfp, and HP LaserJet
4345xm mfp.
This chapter provides information about the following topics.
ENWW
●
Analog faxing
●
Digital faxing
117
Analog faxing
When the HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 is installed, the MFP can function as a
standalone fax machine.
The HP LaserJet 4345x mfp, HP LaserJet 4345xs mfp, and HP LaserJet 4345xm mfp
models come with an HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 already installed. For the
HP LaserJet 4345mfp (base model), you can order this accessory as an option. See Part
numbers for information about ordering the analog fax accessory.
Installing the fax accessory
Use this procedure to install the analog fax accessory if it is not already installed.
1. Turn off the MFP, and disconnect all the cables.
2. Remove the output bin, the 3-bin mailbox, or the stapler/stacker.
3. At the back of the MFP, remove the formatter cover.
4. Remove the fax-accessory cover from the formatter. Insert a coin into the groove at the
top of the cover, and use it to pry the cover away from the formatter. Push the cover up
to remove it from the formatter.
118
Chapter 6 Faxing
ENWW
5. Open the formatter door.
6. Remove the fax accessory from its antistatic pouch.
CAUTION
The fax accessory contains parts that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). When
removing the fax accessory from its antistatic pouch and while installing it, use static
protection, such as a grounding wrist strap that is connected to the metal frame of the MFP,
or touch the metal frame of the MFP with your other hand.
7. Align the two cutouts on the fax accessory with the two fax-accessory guides, and
carefully slide the fax accessory into the guides.
8. Push the fax accesssory into place, and make sure that the fax accessory is securely
connected to the formatter.
9. Close the formatter door.
ENWW
Analog faxing
119
10. Replace the formatter cover.
11. Reinstall the output bin, the 3-bin mailbox, or the stapler/stacker.
12. Reconnect all the cables, and turn on the MFP.
Connecting the fax accessory to a phone line
When connecting the fax accessory to a phone line, ensure that the phone line being used
for the fax accessory is a dedicated line that is not used by any other devices. Also, this line
should be an analog line because the fax will not function correctly if it is connected to some
digital PBX systems. If you are not sure whether you have an analog or digital phone line,
contact your telecom provider.
HP recommends using the phone cord that comes with the fax accessory to ensure that the
accessory functions correctly.
Note
Follow these instructions to connect the fax accessory to a phone jack.
1. Locate the phone cord that is included with the fax accessory kit. Connect one end of
the phone cord into the fax accessory phone jack that is on the formatter. Push the
connector until it clicks.
CAUTION
Be sure to connect the phone line to the fax accessory port , which is near the bottom of the
formatter. Do not connect the phone line to the HP Jetdirect LAN port, which is nearer the
top of the formatter.
2. Connect the other end of the phone cord into the phone jack on the wall. Push the
connector until it clicks.
120
Chapter 6 Faxing
ENWW
Configuring and using the fax features
Before you can use the fax features, you must configure them in the control-panel menus.
For complete information about configuring and using the fax accessory and for information
about troubleshooting problems with the fax accessory, see the HP LaserJet Analog Fax
Accessory 300 User Guide, which is provided with the fax accessory.
ENWW
Analog faxing
121
Digital faxing
Digital faxing is available when you install the optional HP Digital Sending Software. For
information about ordering this software, go to http://www.hp.com/go/lj4345mfp_software.
With digital faxing, the MFP does not need to be connected directly to a phone line. Instead,
the MFP can send a fax in one of three ways:
●
LAN fax sends faxes through a third-party fax provider.
●
Microsoft Windows 2000 fax is a fax modem and Digital Sender Module on a computer
that allows the computer to operate as a turnkey gateway fax.
●
Internet fax uses an Internet fax provider to process faxes, and the fax is delivered on a
traditional fax machine or sent to the user’s e-mail.
For complete information about using digital faxing, see the documentation that is provided
with the HP Digital Sending Software.
122
Chapter 6 Faxing
ENWW
7
Optional output and input
devices
This chapter includes information about using and troubleshooting the following output and
input devices:
ENWW
●
3-bin mailbox
●
Stapler/stacker accessory
●
500-sheet feeders and the cabinet/stand
●
Envelope feeder
●
Troubleshooting the output and input accessories
123
3-bin mailbox
The optional 3-bin mailbox has one bin that stacks up to 500 sheets and two bins that stack
up to 100 sheets each, for a total capacity of 700 sheets.
The 3-bin mailbox has three operating modes: mailbox mode, stacker mode, and function
separator mode. Each mode is explained in the sections that follow.
Mailbox mode
The bins can be assigned to a user or to a group of users. All print, copy, and fax jobs that
an assigned user or group of users sends are delivered to the designated bin. Each user can
select the bin in the printer driver or at the control panel.
When the designated bin is full, the MFP stops printing. Printing continues only when you
empty the bin.
Stacker mode
The 3-bin mailbox can combine the bins to act as a stacker. It can stack up to 700 sheets of
75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) paper. Jobs are sent to the bottom bin first, then to the middle bin, and
then to the top bin. Print jobs that require more than 500 sheets fill the bottom bin and
continue stacking into the middle and top bins.
When all three bins are full, the MFP stops printing. Printing continues only when you
remove paper from the top bin. The MFP does not resume printing if you remove paper from
the bottom bin or the middle bin before you remove paper from the top bin.
Note
Do not remove paper from the top bin and then attempt to put it in place again. This causes
the pages to stack in the incorrect order.
When the 3-bin mailbox is in stacker mode, you cannot designate that a job be sent to a
particular bin.
Function-separator mode
You can configure the bins to receive jobs that come from a specific MFP function, such as
printed jobs, copy jobs, or faxes. For instance, you can specify that all copy jobs are sent to
the top bin.
The MFP stops functioning when the designated bin is full. Printing, copying, or faxing can
continue only when you empty the bin.
Using the 3-bin mailbox
You can select the operating mode at the control panel and in the printer driver.
Note
When you select the operating mode in the printer driver, the settings must match the
operation mode that is set at the control panel.
When using mailbox mode, use the either printer driver or the control panel to assign bins to
a user or group of users. When using function-separator mode, use the control panel to
assign the bins to each function.
124
Chapter 7 Optional output and input devices
ENWW
Note
Each time you change the operating mode, the MFP restarts.
To select the operating mode at the control panel
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Scroll to and touch MBM-3 CONFIGURATION.
4. Touch OPERATION MODE. Select the operation mode that you want to use.
5. Touch OK.
To select the operating mode in the printer driver (Windows)
1. Access the printer-driver properties. For instructions, see Using the printer drivers. Look
for the column with the heading "To change the configuration settings," and follow the
procedure for the operating system that you are using.
2. You can configure the mode automatically or manually:
a. Automatic configuration: Next to Automatic Configuration, select Update Now.
b. Manual configuration: Select the operation mode from the list of options for
Accessory Output Bin or Optional Paper Destinations (depending on your
operating system).
To select the operating mode in the printer driver (Mac OS 9)
1. Access the printer-driver properties. For instructions, see Using the printer drivers. Look
for the column with the heading "To change the configuration settings," and follow the
procedure for the operating system that you are using.
2. In the Change pop-up menu, select Accessory Output Bins.
3. In the To: pop-up menu, click HP 3-bin mailbox.
4. In the Change pop-up menu, select Mailbox mode.
5. In the To: pop-up menu, select the mode that you want to use.
6. Click OK.
To select the operating mode in the printer driver (Mac OS X)
1. Access the printer-driver properties. For instructions, see Using the printer drivers. Look
for the column with the heading "To change the configuration settings," and follow the
procedure for the operating system that you are using.
2. In the Accessory Output Bins pop-up menu, select HP 3-bin mailbox.
3. In the Mailbox mode pop-up menu, select the mode that you want to use.
4. Click Apply changes.
To assign an output bin to a user or a group of users when using
Mailbox mode (Windows)
Perform the following procedure for each user or group of users.
1. Open the printer driver. See Using the printer drivers.
2. On the Output tab, select the appropriate output bin, and then click OK.
ENWW
3-bin mailbox
125
Note
You can create a Quick Set for that has the appropriate settings and output bins. For more
information, see Creating and using quick sets.
To assign an output bin to a user or a group of users when using
Mailbox mode (Mac)
Assign output bins as mailboxes by creating a new preset in the printer driver.
1. Open the printer driver. See Using the printer drivers. Look for the column with the
heading "To change the print job default settings," and follow the instructions for the
operating system that you are using.
2. Create the new preset.
To configure a destination bin at the control panel (Mailbox and
Function-separator modes)
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Touch PRINTING, COPYING, or FAX.
4. Touch PAPER DESTINATION. Select the output bin that you want to use.
5. Touch OK.
126
Chapter 7 Optional output and input devices
ENWW
Stapler/stacker accessory
The optional stapler/stacker can staple jobs of up to 30 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper. The
stapler can staple these sizes: A4, Letter, Legal, Executive (JIS), and 8.5x13. It can stack up
to 500 sheets of paper.
●
Paper weight can range from 60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb). Heavier paper might have a
stapling limit of fewer than 30 sheets.
●
If the job consists of only one sheet, or if it consists of more than 30 sheets, the MFP
delivers the job to the bin, but the MFP does not staple the job.
●
The stapler supports paper only. Do not try to staple other types of print media, such as
envelopes, transparencies, or labels.
When you want the MFP staple a document, select stapling in the software. You can usually
select the stapler in your program or printer driver, although some options might be available
only in the printer driver. Where and how you make selections depends on your program or
printer driver.
If you cannot select the stapler in the program or printer driver, select the stapler at the MFP
control panel.
The stapler accepts print jobs if it is out of staples, but it does not staple the pages. The
printer driver can be configured to disable the staple option if the staple cartridge is empty.
To configure the printer driver to recognize the optional
stapler/stacker
You need to configure the printer driver to recognize the optional stapler/stacker. You need
to set this setting only once. The procedure to configure the driver to recognize the
accessory depends on the operating system you are using. For instructions, see Using the
printer drivers. Look for the column with the heading "To change the configuration settings,"
and follow the procedure for the operating system that you are using. Select the HP 500Sheet Stapler/Stacker as an optional paper destination or accessory.
To select the stapler in the software (Windows)
1. On the File menu, click Print, and then click Properties.
2. On the Output tab, click the drop-down list under Staple, and click One Staple Angled.
To select the stapler in the software (Mac)
1. On the File menu, click Print, and then select Finishing from the print options.
2. In the Output Destination pop-up menu, select the Stapler option.
3. In the Finishing Options pop-up menu, select the stapling style that you want to use.
ENWW
Stapler/stacker accessory
127
To select the stapler at the control panel for printed jobs
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Touch STAPLER/STACKER.
4. Touch STAPLE.
5. Touch the option that you want to use, either NONE or ONE.
Note
Selecting the stapler at the printer control panel changes the default setting to STAPLE. It is
possible that all print jobs will be stapled. However, settings that are changed in the printer
driver override settings that are changed at the control panel.
To select the stapler in the printer driver for printed jobs
(Windows)
Note
The following procedure changes the default setting to staple all print jobs.
1. Open the printer driver. See Using the printer drivers. Look for the column with the
heading "To change the print job default settings."
2. On the Output tab, click the drop-down list under Staple, and click One Staple Angled.
Note
You can create a Quick Set for that has the appropriate settings. For more information, see
Creating and using quick sets.
To select the stapler in the printer driver for printed jobs (Mac)
Select the stapler by creating a new preset in the printer driver.
1. Open the printer driver. See Using the printer drivers. Look for the column with the
heading "To change the print job default settings," and follow the instructions for the
operating system that you are using.
2. Create the new preset.
To set the stapler at the control panel for all copy jobs
Note
The following procedure changes the default setting for all copy jobs.
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Touch COPYING.
4. Touch STAPLE.
5. Touch the option that you want to use, either NONE or CORNER.
128
Chapter 7 Optional output and input devices
ENWW
To set the stapler at the control panel for a single copy job
Note
The following procedure sets the stapling option for only the current copy job.
1. Touch Copy.
2. Touch Copy settings.
3. Touch the STAPLE tab.
4. Touch the option that you want to use, either NONE or ONE.
To configure the MFP to stop or continue when the staple
cartridge is empty
You can specify whether the MFP stops printing when the staple cartridge is empty or if it
continues printing but does not staple the jobs.
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Touch STAPLER/STACKER.
4. Touch STAPLES OUT.
5. Touch the option that you want to use:
●
Select STOP to stop all printing until the staple cartridge is replaced.
●
Select CONTINUE to continue printing jobs without stapling them.
Loading staples
Load staples if the printer control-panel display prompts you with a STAPLER LOW ON
STAPLES message (the stapler has fewer than 20 usable staples left) or a REPLACE
STAPLE CARTRIDGE message (the stapler is empty, or the remaining staples cannot be
used).
You can specify whether the MFP stops printing when the staple cartridge is empty or if it
continues printing but does not staple the jobs. For more information, see To configure the
MFP to stop or continue when the staple cartridge is empty.
To load staples
1. Press and hold the release button on the top of the stapler/stacker. Pull the stapler/
stacker away from the MFP.
ENWW
Stapler/stacker accessory
129
2. Open the staple-cartridge cover.
3. Grasp the green staple-cartridge handle and pull the old staple cartridge out of the
stapler unit.
4. Insert the new staple cartridge into the stapler unit and push down on the green handle
until the unit snaps into place.
5. Close the staple-cartridge cover, and slide the stapler/stacker into the MFP.
130
Chapter 7 Optional output and input devices
ENWW
500-sheet feeders and the cabinet/stand
You can install up to three 500-sheet feeders on the MFP. When using more than one 500sheet feeder, HP recommends that you also use a cabinet/stand. The cabinet/stand
supports the MFP so that it does not tip over, and it raises the MFP to a height that makes
using the MFP easier.
Follow the instructions that come with the cabinet/stand and the 500-sheet feeders to set up
the accessories. Always place each 500-sheet feeder on top of the cabinet/stand one-at-atime, and then place the MFP on top.
CAUTION
Do not try to lift the MFP when it is attached to one or more 500-sheet feeders. See Moving
the MFP.
To load paper and other print media into the 500-sheet feeders, see Loading trays 2, 3, 4
and 5.
ENWW
500-sheet feeders and the cabinet/stand
131
Envelope feeder
With the optional envelope feeder, the MFP will automatically feed up to 75 standard-size
envelopes. To order an optional envelope feeder, see Ordering parts, accessories, and
supplies.
●
Print only on envelopes that are approved for use in the MFP. See Envelopes.)
●
Before you use the optional envelope feeder, ensure that the printer driver is set to
recognize it. You need to set this setting only once. See the printer driver online Help for
details.
●
Ensure that you are familiar with the parts of the optional envelope feeder.
1
2
3
4
Release lever
Envelope weight
Tray extension
Guides
Installing the optional envelope feeder
Use these steps to install the optional envelope feeder onto the printer.
To install the optional envelope feeder
1. Open tray 1.
2. Remove the plastic envelope-entrance cover from the MFP.
132
Chapter 7 Optional output and input devices
ENWW
3. Insert the optional envelope feeder firmly into the MFP until it latches into position. Pull
gently on the optional envelope feeder to be sure that it is securely in place.
Removing the optional envelope feeder
Use these steps to remove the optional envelope feeder from the MFP.
To remove the optional envelope feeder
1. Press the release button that is located on the left side and pull the optional envelope
feeder away from the MFP.
2. Replace the plastic envelope-entrance cover in the printer and close tray 1.
Loading envelopes in the optional envelope feeder
Use these steps to load envelopes in the optional envelope feeder.
ENWW
Envelope feeder
133
To load envelopes in the optional envelope feeder
1. Fold down the envelope-feeder tray. Lift the envelope weight.
2. Squeeze the release lever that is located on the left envelope guide and slide the guides
apart.
3. Load envelopes with the front side facing up, and the postage-end toward the printer.
Stack envelopes no higher than the arrows on the guides. Slide the envelopes into the
printer as far as they will go without forcing them. The envelopes at the bottom of the
stack should slide in slightly farther than the envelopes at the top of the stack.
4. Adjust the guides to touch the envelopes without bending them.
5. Lower the envelope weight onto the envelopes.
134
Chapter 7 Optional output and input devices
ENWW
Note
ENWW
Select the envelope size in one of these locations, trying them in this order: in the program,
in the printer driver, or on the PAPER HANDLING menu at the MFP control panel. See
Paper handling menu.
Envelope feeder
135
Troubleshooting the output and input accessories
When the 3-bin mailbox or the stapler/stacker is installed correctly, the LED at the top of the
accessory is lit green. If the LED is off, is blinking, or is lit amber, a problem exists. See
Understanding accessory lights for the 3-bin mailbox and stapler/stacker.
For information about clearing jams that can occur in the envelope feeder or the optional
500-sheet feeders, see Clearing jams from the optional envelope-feeder area and Clearing
jams from the tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas.
136
Chapter 7 Optional output and input devices
ENWW
8
Security features
This section explains important security features that are available for the MFP:
ENWW
●
Securing the embedded Web server
●
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
●
Secure Disk Erase
●
Job-storage features
●
DSS authentication
●
Locking the control-panel menus
●
Locking the formatter cage
137
Securing the embedded Web server
You can assign a password for access to the embedded Web server so that unauthorized
users cannot change the MFP settings.
To secure the embedded Web server
1. Open the embedded Web server. See Using the embedded Web server.
2. Click the Settings tab.
3. On the left side of the window, click Security.
4. Type the password next to New Password, and type it again next to Verify Password.
5. Click Apply. Make note of the password, and store it in a safe place.
138
Chapter 8 Security features
ENWW
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
The Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) provides a portal on the MFP. By using the FIH and
third-party equipment, you can track information about copies that are made on the MFP.
Requirements
●
Windows 9X, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows XP
●
Access to third-party accounting hardware solutions, such as Equitrac or Copitrak devices
Using the FIH
To use the FIH, you must download and install the FIH software. The software is available
from http://www.hp.com/go/lj4345mfp_software. The software is used to enable or disable
the FIH portal. Use the software to set and change the administrator personal identification
number (PIN).
Administrators can use the PIN option to configure the FIH to prevent any unauthorized
changes. Changes can be made only with the correct PIN authentication.
Note
It is important to remember the PIN that is assigned to the FIH administration software. The
PIN is required to make any changes to the FIH.
To enable the FIH portal
1. Double-click the FIH.EXE file. The Foreign Interface Harness dialog box appears.
2. Click OK.
3. Click Enable.
4. If you have not entered a PIN before, click No. If you have entered a PIN before, click
Yes. If you click No, type and confirm the PIN, and then click OK. If you click Yes, type
the PIN and click OK.
Note
The PIN must be numeric.
5. Click the appropriate button for the type of connection: Direct or Network. If you select
Direct, type the MFP port. If you select Network, type the IP address and port for the
MFP.
Note
The IP address for the MFP can be found on the Configuration page. You can print a
Configuration page from the control panel by touching Menu, touching INFORMATION, and
then touching PRINT CONFIGURATION.
If you typed an incorrect IP address, you will receive an error message. Otherwise, the portal
is enabled.
To disable the FIH portal
1. Double-click the FIH.EXE file. The Foreign Interface Harness dialog box appears.
2. Click OK.
3. Click Disable.
ENWW
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
139
4. Type the PIN and click OK.
5. Click the appropriate button for the type of connection: Direct or Network. If you
selected Direct, type the MFP port and click OK. If you selected Network, type the IP
address and port for the MFP, and then click OK. The portal is disabled.
Note
140
If you lose the PIN number and the portal needs to be disabled, try using the default PIN that
is listed to disable it. For assistance, use the HP Instant Support service, which is available
through the embedded Web server or at http://instantsupport.hp.com. See Using the
embedded Web server.
Chapter 8 Security features
ENWW
Secure Disk Erase
You might need to protect deleted data from unauthorized access on the MFP hard drive.
Secure Disk Erase is a security feature that you can use to securely erase print and copy
jobs from the hard drive.
Secure Disk Erase offers the following levels of disk security:
●
Non-Secure Fast Erase. This is a simple file-table erase function. Access to the file is
removed, but actual data is retained on the disk until it is overwritten by subsequent datastorage operations. This is the fastest mode. Non-Secure Fast Erase is the default erase
mode.
●
Secure Fast Erase. Access to the file is removed, and the data is overwritten with a
fixed identical character pattern. This is slower than Non-Secure Fast Erase, but all data
is overwritten. Secure Fast Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense 5220-22.M
requirements for the clearing of disk media.
●
Secure Sanitizing Erase. This level is similar to the Secure Fast Erase mode. In
addition, data is repetitively overwritten by using an algorithm that prevents any residual
data persistence. This mode will impact performance. Secure Sanitizing Erase meets
the U.S. Department of Defense 5220-22.M requirements for the sanitization of disk
media.
Data affected
Data affected (covered) by the Secure Disk Erase feature includes temporary files that are
created during the print and copying process, stored jobs, proof and hold jobs, disk-based
fonts, and disk-based macros (forms).
Note
Stored jobs will be securely overwritten only when they have been deleted through the
RETRIEVE JOB menu on the MFP after the appropriate erase mode has been set. See
Retrieve job menu.
This feature will not impact data that is stored on flash-based product non-volatile RAM
(NVRAM) that is used to store default settings, page counts, and similar data. This feature
does not affect data that is stored on a system RAM disk (if one is used). This feature does
not impact data that is stored on the flash-based system boot RAM.
Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode does not overwrite previous data on the disk, nor
does it immediately perform a full-disk sanitization. Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode
changes how the MFP cleans up temporary data for jobs after the erase mode has been
changed.
Gaining access to Secure Disk Erase
Use HP Web Jetadmin to gain access to and set the Secure Disk Erase feature.
Additional Information
For additional information about the HP Secure Disk Erase feature, see the HP support flyer
or go to http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin/.
ENWW
Secure Disk Erase
141
Job-storage features
Several job-storage features are available for this MFP. These features include printing
private jobs, storing print jobs, quick-copying jobs, and proofing and holding jobs.
For more information about job-storage features, see Job-storage features.
142
Chapter 8 Security features
ENWW
DSS authentication
Optional Digital Sending Software (DSS) for the MFP is available for purchase separately.
The software provides an advanced sending program that contains an authentication
process. This process requires users to type a user identification and a password before
they can use any of the DSS features that require authentication.
See Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies for ordering information.
ENWW
DSS authentication
143
Locking the control-panel menus
To prevent someone from changing MFP configuration, you can lock the control-panel
menus. This prevents unauthorized users from changing the configuration settings such as
the SMTP server. The following procedure describes how to restrict access to the
control-panel menus by using the HP Web Jetadmin software. (See Using HP Web Jetadmin
software.)
To lock the control-panel menus
1. Open the HP Web Jetadmin program.
2. Open the DEVICE MANAGEMENT folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel.
Navigate to the DEVICE LISTS folder.
3. Select the MFP.
4. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Configure.
5. Select Security from the Configuration Categories list.
6. Type a Device Password.
7. In the Control Panel Access section, select Maximum Lock. This prevents
unauthorized users from gaining access to configuration settings.
144
Chapter 8 Security features
ENWW
Locking the formatter cage
You can place a Kensington lock on the formatter cage to prevent unauthorized access to
components on the formatter.
Note
A Kensington lock is typically used for locking laptop computers to prevent theft.
The following figure indicates where you should place the lock.
ENWW
Locking the formatter cage
145
146
Chapter 8 Security features
ENWW
9
Managing and maintaining the
MFP
This chapter contains information about these topics:
ENWW
●
Using the embedded Web server
●
Using the HP Toolbox
●
Using HP Web Jetadmin software
●
Configuring and verifying an IP address
●
Setting the real-time clock
●
Checking the MFP configuration
●
Managing the print cartridge
●
Upgrading the firmware
●
Cleaning the MFP
●
Calibrating the scanner
●
Performing preventive maintenance
147
Using the embedded Web server
Use the embedded Web server to view MFP and network status and to manage printing
functions from your computer instead of from the MFP control panel. The following are
examples of what you can do using the embedded Web server:
●
View MFP status information.
●
Set the type of media that is loaded in each tray.
●
Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones.
●
View and change tray configurations.
●
View and change the MFP control-panel menu configuration.
●
View and print internal pages.
●
Receive notification of MFP and supplies events.
●
View and change network configuration.
The embedded Web server feature requires at least 48 MB of RAM and an HP Jetdirect print
server in order to connect to your network.
To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later or
Netscape 6.2 or later for Windows, Mac OS, and Linux (Netscape only). Netscape Navigator
4.7 is required for HP-UX 10 and HP-UX 11. The embedded Web server works when the
MFP is connected to an IP-based network. The embedded Web server does not support IPXbased MFP connections. You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the
embedded Web server.
When the MFP is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically
available.
Note
For complete information about using the embedded Web server, see the Embedded Web
Server User Guide, which is on the HP LaserJet 4345mfp software CD-ROM.
Opening the embedded Web server
1. In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the IP address for the MFP. To find
the IP address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a
configuration page, see Checking the MFP configuration.
Note
After you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future.
2. The embedded Web server has four tabs that contain settings and information about the
MFP: the Information tab, the Settings tab, the Digital Sending tab, and the
Networking tab. Click the tab that you want to view.
3. See the following sections for more information about each tab.
148
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Information tab
The Information pages group consists of the following pages.
●
Device Status. This page shows the MFP status and shows the life remaining of HP
supplies, with 0% representing that a supply is empty. The page also shows the type
and size of print media set for each tray. To change the default settings, click Change
Settings.
●
Configuration page. This page shows the information that is found on the MFP
configuration page.
●
Supplies Status. This page shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0%
representing that a supply is empty. This page also provides supplies part numbers. To
order new supplies, click Order Supplies in the Other Links area of the window. To
visit any Web site, you must have Internet access.
●
Event log. This page shows a list of all MFP events and errors.
●
Usage page. This page details the total usage of the MFP.
●
Device information. This page shows the MFP network name, address, and model
information. To change these entries, click Device Information on the Settings tab.
●
Control panel. View the current status of the MFP control panel.
●
Print. Select a file on your network or on the Web, and send it to the MFP to be printed.
The document must be a print-ready document, such as a .PS, .PDF, .PCL, or .TXT file.
Settings tab
Use this tab to configure the MFP from your computer. The Settings tab can be password
protected. If this MFP is networked, always consult with the system administrator before
changing settings on this tab.
The Settings tab contains the following pages.
ENWW
●
Configure Device. Configure all MFP settings from this page. This page contains the
traditional menus found on the control-panel display. These menus include Information,
Paper Handling, Configure Device, and Diagnostics.
●
E-mail Server. Use this page to set up the SMTP server that will be used to send MFP
e-mail alerts (set up on the Alerts page).
●
Alerts. Network only. Set up to receive e-mail alerts for various MFP and supplies
events. These alerts can be sent to a list of up to 20 e-mail, mobile device, or Web site
destinations.
●
AutoSend. Use the AutoSend screen to send product-configuration and usage
information periodically to your service provider. This feature establishes a relationship
with Hewlett-Packard Company or another service provider to provide you with services
that include support agreements and usage tracking.
●
Security. Set a password that must be typed in order to gain access to the Settings,
Digital Sending, and Networking tabs. Turn on and off certain features of the EWS.
●
Edit Other Links. Add or customize a link to another Web site. This link is shown in the
Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages. These permanent links always
appear in the Other Links area: HP Instant Support, Order Supplies, and Product
Support.
●
Device Information. Name the MFP and assign an asset number to it. Type the name
of the primary contact who will receive information about the MFP.
Using the embedded Web server
149
●
Language. Determine the language in which to show the embedded Web server
information.
●
Date & Time. Use this page to set the correct date and time for the device. Once the
time is set, the device's real-time clock maintains the accurate time.
●
Wake Time page. Wake Time can be set to wake the MFP at a certain time on a daily
basis. Only one wake time can be set per day; however, each day can have a different
wake time. You can also set the time delay for Sleep Mode on this page.
Digital Sending tab
Use the pages on the Digital Sending tab to configure the digital-sending features.
Note
If the MFP is configured to use the optional HP Digital Sending Software, the options on
these tabs are not available. Instead, all digital-sending configuration is performed by using
the HP Digital Sending Software.
●
General page. Set up contact information for the system administrator.
●
Send to E-mail page. Configure the e-mail settings for digital sending. You can specify
the SMTP server, the default "From" address, and the default subject. You can also set
the maximum file size that is allowed for attachements.
●
Addressing page. Configure the LDAP server settings for digital sending. The LDAP
server can be used to retrieve e-mail addresses for digital sending. Select the check box
at the top of this page to enable this feature. Click Find Server to find the LDAP server
on your network, then click Test near the bottom of the page to test access to the
server. Contact your network administrator for more information about using the LDAP
server.
●
Address Book page. Use this page to import e-mail addresses, in the form of a CommaSeparated Value (CSV) file into the MFP internal address book. This process is
necessary only if you are not using an LDAP server to find e-mail addresses.
●
Activity Log page. View the digital-sending activity log for the MFP. The log contains
digital-sending job information, including any errors that occur.
●
Preferences page. Configure digital-sending defaults such as the default page-size and
the default settings-reset delay. You can also configure these settings by using the MFP
control-panel menus.
Networking tab
The network administrator can use this tab to control network-related settings for the MFP
when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab does not appear if the MFP is directly
connected to a computer, or if the MFP is connected to a network with anything other than
an HP Jetdirect print server.
150
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Other links
This section contains links that connect you to the Internet. You must have Internet access in
order to use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect when
you first opened the embedded Web server, you must connect before you can visit these
Web sites. Connecting might require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it.
ENWW
●
HP Instant Support. Connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions. This
service analyzes your MFP error log and configuration information to provide diagnostic
and support information specific to your MFP.
●
Order Supplies. Click this link to connect to an ordering Web site and order genuine HP
supplies, such as print cartridges and media.
●
Product Support. Connects to the support site for the HP LaserJet 4345mfp Series.
Then, you can search for help regarding general topics.
Using the embedded Web server
151
Using the HP Toolbox
The HP Toolbox is a Web-browser-based software program that you can use for the
following tasks:
●
Check the MFP status.
●
Configure the MFP settings.
You can view the HP Toolbox when the MFP is connected to a TCP/IP-based network. You
must perform a complete (custom) software installation in order to use the HP Toolbox.
Note
You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the HP Toolbox. However, if you
click a link in the Other Links area, you must have Internet access to go to the site that is
associated with the link. See Other links for more information.
Supported operating systems
The HP Toolbox is supported for the following operating systems:
●
Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows Me, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 (32bit only)
●
Mac OS X, Version 10.2 or later (the MFP must be set up by using Rendezvous or TCP/
IP)
Supported browsers
To use the HP Toolbox, you must have one of the following browsers:
Windows
●
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later
●
Netscape Navigator 7.0 or later
●
Opera Software ASA Opera 7.0 or later
Mac (OS X only)
152
●
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.1 or later
●
Netscape Navigator 7.0 or later
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
To view the HP Toolbox
1. Open the HP Toolbox in one of these ways:
Note
●
From the Windows Start menu, click Programs, and then click HP Toolbox.
●
For Mac OS X, on the hard drive, click Applications, and then click the Utilities
folder. Double-click the HP Toolbox icon.
After you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future.
2. The HP Toolbox opens in a Web browser. The HP Toolbox software contains the
following sections:
●
Status tab
●
Alerts tab
●
Device Settings window
●
Toolbox links
●
Other links
Status tab
The Status tab has links to the following main pages:
●
Device Status. View MFP status information. This page indicates MFP conditions such
as a jam or an empty tray. After you correct a problem with the MFP, click the Refresh
button to update the device status.
●
Supplies Status. View detailed supplies status such as the percent of life remaining in
the print cartridge and the number of pages that have been printed with the current print
cartridge. This page also lists the part number for each supply, and has links to order
supplies and to find recycling information.
●
Print Info. Print the configuration page, the supplies status page, and the menu map.
Alerts tab
Use the Alerts tab to configure the MFP to automatically notify you of MFP alerts. The
Alerts tab has links to the following main pages:
●
Set up status alerts
●
Administrative settings
Set up Status Alerts page
On the Set up Status Alerts page, you can choose to turn alerts on or off, specify when the
MFP should send an alert, and select from two different types of alerts:
●
Pop-up message
●
System tray icon
Click Apply to activate the settings.
ENWW
Using the HP Toolbox
153
Administrative settings page
On the Administrative settings page, you can set the frequency of how often the HP Toolbox
checks for MFP alerts. Three settings are available:
Note
●
Less Often. The HP Toolbox checks for alerts every 15 seconds.
●
Normal. The HP Toolbox checks for alerts every 8 seconds.
●
More Often. The HP Toolbox checks for alerts every 4 seconds.
If you want to reduce network input/output (I/O) traffic, reduce the frequency at which the
MFP checks for alerts.
Device Settings window
When you click the Device Settings button, the embedded Web server opens in a new
window. See Using the embedded Web server. To return to the HP Toolbox from the
embedded Web server, click Return to Toolbox.
Toolbox links
The toolbox Links item at the left of the screen provides links to the following options:
●
Select a device. Select from all of the HP Toolbox-enabled devices.
●
View current alerts. View the current alerts for all devices that have been set up. (You
must be printing to view the current alerts.)
●
Text only page. View the HP Toolbox as a site map with links to all of the individual
pages within HP Toolbox and the Device Settings window.
Other links
This section contains links that connect you to the Internet. You must have Internet access in
order to use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect when
you first opened the HP Toolbox, you must connect before you can visit these Web sites.
Connecting might require that you close the HP Toolbox and reopen it.
154
●
HP instant support. Connects to the HP instant support page for the product.
●
Product Registration. Connects to the HP product registration Web site.
●
Order Supplies. Connects to the HP supplies ordering Web site. The MFP must be
connected directly to a computer in order to use this Web site.
●
Product Support. Connects to the support site for the MFP. Then, you can search for
help with a specific problem.
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Using HP Web Jetadmin software
HP Web Jetadmin is a Web-based software solution for remotely installing, monitoring, and
troubleshooting network-connected peripherals. The intuitive browser interface simplifies
cross-platform management of a wide range of devices, including HP and non-HP printers.
Management is proactive, allowing network administrators the ability to resolve printer issues
before users are affected. Download this free, enhanced-management software at
http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin_software.
To obtain plug-ins to HP Web Jetadmin, click plug-ins, and then click the download link
that is next to the name of the plug-in that you want. The HP Web Jetadmin software can
automatically notify you when new plug-ins are available. On the Product Update page,
follow the directions to automatically connect to the HP Web site.
If installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin is available to any client through a supported
Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows or Netscape
Navigator 7.1 for Linux. Browse to the HP Web Jetadmin host.
Note
ENWW
Browsers must be Java-enabled. Browsing from an Apple Macintosh computer is not
supported.
Using HP Web Jetadmin software
155
Configuring and verifying an IP address
You can use either of two options to assign and configure TCP/IP addresses on an
HP Jetdirect print server:
●
HP Web Jetadmin
●
Embedded Web server
TCP/IP assignment
The system administrator or primary user is responsible for determining the TCP/IP address
for a specific print server. If you are unsure what the TCP/IP address should be or if you are
unfamiliar with using TCP/IP on a network, go to the HP Web site at www.hp.com. Click
Search in the upper-left corner of the Web page and search for TCP/IP Overview.
Automatic discovery
The product is equipped with an HP Jetdirect embedded print server. If a BootP or DHCP
server is available during product installation, the print server is automatically assigned an IP
address for use on the network. This occurs because the print server defaults to 192.0.0.192
(Legacy default) or to 159.254.x.x (Auto IP) if the print server cannot obtain an IP address
over the network from a BootP or DHCP server. The default that is assigned depends on the
particular network (small/private or enterprise) by using sensing algorithms.
To determine the new IP address, print a configuration page and check the TCP/IP status
and address.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
When the product is turned on, the HP Jetdirect print server broadcasts DHCP requests.
DHCP automatically downloads an IP address from a network server. DHCP servers
maintain a fixed set of IP addresses and only loan an IP address to the print server. Consult
your operating system documentation to set up DHCP service on your network.
Verifying the TCP/IP configuration
Print a configuration page at the control panel. Check the TCP/IP status and the TCP/IP
addresses. If the information is incorrect, check your hardware connections (cables, hubs,
routers, or switches) or recheck the validity of the TCP/IP address.
Changing an IP address
Use the following procedures if you need to change the product TCP/IP address.
To change an IP address by using HP Web Jetadmin
Open HP Web Jetadmin. Type the TCP/IP address in the Quick Device Search field and
click Go. At the top menu bar, follow this procedure for discovery options.
1. In the drop-down menu, click Devices.
2. In the drop-down menu, click New Devices. Click Go.
156
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
3. Click the column header of your choice (such as IP Address or Device Model) to arrange
the list of available devices in ascending or descending order.
4. Highlight the product to configure, and click Open Device.
5. From the sub-menu at the top of the HP Web Jetadmin screen, click Configuration.
6. Click the network link located on the left side of the configuration screen.
7. Type the new IP information. You might need to scroll down for more options.
8. Click Apply to save the settings.
9. Click the Refresh button located next to the question mark on the right side of the screen.
10. Verify the IP information by clicking Status Diagnostics or by printing a configuration
page.
To change an IP address by using the embedded Web server
The MFP has an embedded Web server that can be used to modify the TCP/IP parameters.
To use the embedded Web server, the HP Jetdirect print server must have an IP address
already configured. On a network, this is done automatically during initial product installation.
1. In a supported Web browser, type the current IP address of the HP Jetdirect print server
as the URL. The Device Status page of the embedded Web server appears.
2. Click Networking. From this page, you can modify the MFP network configuration.
ENWW
Configuring and verifying an IP address
157
Setting the real-time clock
Use the real-time clock feature to set the date and time settings. The date and time
information is attached to stored print, fax, and digital-send jobs, so you can identify the most
recent versions of stored print jobs. You can also set the MFP to automatically warm up and
prepare for use at a set time each day.
Setting the date and time
When setting the date and time you can set the date format, date, time format, and time.
To set the date format
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4. Touch DATE/TIME.
5. Touch DATE FORMAT.
6. Touch the desired format. The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the
DATE/TIME submenu.
7. Touch EXIT to exit the menu.
To set the date
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4. Touch DATE/TIME.
5. Touch DATE.
6. Touch the appropriate options to set the correct month, date of the month, and the year.
Note
The order of modifying the month, date of the month, and year depends upon the date
format setting.
7. The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the DATE/TIME submenu.
8. Touch EXIT to exit the menu.
158
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
To set the time format
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4. Touch DATE/TIME.
5. Touch TIME FORMAT.
6. Touch the appropriate format. The settings are saved and the control panel returns to
the DATE/TIME submenu.
7. Touch EXIT to exit the menu.
To set the time
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4. Touch DATE/TIME.
5. Touch TIME.
6. Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting.
Note
The order of modifying the hour, minute, and AM/PM setting depends upon the time format
setting.
7. The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the DATE/TIME submenu.
8. Touch EXIT to exit the menu.
Setting the wake time
Use the wake time feature to wake the MFP at a set time each day. If a wake time is set, use
an extended sleep delay period. See Setting the sleep delay.
ENWW
Setting the real-time clock
159
To set the wake time
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4. Touch WAKE TIME.
5. Touch the day of the week for which you want to set the wake time.
6. Touch CUSTOM.
7. Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting.
8. If you want to wake the MFP at the same time each day, on the APPLY TO ALL DAYS
screen, touch YES.
9. If you want to set the time for individual days, touch NO, and repeat the procedure for
each day.
10. The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the WAKE TIME submenu.
11. Touch EXIT to exit the menu.
Setting the sleep delay
Use the sleep-delay feature to set the period of time that the MFP must be idle before it
enters the sleep mode.
Note
If the sleep-delay feature is turned off in the RESETS menu, the MFP never enters the sleep
mode. Selecting a sleep delay value automatically turns the sleep feature on. The default
value for the sleep delay setting is 60 minutes.
To set the sleep delay
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4. Touch SLEEP DELAY.
5. Scroll to and touch the sleep-delay setting that you want.
6. The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the SYSTEM SETUP submenu.
7. Touch EXIT to exit the menu.
160
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Checking the MFP configuration
From the control panel, you can print pages that give details about the MFP and its current
configuration. The following information pages are described here:
●
Menu map
●
Configuration page
●
HP Jetdirect page
●
Supplies status page
●
Usage page
●
PCL or PS font list
Use the following procedure to print these information pages. Then, see the following
sections for more information about each page.
To print an information page
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch INFORMATION.
3. Scroll to the information page that you want, and touch the appropriate page. The page
automatically prints.
Menu map
To see the current settings for the menus and items that are available in the control panel,
print a control-panel-menu map.
Many of these values can be overridden from the driver or program. You might want to store
the menu map near the MFP for reference.
The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options that are currently installed in
the MFP. For a complete list of control panel items and possible values, see Using the
control panel.
Configuration page
Use the configuration page to view current MFP settings, to help troubleshoot MFP
problems, or to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), trays,
and printer languages.
Note
If an optional 3-bin mailbox or stapler/stacker is installed, a page also prints for that device.
Note
If an HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 is installed, a fax accessory page also prints.
See the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide for information about
understanding the fax accessory page.
ENWW
Checking the MFP configuration
161
The MFP configuration page contains the following information:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Note
162
Device Information lists the serial number, page counts, firmware datecodes, maintenance-kit
counts, and other information for the MFP.
Installed Personalities and Options lists all MFP languages that are installed (such as PCL and
PS), and lists options that are installed in each DIMM slot and EIO slot.
Memory lists the MFP memory information, PCL Driver Work Space (DWS), and I/O buffering and
Resource Saving information.
Event Log lists the number of entries in the log, the maximum number of entries viewable, and the
last three entries. The second page of the event log is the manufacturer page. This page contains
information that might assist HP Customer Care representatives in solving possible MFP problems.
Security lists the status of the control-panel lock, control-panel password, and disk drive.
Paper Trays and Options lists the size settings for all trays and lists paper-handling accessories
that are installed.
The content of the configuration page varies, depending on the options that are currently
installed in the MFP.
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
HP Jetdirect page
The second configuration page is the HP Jetdirect page, which contains the following
information:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
HP Jetdirect Configuration indicates the MFP status, model number, hardware firmware version,
port select, port configuration, auto negotiation, manufacturing identification, and manufactured
date.
Security Settings information
Network Statistics indicates the total packets received, unicast packets received, bad packets
received, framing errors received, total packets transmitted, unsendable packets, transmit
collisions, and transmit late collisions.
Status line.
TCP/IP information, including the IP address
IPX/SPX information
Novell/NetWare information
AppleTalk information
DLC/LLC information
Always make sure the status line indicates "I/O Card Ready".
Supplies status page
Use the supplies status page to obtain information about the print cartridge that is installed in
the MFP, the amount of toner that remains in the print cartridge, and the number of pages
and jobs that have been processed. The page also lets you know when you should schedule
the next preventive maintenance for each maintenance kit.
Note
ENWW
The MFP has two separate maintenance kits: one is for the print engine, and the other is for
the ADF. For more information, see Performing preventive maintenance.
Checking the MFP configuration
163
The supplies status page contains the following information:
hp LaserJet 4345 mfp series
supplies status page
1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Black Print Cartridge indicates the amount of toner that remains in the print cartridge, estimated
pages remaining for the amount of toner remaining in the cartridge, total number of pages and
jobs processed, and the print-cartridge installation date and serial number.
Maintenance Kit indicates the percentage of the maintenance kit that remains and the HP part
numbers.
Document Feeder Kit indicates the percentage of the document feeder kit that remains and the
HP part number.
Recycling Information provides information about how to recycle HP supplies.
Usage page
The usage page provides information about the page sizes and number of pages printed,
copied, and sent.
164
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
The usage page contains the following information:
hp LaserJet 4345 mfp series
usage page (S/N XXXXXXXXXX)
hp LaserJet 4345 mfp series
1
usage page (S/N XXXXXXXXXX)
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
Product Name and Device Name indicate the series of HP LaserJet MFP in use.
Usage Totals indicates types of pages that have been printed, copied, and scanned; the number
of single-sided pages that have been printed, copied and scanned; the number of duplexed pages
that have been printed, copied and scanned (if a duplexer is installed); and the total number of
pages that have been printed, copied and scanned.
Print Modes and Paper Path Usage shows the number of pages that have been printed with
each fuser mode and the number of pages that have been printed from each input tray and to
each output bin.
Coverage indicates the average amount of toner used on all pages that have been printed.
PCL or PS font list
Use the font lists to see which fonts are currently installed in the MFP. (The font lists also
show which fonts are resident on a hard disk or flash DIMM.)
The PS font list shows the PS fonts installed, and gives a sample of those fonts. The
following describes the information that can be found on the PCL font list:
●
Font gives the font names and samples.
●
Pitch/Point indicates the pitch and point size of the font.
●
Escape Sequence (a PCL 5e programming command) is used to select the designated
font. (See the legend at the bottom of the font list page.)
●
Font # is the number used to select fonts from the control panel (not the software
application). Do not confuse the font # with the font ID (see the following information).
The number indicates the DIMM slot where the font is stored.
●
ENWW
●
Soft: Downloaded fonts that stay resident in the MFP until other fonts are
downloaded to replace them or until the MFP is turned off.
●
Internal: Fonts that permanently reside in the MFP.
Font ID is the number you assign to soft fonts when you download them through software.
Checking the MFP configuration
165
Managing the print cartridge
This section provides information about HP print cartridges, their life expectancies, how to
store them, and how to identify genuine HP supplies. Information also appears about nonHP print cartridges.
HP print cartridges
When you use a genuine HP print cartridge, you can obtain several types of information,
such as the following:
●
Amount of toner remaining
●
Estimated number of pages remaining
●
Number of pages printed
Non-HP print cartridges
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or
remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or
control their quality. Service or repair required as a result of using a non-HP print cartridge
will not be covered under the printer warranty.
Using genuine HP supplies ensures the availability of all HP printing features.
Print-cartridge authentication
The MFP will let you know if a print cartridge is not a genuine HP print cartridge when you
insert it into the MFP. If you believe that you purchased a genuine HP supply, visit us at
http://www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit.
Print-cartridge storage
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.
Always store the print cartridge in the proper environment. The temperature should be
between -20°C and 40°C (-4°F to 104°F). The relative humidity should be between 10% and
90%.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes.
Print-cartridge life expectancy
The life of the print cartridge depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require and the
length of life for the components inside the cartridge. When printing text at approximately 5%
coverage (typical for a business letter), the HP print cartridge lasts an average of 18,000
pages. The page-yield specification that HP provides is a general guideline. Actual yield can
vary according to usage conditions.
At any time, you can verify life expectancy by checking the supply level, as described in
Checking the supply level.
166
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Checking the supply level
You can check the supply (toner) level by using the control panel, the embedded Web
server, HP Toolbox software, or HP Web Jetadmin.
To check the supply level by using the control panel
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch INFORMATION.
3. Touch SUPPLIES STATUS.
To check the supply level by using the embedded Web server
1. In your Web browser, type the IP address for the MFP. (See Opening the embedded
Web server.)
2. On the left side of the screen, click Supplies Status. This takes you to the supplies
status page, which provides supply-level information.
To check the supply level by using the HP Toolbox software
You can configure HP Toolbox to notify you when the print cartridge is low. You can choose
to receive alerts by e-mail or as a pop-up message or taskbar icon. To check the supplies
status by using the HP Toolbox software, click the Status tab, and then click Supplies Status.
To check the supply levels by using HP Web Jetadmin
In HP Web Jetadmin, select the MFP. The device status page shows supply-level
information.
Cartridge-low and cartridge-out conditions
The MFP alerts you if the print cartridge is low on toner or out of toner.
When the cartridge is low on toner or drum life
When the cartridge is low, the control panel shows the ORDER CARTRIDGE message. The
message first appears when about 15% of the life remains in the print cartridge. This
percentage is set with the intent of providing approximately 2 weeks of typical use before the
cartridge is depleted. You should have time to purchase a new cartridge before the old
cartridge is depleted.
The default is for the MFP to continue printing until the cartridge runs out, but you might
prefer to have the printer stop instead of continuing when the ORDER CARTRIDGE
message first appears—for example, if you want print quality to remain consistently high
during print jobs, or if you do not want the cartridge to run out during a long print job. To
configure the MFP to stop, in the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, under SYSTEM SETUP, set
CARTRIDGE LOW to STOP. Then, when REPLACE CARTRIDGE appears, the MFP will
stop printing. You can resume printing by pressing START for each print job.
ENWW
Managing the print cartridge
167
When the cartridge is out of toner or drum life
The REPLACE CARTRIDGE message appears in one of these situations:
168
●
When the print cartridge is out of toner. If CARTRIDGE OUT is set to CONTINUE (in
the SYSTEM SETUP submenu of the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu), the MFP continues
printing without interaction until the cartridge reaches the end of drum life. HP does not
guarantee print quality after the REPLACE CARTRIDGE message first appears.
Replace the print cartridge as soon as possible. (See Ordering parts, accessories, and
supplies.) The REPLACE CARTRIDGE message remains until you replace the print
cartridge. If CARTRIDGE OUT is set to STOP, the MFP stops printing until you replace
the print cartridge or resume printing by configuring the printer to continue: In the
CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, under SYSTEM SETUP, set CARTRIDGE OUT to
CONTINUE.
●
When the drum life of the print cartridge is out. You must replace the print cartridge
to continue printing. No override is possible, even if toner remains in the cartridge. (See
Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies.) This situation occurs to protect the MFP.
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Upgrading the firmware
The MFP has remote firmware update (RFU) capability. Use the information in this section to
upgrade the MFP firmware. The overall process involves the following steps:
1. Determine the current level of firmware that is installed on the MFP.
2. Go to the HP Web site and find out whether a firmware update is available. If an update
is available, download the latest firmware to your computer.
3. Transfer the new firmware from your computer to the MFP.
Determining the current level of firmware
To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration information on the MFP
control panel. To view the configuration information, follow these instructions.
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch INFORMATION.
3. Touch PRINT CONFIGURATION. The configuration page prints.
4. The firmware datecode is listed in the section called Device Information. The firmware
datecode has this format: YYYYMMDD XX.XXX.X. The first string of numbers is the
date, where YYYY represents the year, MM represents the month, and DD represents
the date. For example, a firmware datecode of that begins with 20040225 represents
February 25, 2004.
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site
To find the most recent firmware upgrade for the MFP, go to http://www.hp.com/go/
lj4345mfp_software. This page provides instructions for downloading the new firmware
version.
Transferring the new firmware to the MFP
Use one of the following methods to update the firmware.
Using FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection
Note
The MFP can receive an .RFU file update as long as it is in a "ready" state.
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it
takes for the MFP to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things,
including the speed of the host computer that is sending the update. If the remote firmware
update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded (while Receiving Upgrade
appears on the control-panel display), the firmware file must be sent again. If power is lost
during the flash DIMM update (while the Performing Upgrade message appears on the
control-panel display), the update is interrupted and the message Resend Upgrade appears
(in English only) on the control-panel display. In this case, you must send the upgrade by
using the parallel port. Finally, any jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are
completed before the update is processed.
Follow these instructions to perform the upgrade by using FTP.
ENWW
Upgrading the firmware
169
Note
The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory
(NVRAM). Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings might return to
default settings and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the
defaults.
To upgrade the firmware on a network connection by using FTP
1. Take note of the IP address on the HP Jetdirect page. The HP Jetdirect page is the
second page that prints when you print the configuration page.
Note
Before upgrading the firmware, make sure that the MFP is not in Sleep mode. Also make
sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display.
2. Open an MS-DOS command prompt on your computer.
3. Type: ftp <TCP/IP ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type ftp 192.168.0.90.
4. Press Enter on the keyboard.
5. When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
6. When prompted for the password, press Enter.
7. Type bin at the command prompt.
8. Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files
appears in the command window.
9. Type put <FILENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file that was
downloaded from the Web, including the path. For example, type put C:\LJ
\4345FW.RFU, and then press Enter.
Note
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation
marks. For example, type put "C:\MY DOCUMENTS\LJ\4345FW.RFU"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
226 Transfer complete
Then, a message that contains the transfer-speed information appears.
10. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the MFP. This can take
approximately five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the
MFP or computer.
Note
The MFP automatically turns off and then on again after processing the upgrade.
11. At the command prompt, type: bye to exit the ftp command.
12. At the command prompt, type: exit to return to the Windows interface.
170
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Using HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware
This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later on your
computer. See Using HP Web Jetadmin software. Complete the following steps to update a
single device through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU file from the HP Web
site.
1. Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2. Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel.
Navigate to the Device Lists folder.
3. Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the MFP in the list of
devices, and then click to select it.
If you need to upgrade the firmware for multiple HP LaserJet 4345mfps, select all of
them by pressing the Ctrl key as you click the name of each MFP.
4. Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window.
Select Update Printer Firmware from the action list.
5. If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images box, click Browse
in the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU
file that you downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is
listed, select it.
6. Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server.
After the upload is complete, the browser window refreshes.
7. Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.
8. Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the MFP.
The control panel shows messages that indicate the progress of the upgrade. At the end
of the upgrade process, the control panel shows the Ready message.
Using MS-DOS commands to upgrade the firmware
To update the firmware by using a network connection, follow these instructions.
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following: copy /B
<FILENAME> \\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name
of the .RFU file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer
from which the MFP is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the MFP share name. For
example: C:\>copy /b C:\9200fW.RFU \\YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER.
Note
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation
marks. For example, type: C:\>copy /b "C:\MY DOCUMENTS\3500FW.RFU" \
\YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER.
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The control panel shows a message that indicates the
progress of the firmware upgrade. At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel
shows the Ready message . The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer
screen.
Upgrading the HP Jetdirect firmware
The HP Jetdirect network interface in the MFP has firmware that can be upgraded
separately from the MFP firmware. This procedure requires that you install HP Web
Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later on your computer. See Using HP Web Jetadmin software.
Complete the following steps to update the HP Jetdirect firmware by using HP Web Jetadmin.
1. Open the HP Web Jetadmin program.
ENWW
Upgrading the firmware
171
2. Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel.
Navigate to the Device Lists folder.
3. Select the device that you want to update.
4. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Jetdirect Firmware Update.
5. Under Jetdirect firmware version the HP Jetdirect model number and current firmware
version are listed. Make a note of these.
6. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/wja_firmware.
7. Scroll down to the list of HP Jetdirect model numbers and find the model number you
wrote down.
8. Look at the current firmware version for the model, and see if it is later than the version
you wrote down. If it is, right-click on the firmware link, and follow the instructions on the
Web page to download the new firmware file. The file must be saved into the <drive>:
\PROGRAM FILES\HP WEB JETADMIN\DOC\PLUGINS\HPWJA\FIRMWARE
\JETDIRECT folder on the computer that is running the HP Web Jetadmin software.
9. In HP Web Jetadmin, return to the main device list and select the digital sender again.
10. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Jetdirect Firmware Update again.
11. On the HP Jetdirect firmware page, the new firmware version is listed under Jetdirect
Firmware Available on HP Web Jetadmin. Click the Update Firmware Now button to
update the Jetdirect firmware.
172
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Cleaning the MFP
To maintain print quality, clean the MFP thoroughly whenever print-quality problems occur
and every time you replace the print cartridge.
WARNING!
Avoid touching the fusing area when cleaning the MFP. It can be hot.
CAUTION
To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge, do not use ammonia-based cleaners on
or around the MFP except as directed.
Cleaning the outside of the MFP
●
Clean the outside of the MFP if it is visibly marked.
●
Use a soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water, or water and a mild detergent.
Cleaning the touchscreen
Clean the touchscreen whenever it is necessary to remove fingerprints or dust. Wipe the
touchscreen gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION
Use water only. Solvents or cleaners can damage the touchscreen. Do not pour or spray
water directly onto the touchscreen.
To clean the scanner glass
CAUTION
●
Clean the scanner glass only if dirt is visible, or if you are experiencing a decrease in
copy quality, such as streaking.
●
Clean the scanner glass by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth.
Use an ammonia-based surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not
clean the scanner glass.
Do not pour or spray liquids directly onto the scanner glass. Do not press hard on the glass
surface. (You could break the glass).
Cleaning the fuser
Use the MFP cleaning page to keep the fuser free of toner and paper particles that can
sometimes accumulate. Accumulation of toner and particles can cause specks to appear on
the front or back side of your print jobs.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to clean the fuser with water or any other liquid. Use only the internal
cleaning page to clean the fuser.
To ensure optimum print quality, HP recommends that you use the cleaning page every time
you replace the print cartridge or on an automatic interval that you can set up.
The cleaning procedure takes about 2.5 minutes to complete. A CLEANING message
appears on the control-panel display while the cleaning is taking place.
ENWW
Cleaning the MFP
173
Running the cleaning page manually
In order for the cleaning page to work properly, print the page on copier-grade paper (not
bond, heavy, or rough paper).
To run the cleaning page manually
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Touch PRINT QUALITY.
4. Touch PROCESS CLEANING PAGE.
Running the cleaning page automatically
Using the procedure below, you can set the MFP to print cleaning pages automatically at an
interval that you select. In order for the cleaning page to run without intervention, you must
keep the selected size and plain paper type available in the MFP. The MFP will not interrupt
a printing job in process.
To run the cleaning page automatically
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Touch PRINT QUALITY.
4. Scroll to and touch AUTO CLEANING.
5. Touch ON.
6. Touch CLEANING INTERVAL.
7. Touch the appropriate interval between 1,000 and 20,000 pages.
8. Touch AUTO CLEANING SIZE.
9. Touch the paper size that you want the MFP to use for cleaning pages (A4 or LETTER).
The MFP automatically prints a cleaning page at the interval and page size that you
selected. You can discard the output page created by the cleaning process.
Cleaning the ADF delivery system
Clean the ADF only if it is visibly marked or dirty, or if you are experiencing a decrease in
copy quality (such as streaking).
174
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
To clean the ADF delivery system
1. Open the scanner lid.
2. Locate the white, vinyl ADF backing.
3. Locate the white, vinyl calibration strips.
4. Clean the ADF backing and the calibration strips by wiping them with a clean, damp, lintfree cloth. Use an ammonia-based surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth
does not clean the ADF components.
5. Clean the scanner glass by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth.
Use an ammonia-based surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not
clean the scanner glass.
6. Close the scanner lid.
To clean the ADF rollers
You should clean the rollers in the ADF if you are experiencing misfeeds or if your originals
show marks as they exit the ADF.
ENWW
Cleaning the MFP
175
CAUTION
Clean the rollers only if you experience misfeeds or marks on the originals, and you notice
dust on the rollers. Cleaning the rollers frequently could introduce dust into the device.
1. Open the scanner lid.
2. Locate the rollers near white, vinyl calibration strips.
3. Wipe the rollers gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION
Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the device.
4. Close the scanner lid.
5. Pull the release lever to open the ADF cover.
6. Locate the rollers.
176
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
7. Wipe the rollers with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION
Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the device.
8. Locate the separation pad.
9. Wipe the pad with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
10. Close the ADF cover.
ENWW
Cleaning the MFP
177
Calibrating the scanner
Calibrate the scanner to compensate for offsets in the scanner imaging system (carriage
head) for ADF and flatbed scans. Because of mechanical tolerances, the scanner's carriage
head might not read the position of the image accurately. During the calibration procedure,
scanner offset values are calculated and stored. The offset values are then used when
producing scans so that the correct portion of the document is captured.
Scanner calibration should be carried out only if you notice offset problems with the scanned
images. The scanner is calibrated before it leaves the factory. It needs to be calibrated again
only rarely.
Before calibrating the scanner, print the calibration target.
To print the calibration target
1. Place letter- or A4-size paper in tray 1, and adjust the side guides.
2. Touch DIAGNOSTICS
3. Touch CALIBRATE SCANNER.
4. Print the first pass of the calibration target.
5. Place the first pass of the calibration target in tray 1 so that the arrows are facing into the
MFP.
6. Print the second pass. The final calibration target must look like the following figure.
CAUTION
If the calibration target does not look like the figure shown here, the calibration process will
fail and the quality of scans will be degraded. The black areas must extend completely to the
short edges of the page. If they do not, use a black marker to extend the black areas to the
edge of the page.
7. Place the calibration target face-up into the ADF, and adjust the side guides.
8. Touch Menu, touch DIAGNOSTICS, then touch CALIBRATE SCANNER.
9. After the calibration target has passed through the ADF once, reposition it in the ADF in
the opposite direction. After the second pass, the calibration is complete.
178
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Performing preventive maintenance
The MFP requires periodic maintenance to maintain optimum performance. A control-panel
message alerts you when it is time to purchase the preventive maintenance kits. Separate
maintenance procedures are required for the printer-portion of the MFP and for the ADF.
Printer preventive maintenance
You should replace certain parts when the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message
appears on the control-panel display.
The maintenance message appears every 200,000 pages. The message can be temporarily
cleared for approximately 10,000 pages by using the CLEAR MAINTENANCE MESSAGE
item on the RESETS submenu. (See Resets submenu.) To check the number of pages that
the MFP has printed since new maintenance-kit components were installed, print either a
configuration page or a supplies status page. (See Checking the MFP configuration or
Checking the MFP configuration for details.)
To order the printer maintenance kit, see Part numbers. The kit includes:
Note
●
Fuser
●
Rollers (transfer, pickup, and feed)
●
Installation instructions
The printer maintenance kit is a consumable item and is not covered under the original
printer warranty or under most extended warranties.
After a maintenance kit is installed, the maintenance-kit counter must be reset.
To reset the maintenance-kit counter
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Scroll to and touch RESETS.
4. Touch RESET SUPPLIES.
5. Touch NEW MAINTENANCE KIT. The maintenance-kit counter is automatically reset.
Note
Perform this procedure only after a maintenance kit has been installed. Do not use this
procedure to temporarily clear the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message.
The ADF maintenance kit
After feeding 90,000 pages through the ADF, a REPLACE DOCUMENT FEEDER KIT
message appears on the control-panel display. This message appears approximately one
month before the kit needs to be replaced. Order a new kit when this message appears. See
Part numbers for information about ordering a new ADF maintenance kit.
The ADF maintenance kit includes the following items:
ENWW
●
One pick-up roller assembly
●
One separation pad
Performing preventive maintenance
179
●
One mylar sheet kit
●
An instruction sheet
Follow the instructions that come with the kit to install it.
After replacing the kit, reset the ADF maintenance-kit count.
To reset the ADF maintenance-kit count
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Scroll to and touch RESETS.
4. Touch RESET SUPPLIES.
5. Touch NEW DOCUMENT FEEDER KIT. The ADF maintenance-kit counter is
automatically reset.
180
Chapter 9 Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
10
Solving problems
This chapter provides information about the following topics.
ENWW
●
Solving general problems
●
Determining MFP problems
●
Clearing jams
●
Understanding MFP messages
●
Resolving control-panel messages
●
Understanding accessory lights for the 3-bin mailbox and stapler/stacker
●
Understanding lights on the formatter
●
Correcting print-quality and copy-quality problems
●
Solving e-mail problems
●
Solving network connectivity problems
181
Solving general problems
If the MFP is not responding properly, complete the steps in the following checklist, in order.
If the printer does not pass a step, follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions. If a
step resolves the problem, you can stop without performing the other steps on the checklist.
Troubleshooting checklist
1. Make sure the MFP Ready light is on. If no lights are on, complete these steps:
a. Check the power-cable connections.
b. Check that the power switch is on.
c.
Check the power source by plugging the MFP directly into the wall or into a different
outlet.
d. If none of these measures restores power, contact HP Customer Care. (See HP
customer care or the support flyer that came in the printer box.)
2. Check the cabling.
a. Check the cable connection between the MFP and the computer or network port.
Make sure that the connection is secure.
b. Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable, if possible.
c.
Check the network connection. See Solving network connectivity problems.
3. Ensure that the print media that you are using meets specifications. See Print media
specifications.
4. Print a configuration page (see Configuration page. If the MFP is connected to a
network, an HP Jetdirect page also prints.
a. If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains print media.
b. If the page jams in the MFP, see Clearing jams.
5. If the configuration page prints, check the following items.
a. If the page prints correctly, then the printer hardware is working. The problem is with
the computer you are using, with the printer driver, or with the program.
b. If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the MFP hardware. Contact
HP Customer Care. (See HP customer care or the support flyer that came in the
printer box.)
6. At the computer, check to see if the print queue is stopped, paused, or set to print offline.
a. Windows: Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and
Faxes. Double-click HP LaserJet 4345mfp.
b. Mac OS 9: Double-click the HP LaserJet 4345mfp icon on the desktop.
c.
Mac OS X: Open Print Center (or Printer Setup Utility for Mac OS X v.10.3), and
double-click the line for the HP LaserJet 4345mfp.
7. Verify that you have installed the HP LaserJet 4345mfp Series printer driver. Check the
program to make sure that you are using an HP LaserJet 4345mfp Series printer driver.
8. Print a page from the HP Toolbox.
182
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
a. If it prints, then the problem is with the printer driver. For Windows, try using another
printer driver. Or, for Windows or Macintosh, uninstall the printer driver and reinstall
it. See Installing the printing system software.
b. If the page does not print, then the problem is with the computer or the program.
9. Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this
solution works, then the problem is with the program you are using. If this solution does
not work (the document does not print) complete these steps:
a. Try printing the job from another computer that has the MFP software installed.
b. If you connected the MFP to the network, connect the MFP directly to a computer
with a parallel cable. Redirect the MFP to the correct port, or reinstall the software,
selecting the new connection type that you are using.
10. If the problem is still not resolved, see Determining MFP problems.
ENWW
Solving general problems
183
Determining MFP problems
Situation/Message
Solution
The control-panel display is blank, and internal
fans are not running.
Make sure that the MFP power is on. Press all
the keys to see if one is stuck. Contact your HPauthorized service representative if these steps
do not work. See HP customer care.
The MFP is turned on, but the internal fans are
not running.
Make sure that the line voltage is correct for the
MFP power configuration. (See the label that is
inside the top cover on the MFP for voltage
requirements.) If you are using a power strip and
its voltage is not within specification, plug the
MFP directly into the power receptacle.
The MFP voltage is not correct.
Make surethat the line voltage is in the correct
range. (See the label that is inside the top cover
on the MFP for voltage requirements.)
Messages appear on the control-panel display.
See Understanding MFP messages.
Print media is jammed in the MFP.
Check for jams (see Clearing jams).
The control-panel display shows the wrong
language or unfamiliar characters.
Reconfigure the control-panel display language.
1.
Turn the MFP off and then on.
2.
When XXXMB appears on the control-panel
display, press and hold 6 until all three
LEDs flash once and then stay on. (This
might take up to 20 seconds.
3.
Release 6 and then press 6 again.
4.
Wait while the MFP completes its
initialization sequence. When it is finished,
the SELECT LANGUAGE menu appears on
the control-panel display. Scroll to and touch
the correct language.
An error occurs during a Digital Send job. Job
failed.
The MFP experienced an error during the digital
sending job. The administrator should check on
the status of the SMTP server. See Solving
e-mail problems.
The e-mail gateway could not accept the job
because the attachment is too large.
Reduce the size of the e-mail attachment by
setting the maximum attachment size. Set the
maximum attachement size on the Digital
Sending tab of the embedded Web server. See
Using the embedded Web server.
Try using a different file format or sending the
document a few pages at a time.
A network connection is required for digital
sending
184
Chapter 10 Solving problems
The MFP cannot find a network connection. The
administrator should check to see if the MFP is
connected to the network. See Solving network
connectivity problems.
ENWW
Clearing jams
If a jam message appears on the control-panel display, look for jammed paper or other print
media in the locations that are indicated in the following figure.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Top-cover and print-cartridge areas
Envelope-feeder area and tray 1 area (the envelope feeder is optional)
Tray 2 and optional 500-sheet feeder areas
Duplexing area (the duplexer is optional)
Output area
ADF
The following table lists the jam messages that might appear on the control-panel display.
For information about clearing the jam, see the section that is indicated. You might need to
look for media in locations other than those that are indicated in the jam message. If the
location of the jam is not obvious, look first in the top-cover area underneath the print
cartridge.
Control-panel messages for jams
ENWW
Jam message
Procedure for clearing the jam
JAM IN DOCUMENT FEEDER
See Clearing jams from the ADF.
ADF PAPER JAM
See Clearing jams from the ADF.
ADF PICK ERROR
See Clearing jams from the ADF.
13.JJ.NT JAM IN ENVELOPE FEEDER
See Clearing jams from the optional envelopefeeder area.
13.JJ.NT JAM IN OUTPUT BIN
See Clearing jams from the output areas.
13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY 1
See Clearing jams from the tray 1 area.
13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY 2 (or TRAY 3, 4 or 5)
See Clearing jams from the tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE DUPLEXER
See Clearing jams from the optional duplexer.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE LEFT OUTPUT AREA
See Clearing jams from the output areas.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE RIGHT ACCESS DOOR
See Clearing jams from the tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas.
Clearing jams
185
Control-panel messages for jams (continued)
Jam message
Procedure for clearing the jam
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TOP COVER AREA
See Clearing jams from the top-cover and printcartridge areas.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TRAY 2 AREA
See Clearing jams from the tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TRAY 2 RIGHT
ACCESS DOOR
See Clearing jams from the tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TOP COVER AREA
See Clearing jams from the top-cover and printcartridge areas.
13.JJ.NT PAPER JAM OPEN INPUT TRAYS
See Clearing jams from the tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas.
13.JJ.NT JAM IN STAPLER
See Clearing staple jams.
When clearing jams, be very careful not to tear jammed media. If a small piece of media is
left in the MFP, it could cause additional jams. If jams are a recurring problem, see Solving
repeated jams.
Loose toner might remain in the MFP after a jam and cause temporary print-quality
problems. These problems shoud clear up within a few pages.
Note
Clearing jams from the top-cover and print-cartridge areas
Clear jams that occur during the printing process by using this procedure.
To clear jams from the top-cover and print-cartridge areas
1. Open the top cover and remove the print cartridge.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the print cartridge with a sheet of paper while it is outside of the MFP.
2. Use the green handle to lift the paper-access plate.
186
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
3. Slowly pull the jammed media out of the MFP. Do not tear the media.
4. If jammed media is difficult to remove, open and remove the envelope-entrance cover. If
media is present, remove it.
5. Rotate the paper-release guide to check for additional jammed media underneath. If
jammed media is present, remove it.
6. Replace the envelope-entrance cover and close tray 1.
7. Reinstall the print cartridge and close the top cover.
8. If a jam message persists, jammed media is still in the MFP. Look for the jam in another
location.
ENWW
Clearing jams
187
Clearing jams from the optional envelope-feeder area
This section applies only to jams that occur when you are using an optional envelope feeder.
To clear jams from the optional envelope feeder
1. Remove any envelopes that are loaded in the envelope feeder. Lower the envelope
weight and lift the tray extension up, to the closed position.
2. Press and hold the release button on the left side of the optional envelope feeder. Grasp
both sides of the optional envelope feeder and carefully pull it out of the MFP.
3. Slowly remove any jammed envelopes from the optional envelope feeder and from the
MFP.
188
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
4. Insert the optional envelope feeder into the printer until it locks into place. Pull gently on
the optional envelope feeder to be sure that it is securely in place.
5. Fold down the envelope-feeder tray. Lift the envelope weight.
6. Reload the envelopes, making sure that you push the bottom envelopes in slightly
farther than the top envelopes.
7. If a jam message persists, jammed media is still in the MFP. Look for the jam in another
location.
Clearing jams from the tray 1 area
Use this procedure to clear jams that occur in the tray 1 input area.
To clear jams from the tray 1 area
1. Open the top cover, open tray 1, and remove the print cartridge.
2. Use the green handle to lift the paper-access plate.
ENWW
Clearing jams
189
3. Slowly pull any jammed media out of the MFP. Do not tear the media. If part of the sheet
has already been pulled into the MFP, follow the steps for Clearing jams from the topcover and print-cartridge areas.
4. If jammed media is difficult to remove, remove the envelope-entrance cover. If media is
present, remove it.
5. Rotate the paper-release guide to check for additional jammed media underneath. If
jammed media is present, remove it.
6. Replace the envelope-entrance cover and close tray 1.
7. Reinstall the print cartridge and close the top cover.
8. If a jam message persists, jammed media is still in the MFP. Look for the jam in another
location.
190
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
Clearing jams from the tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas
Use this procedure to clear jams that occur in tray 2 or in the optional 500-sheet feeders.
To clear jams from tray 2, 3, 4, or 5
1. Pull the jam-access lever to open the jam-access cover.
2. Carefully pull out any jammed media from either the top or the bottom of the jam-access
area.
Note
Use an upward or downward pulling motion to avoid tearing the media and to prevent toner
from falling into the MFP.
3. Close the jam-access cover.
4. Slide the tray completely out of the MFP, and remove any damaged media from the tray.
ENWW
Clearing jams
191
5. Slide the tray into the MFP.
6. If a jam message persists, jammed media is still in the MFP. Look for the jam in another
location.
Clearing jams from the optional duplexer
If a jam occurs during a duplex printing job, use this procedure to check for the jam and to
clear it.
To clear jams from the optional duplexer
1. Remove the output bin (or remove the stapler/stacker or the mailbox).
2. Remove the optional duplexer, and set it aside.
3. Check for jammed paper inside the MFP. Carefully pull out the jammed paper.
192
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
4. Check for jammed paper in the optional duplexer. Carefully pull out the jammed paper.
5. Reinstall the duplexer.
6. Reinstall the output bin (or reinstall the 3-bin mailbox or the stapler/stacker).
7. If a jam message persists, jammed media is still in the MFP. Look for the jam in another
location.
Clearing jams from the output areas
Use this procedure to clear jams that occur in the output bin, the 3-bin mailbox, or the stapler/
stacker.
To clear jams from the output areas
1. If you are using the standard output bin, grasp the handle at the bottom of the output-bin
assembly, and pull it out and then up to remove it.
ENWW
Clearing jams
193
2. If you are using a 3-bin mailbox or a stapler/stacker, remove any media that is stacked,
and then press and hold the release button on the top of the device. Pull the device
away from the MFP.
3. If the jammed media is inside the MFP, carefully pull the jammed media out of the MFP.
4. If the jammed media is inside the 3-bin mailbox or the stapler/stacker, carefully pull the
jammed media up and out of the device.
5. If you are using a 3-bin mailbox, the jammed media might be completely inside the
device. Open the jam-access cover that is on the top of the 3-bin mailbox, and carefully
pull the jammed media out of the mailbox.
6. Reinstall the output-bin assembly, the 3-bin mailbox, or the stapler/stacker. Insert the
device at an angle, and then slide it into the MFP.
194
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
7. If a jam message persists, jammed media is still in the MFP. Look for the jam in another
location.
Clearing jams from the fuser
Use this procedure to clear jams that occur in the fuser.
To clear jams from the fuser
1. Turn the MFP off and wait 30 minutes for the fuser to cool.
WARNING!
The fuser is very hot. To avoid minor burns, wait 30 minutes for the fuser to cool before
removing it from the MFP.
2. If you are using the standard output bin, grasp the handle at the bottom of the output-bin
assembly, and pull it out and then up to remove it.
3. If you are using a 3-bin mailbox or a stapler/stacker, remove any media that is stacked,
and then press and hold the release button on the top of the device. Pull the device
away from the MFP.
4. Remove the optional duplexer or the duplex cover.
5. If you cannot see the jammed media inside the fuser, skip to step 9.
ENWW
Clearing jams
195
6. If you can see either the leading edge or the trailing edge of the jammed media inside
the fuser, carefully pull it out.
7. If you can see the jammed media, but neither the leading edge nor the trailing edge is
visible, gently pull on the sides of the sheet of media until one edge becomes free. Then
carefully pull the jammed media out of the fuser.
8. If the media tears as you are removing it, turn the green dial on the fuser, and then
carefully pull out the jammed media. Go to step 13.
9. If you cannot see the jammed media inside the fuser, you must remove the fuser.
WARNING!
The fuser is very hot. To avoid minor burns, wait 30 minutes for the fuser to cool before
removing it from the MFP.
a. To remove the fuser-entrance guide, push inward at the left edge to free the left-side
alignment pin. Then lift up slightly on the fuser-entrance guide, and remove it from
the MFP.
196
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
b. Place your forefingers on the blue levers on the bottom of each side of the fuser.
Place your thumbs on the grip points on the top of each side of the fuser. Squeeze
the blue levers up, and remove the fuser from the MFP.
10. Open the black cover at the top of the fuser, and remove the jammed media.
11. Reinstall the fuser. Push on the fuser with your thumbs to be sure it snaps securely into
place.
12. To reinstall the fuser-entrance guide, first insert the right-side mounting pin into the hole
on the right side, and then lower the left-side mounting pin into the hole on the left side.
13. Reinstall the duplexer or the duplex cover.
ENWW
Clearing jams
197
14. Reinstall the output-bin assembly, the 3-bin mailbox, or the stapler/stacker. Insert the
device at an angle, and then slide it into the MFP.
15. If a jam message persists, jammed media is still in the MFP. Look for the jam in another
location.
Clearing jams from the ADF
Use this procedure to clear jams from the ADF.
1. Lift the ADF-input tray, and check for jammed media underneath the tray. Carefully
remove any jammed media.
2. Pull up on the ADF-cover-release lever, and open the ADF cover. Carefully remove any
jammed media.
3. Lift up on the ADF-document guide, and check for jammed media. Carefully remove any
jammed media.
198
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
4. Close the ADF cover.
5. If a jam message persists, jammed media is still in the MFP. Look for the jam in another
location.
Clearing staple jams
Occasionally, staples become jammed in the optional stapler/stacker. If jobs are not being
stapled correctly or are not being stapled at all, use this procedure to clear staple jams.
To clear staple jams
1. Turn off the MFP.
2. Press and hold the release button on the top of the stapler/stacker. Pull the stapler/
stacker away from the MFP.
3. Open the staple-cartridge cover.
4. To remove the staple cartridge, pull up on the green handle and pull out the staple
cartridge.
ENWW
Clearing jams
199
5. Lift up on the small lever at the back of the staple cartridge.
6. Remove the staples that protrude from the staple cartridge.
7. Close the lever at the back of the staple cartridge. Be sure that it snaps into place.
8. Reinsert the staple cartridge into the staple-cartridge holder, and push down on the
green handle until it snaps into place.
9. Close the staple-cartridge cover, and slide the stapler/stacker into the MFP.
200
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
Solving repeated jams
Situation
Solution
General repeated jam problems
1.
Make sure that the media is loaded correctly in the trays and
that all width guides are set correctly (see Loading input trays).
2.
Make sure that the tray is set for the size of media that is
installed and that the tray is not overloaded.
3.
Try turning over the stack of media in the tray. If you are
using prepunched or letterhead paper, try printing from tray 1.
4.
Do not use media that has been printed on previously or torn,
worn, or irregular media. See Print media specifications.
5.
Check the media specifications. (See Print media
specifications.) If media is outside of the recommended
specifications, problems can occur.
6.
The MFP might be dirty. Clean the MFP as described in
Cleaning the fuser.
7.
Check that all damaged or jammed media is removed from
MFP.
1.
The ADF might be dirty. Clean the ADF as described in
Cleaning the ADF delivery system.
2.
Make sure that the media is loaded squarely and that the
media-width guides are adjusted to the sides of the media
stack.
3.
Make sure that no more than 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)
bond paper are loaded in the ADF.
4.
If the original document that is being copied has been folded
or stapled, flatten it as much as you can and smooth any
wrinkles. Make sure the pages are not stuck together where
the staple was.
5.
Media that has been pre-punched or perforated in any way
might be difficult to feed through the ADF. If the leading edge
of the document is excessively worn or frayed, try rotating the
document 180 degrees before copying.
6.
Make sure that the media is being stored correctly. If the
media is too dry, the sheets might stick together. See Print
media specifications.
Repeated jams in the ADF
Note
If jams continue, contact your HP-authorized service provider. (See the HP support flyer or
go to http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
Using the paper-path test
The paper path test can be used to verify that various paper paths are working correctly or to
troubleshoot problems with tray configuration.
To start the paper-path test
1. Touch Menu.
2. Scroll to and touch DIAGNOSTICS.
ENWW
Clearing jams
201
3. Scroll to and touch PAPER PATH TEST.
4. Select the input tray that you want to test, the output bin, the duplex printing accessory
(if available), and number of copies, touching OK after you set the value for each. After
selecting the last option, touch PRINT TEST PAGE.
202
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
Understanding MFP messages
Messages appear on the control-panel display to relay the normal status of the MFP (such
as Processing Job), or an error condition (such as CLOSE TOP COVER) that needs
attention. Resolving control-panel messages lists messages that require attention, or that
might raise questions. Messages are listed in alphabetical order, with numeric messages at
the beginning of the list. Not all messages are listed because some (such as Ready) are selfexplanatory.
Note
Some messages are affected by the AUTO CONTINUE and CLEARABLE WARNINGS
settings in the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, SYSTEM SETUP submenu, on the control
panel. See System setup submenu for more information.
Using the MFP help system
This MFP features a help system on the control panel that provides instructions for resolving
most MFP errors. Certain control-panel messages alternate with instructions about using the
help system.
Whenever a ? appears in an error message or a message alternates with FOR HELP
TOUCH ?, touch the
(Help) button to view the help.
To exit the help system, touch the
(Help) button.
If a message persists
ENWW
●
Some messages (for example, requests to load a tray or a message that a previous print
job remains in the MFP memory) allow you to touch CONTINUE to print, or to press
STOP to clear the job and eliminate the message.
●
If a message persists after performing all of the recommended actions, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider. (See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
Understanding MFP messages
203
Resolving control-panel messages
Control-panel messages
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
10.XX.YY SUPPLY MEMORY
ERROR
The MFP cannot read or write to at least
one print cartridge e-label or an e-label
is missing from a print cartridge.
Reinstall the print cartridge, or install a
new HP print cartridge.
11.XX Internal clock error To
continue touch OK
The MFP real time clock has
experienced an error.
Whenever the MFP is turned off and
then turned on again, set the time and
date at the control panel. See Setting the
real-time clock.
If the error persists, you might need to
replace the formatter.
13.JJ.NT JAM IN ENVELOPE
FEEDER
Media is jammed in the envelope feeder.
Remove the jammed media from the
envelope feeder. Follow the instructions
in the onscreen dialog box. See Clearing
jams from the optional envelope-feeder
area. Also see Print media specifications.
13.JJ.NT JAM IN OUTPUT BIN
Media is jammed in the output bin.
Remove the output bin and gently
remove the jammed media. Reattach
output bin. Follow the instructions in the
onscreen dialog box.
13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY 1
Media is jammed in tray 1.
Remove the jammed media from tray 1.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box. See Clearing jams from the
tray 1 area.
13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY X
Media is jammed in the specified tray.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box. See Clearing jams from the
tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE DUPLEXER
Remove duplexer from lower left
area
Media is jammed in the duplexer.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box. See Clearing jams from the
optional duplexer.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE LEFT
OUTPUT AREA Remove output
bin and duplexer
Media is jammed in the output area.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box. See Clearing jams from the
output areas.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE RIGHT
ACCESS DOOR Open all right
access doors ABOVE tray X
Media is jammed inside the jam-access
door for the tray that is indicated.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box. See Clearing jams from the
tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TOP
COVER AREA
Media is jammed in the top cover area.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box. See Clearing jams from the
top-cover and print-cartridge areas.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TOP
COVER AREA Remove print
cartridge
Media is jammed in the top cover area
and you must remove the print cartridge
to clear the jam.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box. See Clearing jams from the
top-cover and print-cartridge areas.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TRAY 2
AREA
Media is jammed in tray 2.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box. See Clearing jams from the
tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas.
204
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TRAY 2
RIGHT ACCESS DOOR
Media is jammed inside tray 2 in the jamaccess door.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box. See Clearing jams from the
tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas.
13.JJ.NT JAMS INSIDE TOP
COVER AREA Remove print
cartridge
Media is jammed in more than one
location inside the top cover area. You
must remove the print cartridge to clear
the jams.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box. See Clearing jams from the
top-cover and print-cartridge areas.
13.JJ.NT PAPER JAM OPEN
INPUT TRAYS
Media is jammed inside one or more of
the trays.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box. See Clearing jams from the
tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas.
20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY To
continue touch OK
The MFP received more data than can fit
in the available memory. You might have
tried to transfer too many macros, soft
fonts, or complex graphics.
Touch OK to print the transferred data
(some data might be lost), and then
simplify the print job or install additional
memory. See Installing memory.
21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX To
continue touch OK
The page formatting process was not
fast enough for the MFP.
Touch OK to print the transferred data.
(Some data might be lost.) If this
message appears often, simplify the
print job.
22 EIO X BUFFER OVERFLOW To
continue touch OK
Too much data was sent to the EIO card
Touch OK to print the transferred data.
in the specified slot (x). An incorrect
(Some data might be lost.)
communications protocol might be in use.
Check the host configuration. If this
message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
22 EMBEDDED I/O BUFFER
Too much data was sent to the
OVERFLOW To continue touch OK embedded HP Jetdirect print server.
Touch OK to print the transferred data.
(Some data might be lost.)
22 PARALLEL I/O BUFFER
Too much data was sent to the parallel
OVERFLOW To continue touch OK port.
Touch OK to clear the error message.
(Data will be lost.)
Check for a loose cable connection, and
be sure to use a high-quality cable.
Some non-HP parallel cables might be
missing pin connections or might
otherwise not conform to the IEEE-1284
specification. See Part numbers, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.
22 SERIAL I/O BUFFER
Too much data was sent to the serial
OVERFLOW To continue touch OK buffer.
Touch OK to clear the error message.
(Data will be lost.)
30.1.YY SCANNER FAILURE
Turn the MFP off and then on.
An error has occurred in the scanner.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
40 BAD EIO X TRANSMISSION To
continue touch OK
ENWW
The connection between the MFP and
the EIO card in the specified slot has
been broken.
Touch OK to clear the error message
and continue printing.
Resolving control-panel messages
205
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
40 BAD SERIAL TRANSMISSION
To continue touch OK
A serial data error (parity, framing, or
line overrun) occurred as data was being
sent by the computer.
Touch OK to clear the error message.
(Data will be lost.)
40 EMBEDDED I/O BAD
TRANSMISSION To continue
touch OK
A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
41.3 MEDIA TOO SHORT
CANNOT DUPLEX
The MFP cannot print on both sides of
the selected media because the media
does not meet the minimum length
specification.
Select single-sided printing or load a
longer-size media. Resend the job. See
Supported types and sizes of print media.
41.3 MEDIA TOO SHORT
CANNOT SEND TO FACE DOWN
OUTPUT BIN
The MFP cannot deliver the selected
media face-down because the media
does not meet the minimum length
specification.
Select the face-up output option, or load
a longer-size media in the tray. Resend
the job. See Supported types and sizes
of print media.
41.3 UNEXPECTED SIZE IN TRAY
XX LOAD TRAY XX <TYPE>
<SIZE>
This is typically caused if two or more
sheets of media stick together in the
MFP or if the tray is not adjusted
correctly.
Reload the tray with the correct media
size. Reconfigure the size in a tray so
that the MFP will use a tray that contains
the size required for the print job. Follow
the instructions in the onscreen dialog
box.
41.3 UNEXPECTED SIZE IN TRAY
XX To use another tray touch OK
The specified tray is loaded with media
that is longer or shorter in the feed
direction than the size configured for the
tray.
Touch OK to display TRAY <N> SIZE.
Reconfigure the size in a tray so that the
MFP will use a tray that is loaded with
the size of media required for the print
job. If the message does not clear
automatically from the control-panel
display, turn the MFP off, and then turn
the MFP on.
41.5 UNEXPECTED TYPE IN
TRAY XX LOAD TRAY XX
<TYPE> <SIZE>
The specified tray is loaded with a media
type that is not the type configured for
the tray.
Load the tray with the media type
indicated, or touch OK to use another
tray.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
41.X ERROR To continue touch OK A temporary printing error occurred.
Touch OK to clear the error. If the error
is not cleared, turn the MFP off, and then
turn the MFP on.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
49.XXXXX ERROR To continue
turn off then on
A critical firmware error has occurred.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
206
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
50.X FUSER ERROR
A fuser error has occurred.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
51.XY ERROR To continue turn
off then on
A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
52.XY ERROR To continue turn
off then on
A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
53.XY.ZZ CHECK RAM DIMM
SLOT <X> To continue touch OK
A problem exists with the MFP memory.
You might need to reseat or replace the
The DIMM that caused the error will not
specified DIMM.
be used. The following are the values of X:
Turn the MFP off, and then replace the
DIMM that caused the error. See
X = Device location
Installing memory.
0 = Onboard memory
If this message persists, contact an HP1 = Slot 1
authorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
2 = Slot 2
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
55.XX.YY DC CONTROLLER
ERROR To continue turn off then
on
The print engine is not communicating
with the formatter.
56.X ERROR To continue turn off
then on
A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
57.XX ERROR To continue turn
off then on
A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
ENWW
Resolving control-panel messages
207
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
58.XX ERROR To continue turn
off then on
A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
59.XY ERROR To continue turn
off then on
A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
60.X ERROR To continue turn off
then on
The tray specified by X is not lifting
correctly.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box.
62 NO SYSTEM To continue turn
off then on
A problem exists with the MFP firmware.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
64 ERROR To continue turn off
then on
A scan buffer error occurred.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
66.XY.ZZ OUTPUT DEVICE
FAILURE
68.X PERMANENT STORAGE
FULL To continue touch OK
208
An error occurred in an external paperhandling accessory.
The MFP NVRAM is full. Some settings
saved in the NVRAM might have been
reset to the factory defaults. Printing can
continue, but some unexpected
functions might occur if an error
occurred in permanent storage.
Chapter 10 Solving problems
1.
Turn the MFP power off.
2.
Check that the accessory is properly
seated on and connected to the
MFP, without any gaps between the
MFP and the accessory. If the
accessory uses cables, disconnect
and reconnect them.
3.
Turn the MFP power on.
4.
If this message persists, contact an
HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP support flyer,
or go to http://www.hp.com/support/
lj4345mfp.)
Touch OK to clear the message. If the
message is not cleared, turn the MFP
off, and then turn the MFP on.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
ENWW
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
68.X PERMANENT STORAGE
The MFP NVRAM is failing to write.
WRITE FAIL To continue touch OK Printing can continue, but some
unexpected functions might occur if an
error occurred in permanent storage.
Touch OK to clear the message. If the
message is not cleared, turn the MFP
off, and then turn the MFP on.
68.X STORAGE ERROR
SETTINGS CHANGED To
continue touch OK
One or more MFP settings are invalid
and have been reset to the factorydefault settings. Printing can continue,
but some unexpected functions might
occur if an error occurred in permanent
storage.
Touch OK to clear the message. If the
message is not cleared, turn the MFP
off, and then turn the MFP on.
A temporary printing error occurred.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
69.X ERROR To continue turn off
then on
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
79 ERROR To continue turn off
then on
A critical hardware error occurred.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
8X.YYYY EIO ERROR
8X.YYYY INTERNAL JETDIRECT
ERROR
The EIO accessory card has
encountered a critical error, as specified
by YYYY.
Try the following actions to clear the
message.
1.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the
MFP on.
2.
Turn the MFP off, reseat the EIO
accessory, and then turn the MFP on.
3.
Replace the EIO accessory.
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server
has encountered a critical error, as
specified by YYYY.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
Access denied MENUS LOCKED
The control panel function that you are
trying to use has been locked to prevent
unauthorized access.
Contact the network administrator.
ACTION NOT CURRENTLY
AVAILABLE FOR TRAY X TRAY
SIZE CANNOT BE ANY SIZE/ANY
CUSTOM
A duplexed (2-sided) document was
requested from a tray that is set to ANY
SIZE or ANY CUSTOM. Duplexing is not
allowed from a tray configured to ANY
SIZE or ANY CUSTOM.
Select another tray or reconfigure the
tray.
ENWW
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
(See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
Resolving control-panel messages
209
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
ADF Cover Open
The ADF cover is open.
Close the ADF cover. Follow the
instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
ADF OUTPUT BIN FULL
The ADF output bin holds 50 sheets of
Remove the paper from the ADF output
paper. The MFP stops when the bin is full. bin.
ADF Paper Jam
Media is jammed in the ADF.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box. See Clearing jams from the
ADF. Also see Solving repeated jams.
ADF PICK ERROR
The ADF experienced an error while
picking media.
Make sure that your original contains no
more than 30 pages. Follow the
instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
ADF SKEW ERROR
Media has become skewed in the ADF.
Make sure that the paper guides are
aligned on the sides of the originals, and
that all of the originals are the same
size. Remove the remaining media from
the ADF and close the ADF cover.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box.
Authentication information is
incorrect. Please re-enter
information.
A user name or password is incorrect.
Type the information again.
AUTHENTICATION REQUIRED
Authentication has been enabled for this
feature or destination. A username and
password are required.
Type the user name and password, or
contact the network administrator.
AUTHENTICATION REQUIRED
TO USE THIS FEATURE
A user name and password are required.
Type the user name and password, or
contact the network administrator.
BAD DUPLEXER CONNECTION
The duplex printing accessory is not
connected correctly to the MFP.
Remove and reinstall the duplexer. If this
message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.
BAD ENV FEEDER CONNECTION
The envelope feeder is not connected
properly.
Remove and reinstall the envelope
feeder. If this message persists, contact
an HP-authorized service or support
provider. See the HP support flyer, or go
to http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.
CARTRIDGE FAILURE RETURN
FOR REPLACEMENT
The print cartridge still contains part of
the sealing tape.
Try to remove the remaining sealing
tape. If it cannot be removed, insert a
new print cartridge and return the faulty
print cartridge to receive a replacement.
(See Part numbers, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.)
CARTRIDGE OUT REPLACE
CARTRIDGE
The print cartridge is out of toner.
Printing cannot continue because
damage to the MFP might result.
Replace the print cartridge. (See
Managing the print cartridge.)
CHECK CABLES CHECK
SCANNER LOCK To continue
turn off then on
The scanner might be locked or the
interface cable might be seated
incorrectly.
Make sure that the scanner is unlocked
and the interface cable is seated
correctly.
210
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
CHECK CABLES Then turn off
then on
The cable that connects the scanner to
the MFP is experiencing an error.
Make sure that the cable between the
scanner and the MFP is connected. Turn
the MFP off then on. If the error persists,
replace the cable. If the error still
persists, contact an HP-authorized
service or support provider. See the HP
support flyer, or go to http://www.hp.com/
support/lj4345mfp.
CHECK COPY CONNECT CARD
An error has occurred with the Copy
Connect card.
Make sure that the Copy Connect board
on the formatter is firmly in place. Check
for LED light activity on the Copy
Connect board. If the problem persists,
replace the Copy Connect board.
CHECK OUTPUT DEVICE
An error has occurred with the output
device.
Remove and reinstall the output device.
Observe the LED on the device. If is
flashing or is amber, see Understanding
accessory lights for the 3-bin mailbox
and stapler/stacker.
Check the glass and remove any
paper, then press START
A digital send or copy job has been
performed from the scanner glass, but
the original document needs to be
removed.
Remove the original document from the
scanner glass and press START.
CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT
A print job requested a MFP language
AVAILABLE To continue touch OK (personality) that is not available for this
MFP. The job will not print and will be
cleared from memory.
Print the job by using a printer driver for
a different printer language, or add the
requested language to the MFP (if
possible). To see a list of available
personalities, print a configuration page.
(See Checking the MFP configuration.)
CLOSE RIGHT ACCESS DOOR
<X>
The specified jam-access cover is open.
Close the specified jam-access cover.
CLOSE RIGHT ACCESS DOORS
More than one jam-access cover is open.
Close all jam-access covers to continue
printing.
CLOSE TOP COVER
The top cover is open.
Close the top cover.
Digital Send Communication Error
An error has occurred during a digital
send task.
Contact the network administrator.
Digital Send server is not
responding Contact administrator
The MFP cannot communicate with the
server.
Verify the network connection. Contact
the network administrator.
DUPLEXER ERROR REMOVE
DUPLEXER Install duplexer with
power off
The duplexer has been removed.
Reinstall the duplexer. (Any print jobs at
the MFP might be lost.)
E-mail Gateway did not accept
the job because the attachment
was too large.
The scanned documents have exceeded
the size limit of the server.
Send the job again using a lower
resolution, smaller file size setting, or
fewer pages. See Using the
embedded Web server to learn how to
reduce the size of the attachment.
Contact the network administrator to
enable sending the scanned documents
by using multiple e-mails.
ENWW
Resolving control-panel messages
211
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
E-mail Gateway did not respond.
Job failed.
A gateway has exceeded the time out
value.
Validate the SMTP IP address. See
Solving e-mail problems.
E-mail Gateway rejected the job
because of the addressing
information. Job failed.
One or more of the e-mail addresses is
incorrect.
Send the job again with the correct
addresses.
Error executing Digital Send job.
Job failed.
A digital send job has failed and cannot
be delivered.
Try to send the job again.
Folder list is full. To add a folder,
you must first delete a folder.
The MFP limits the number of folders
that can be established.
Delete an unused folder to add a new
folder.
Front Side Optical System Error
The scanner has experienced an error.
To temporarily clear the message so you
can send a fax or send to e-mail, touch
IGNORE. If this message persists,
contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. See the HP support
flyer or go to http://www.hp.com/support/
lj4345mfp.
HP Digital Sending: Delivery Error
A digital send job has failed and cannot
be delivered.
Try to send the job again.
INSERT OR CLOSE TRAY XX
The specified tray is missing or open.
Insert or close the specified tray to
continue.
INSTALL CARTRIDGE
The print cartridge has been removed or
has been installed incorrectly.
Replace or reinstall the print cartridge
correctly to continue printing.
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY TO
LOAD FONTS/DATA <DEVICE>
To continue touch OK
The MFP does not have enough
memory to load the data (for example,
fonts or macros) from the location
specified.
Touch OK to continue without this
information. If the message persists, add
more memory.
JAM IN DOCUMENT FEEDER
Media is jammed in the ADF.
Remove jammed media from the ADF.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box. See Clearing jams from the
ADF. Also see Solving repeated jams.
If the message persists after all jams
have been cleared, a sensor might be
stuck or broken. Contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.
LDAP Server is not responding
Contact administrator
The LDAP server has exceeded the time
out value for an address request.
Verify the LDAP server address. See
Solving e-mail problems. Contact the
network administrator.
LOAD ENVELOPE FEEDER
<TYPE> <SIZE>
The envelope feeder is empty.
Load the envelope feeder.
LOAD TRAY 1 <TYPE> <SIZE>
The tray is empty or configured for a
different size than the size requested.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box.
MANUALLY FEED <TYPE> <SIZE>
The specified job requires manual feed
from tray 1.
Load the requested media into tray 1.
212
Chapter 10 Solving problems
To override the message, touch OK to
use a type and size of media that is
available in another tray.
ENWW
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
Mechanical Error
The ADF has experienced a mechanical
error.
Turn the MFP off then on. To temporarily
clear this message, touch IGNORE. If
the message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
See the HP support flyer or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.
Network connection required For
Digital Sending. Contact
administrator.
A digital-sending feature has been
configured, but a network connection is
not detected.
Verify the network connection. See
Solving network connectivity problems.
Contact the network administrator.
NON HP SUPPLY INSTALLED
Economode disabled
A non-HP supply or a refilled HP supply
has been installed.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box.
Novell Login Required
Novell authentication has been enabled
for this destination.
Enter Novell network credentials to
access the copy and fax features.
ORDER CARTRIDGE
The number of pages remaining for the
print cartridge has reached the low
threshold. The MFP was set to stop
printing when a supply needs to be
ordered.
Touch OK to continue printing until the
print cartridge is out of toner.
OUTPUT BIN <X> FULL
The specified output bin is full and
printing cannot continue.
Empty the bin to continue printing.
OUTPUT PAPER PATH OPEN
The paper path between the MFP and
the output device is open and must be
closed before printing can continue.
1.
If you have a 3-bin mailbox
installed, make sure the jam-access
door is closed.
2.
If you have a stapler/stacker
installed, make sure the staple
cartridge is snapped into position
and that the staple-cartridge door is
closed.
To order a new print cartridge, see
Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies.
PAPER WRAPPED AROUND
FUSER
A jam has occurred because paper has
wrapped around the fuser.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box. See Clearing jams from the
fuser.
Password or name is incorrect.
Please enter correct login.
The user name or password was typed
incorrectly.
Retype the user name and password.
Phone Book is full. To add a
phone number, you must first
delete a phone number.
The MFP limits the number of phone
numbers that you can add.
Delete an unused phone number to add
a new one.
PIN is incorrect. Please enter a 4digit number.
The PIN format is incorrect.
Type the 4-digit PIN.
PIN is incorrect. Please re-enter
PIN.
The PIN was typed incorrectly.
Retype the PIN.
Please turn device off and install
hard disk.
The requested job requires a hard disk,
but the MFP does not have a hard disk
installed.
Turn the MFP off and install a hard disk.
See Installing EIO cards.
ENWW
Resolving control-panel messages
213
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
Reattach output bin
The standard output bin was detached
when the MFP was turned on, or the
cable on the stapler/stacker or the 3-bin
mailbox is not connected to the MFP.
Turn the MFP off. If you are using the
stapler/stacker or the 3-bin mailbox,
make sure that the cable is connected to
the MFP. Reattach the output bin, and
then turn the MFP on. Observe the LED
on the output device. If it is flashing or
amber, see Understanding accessory
lights for the 3-bin mailbox and stapler/
stacker.
REINSERT DUPLEXER
The duplexer has been removed and
must be reinstalled.
Reinsert the duplexer in the MFP.
REINSTALL OUTPUT DEVICE
The output device has been removed or
is not attached.
Make sure the output bin, 3-bin mailbox,
or stapler/stacker is correctly installed on
the MFP.
REPLACE CARTRIDGE
The print cartridge has reached the end
of its life. Printing cannot continue.
Replace the print cartridge. To order a
new print cartridge, see Ordering parts,
accessories, and supplies.
REPLACE STAPLE CARTRIDGE
The stapler is out of staples.
Replace the staple cartridge. For
information about replacing the staple
cartridge see Loading staples. For
information about ordering a new staple
cartridge, see Part numbers.
SANITIZING DISK <X>%
COMPLETE Do not power off
The hard disk or flash memory card is
being cleaned.
Contact the network administrator.
SCAN CARRIAGE LOCKED
Check lock switch, cycle power
The flatbed scanner carriage is locked
for shipping.
Turn off the MFP, unlock the scanner
carriage, and turn on the MFP.
SCAN FAILURE Press 'Start' to
rescan
The scan was unsuccessful and the
document needs to be rescanned.
If necessary, reposition the document to
rescan it, and then press START.
SMTP GATEWAY
The SMTP gateway has exceeded a
time out value.
Verify the e-mail server address. See
Solving e-mail problems. Contact the
network administrator.
STAPLER LOW ON STAPLES
Fewer than 20 staples remain in the
staple cartridge. Printing continues until
the cartridge runs out of staples and the
REPLACE STAPLE CARTRIDGE
message appears on the control-panel
display.
Replace the staple cartridge. For
information about replacing the staple
cartridge see Loading staples. For
information about ordering a new staple
cartridge, see Part numbers.
The Digital Sending Service at
<IP Address> does not service
this MFP. Contact administrator.
The MFP cannot communicate with the
specified IP address.
Verify the IP address. Contact the
network administrator.
The Digital Sending Service must
be upgraded to support this
version of the MFP firmware.
Contact administrator.
The Digital Sending Service is not
supported by the version of the firmware
that is currently installed for the MFP.
Check the firmware version. Contact the
network administrator.
The folder you have entered is
not a valid folder.
The folder name was entered incorrectly,
or the folder does not exist.
Re-enter the folder name correctly, or
add the folder.
TOO MANY PAGES IN JOB TO
STAPLE
The maximum number of sheets the
stapler can staple is 30.
For print jobs that have more than 30
pages, staple them manually.
214
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
Unable to connect
UNABLE TO COPY
To temporarily hide this message in
order to fax or send to e-mail, touch
IGNORE. If this message persists,
contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP support
flyer, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/
lj4345mfp.)
The MFP was unable to copy the
document. If this message persists,
contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP support
flyer, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/
lj4345mfp.)
UNABLE TO SEND
Unable to send Fax. Please check
fax configuration.
To temporarily hide this message in
order to fax or send to e-mail, touch
IGNORE.
To temporarily hide this message in
order to fax or send to e-mail, touch
IGNORE. If this message persists,
contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP support
flyer, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/
lj4345mfp.)
The MFP was unable to send the fax.
UNABLE TO SEND JOB
Contact the network administrator.
To temporarily hide this message in
order to fax or send to e-mail, touch
IGNORE. If this message persists,
contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP support
flyer, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/
lj4345mfp.)
User name or password is
incorrect. Please re-enter.
The user name or password was typed
incorrectly.
Retype the user name and password.
User Name, Job Name, or PIN is
missing.
One or more of the required items has
not been selected or typed.
Select the correct user name and job
name, and type the correct PIN.
ENWW
Resolving control-panel messages
215
Understanding accessory lights for the 3-bin mailbox and stapler/
stacker
The following table lists errors that can occur in the 3-bin mailbox or stapler/stacker and that
are reported by the accessory lights and on the control-panel display.
Accessory lights
216
Light
Explanation and solution
Solid green
●
The accessory is receiving power and is ready.
●
The stapler is low on staples. STAPLER LOW ON STAPLES
appears on the control-panel display. Fewer than 20 staples
remain in the staple cartridge. Replace the staple cartridge.
See Loading staples.
●
The number of pages in the job exceeds the 30-page limit for
stapling. TOO MANY PAGES IN JOB TO STAPLE appears
on the printer control-panel display. For jobs that have more
than 30 pages, staple the pages manually.
Solid amber
●
The accessory is experiencing a hardware malfunction.
66.XY.ZZ OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE appears on the
control-panel display. (See the section for this message in
Understanding MFP messages.)
Blinking amber
●
The accessory has a staple jam. 13.JJ.NT JAM IN
STAPLER appears on the control-panel display. (See the
section for this message in Understanding MFP messages.)
●
The accessory has a paper jam, or a sheet needs to be
removed from the unit, even if the sheet is not jammed.
13.JJ.NT JAM IN OUTPUT BIN appears on the control-panel
display. (See the section for this message in Understanding
MFP messages.)
●
The bin is full. STACKER BIN FULL appears on the
control-panel display. (See the section for OUTPUT BIN <X>
FULL in Understanding MFP messages.)
●
The stapler is out of staples. REPLACE STAPLE
CARTRIDGE appears on the control-panel display. (See the
section for this message in Understanding MFP messages.)
●
The jam-access cover is open. OUTPUT PAPER PATH
OPEN appears on the control-panel display. (See the section
for this message in Understanding MFP messages.)
●
The stapler unit is open. OUTPUT PAPER PATH OPEN
appears on the control-panel display. Make sure the staplecartridge cover is completely closed. (See the section for this
message in Understanding MFP messages.)
●
The firmware is corrupt. CORRUPT FIRMWARE IN
EXTERNAL ACCESSORY appears on the control-panel
display. (See the section for this message in Understanding
MFP messages.)
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
Light
Explanation and solution
Off
●
The MFP might be in sleep mode. Press any button on the
control panel.
●
The accessory is not receiving power. Turn the MFP power
off. Check that the accessory is properly seated on and
connected to the MFP, without any gaps between the MFP
and the accessory. Turn the MFP power on.
●
The accessory might have been disconnected and
reconnected while the MFP power was on. 66.12.99
REINSTALL OUTPUT DEVICE appears on the control-panel
display. Reconnect the cable on the accessory.
●
The job might have stalled between the MFP and the
accessory. Processing Job appears on the control-panel
display. Turn the MFP power off and then on.
Replacing accessories or accessory components
If you are unable to resolve problems that are indicated by the 3-bin mailbox or stapler/
stacker accessory lights, contact the HP Customer Care Center. (See HP customer care.) If
an HP Customer Care Center representative recommends replacement of the 3-bin mailbox,
the stapler/stacker, or the staple cartridge, see Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies
and Part numbers for information about ordering a replacement.
ENWW
●
For the steps to replace the entire 3-bin mailbox or the entire stapler/stacker, see the
install guide that came with the accessory.
●
For the steps to replace the staple cartridge, see Loading staples.
Understanding accessory lights for the 3-bin mailbox and stapler/stacker
217
Understanding lights on the formatter
Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the MFP is functioning correctly.
1
2
3
1
2
3
HP Jetdirect LEDs
Heartbeat LED
Fax LED
HP Jetdirect LEDs
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs, one for each possible link speed.
When an LED is lit, the print server is functioning correctly. A link failure is indicated when
both LEDs are off.
For link failures, check all of the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to
manually configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the MFP
control-panel menus.
1. Touch Menu.
2. Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Touch I/O.
4. Touch EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU
5. Touch LINK SPEED. Select the appropriate link speed.
Heartbeat LED
The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While the MFP is
initializing after you turn it on, the LED blinks rapidly, and then turns off. When the MFP has
finished the initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED pulses on and off.
If the heartbeat LED is off, the formatter might have a problem. Contact an HP-authorized
service or support provider. See the HP support flyer, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/
lj4345mfp.
218
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
Fax LED
The LED on the HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 indicates that it is functioning
correctly. If the LED is off, see the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide for
information about solving the problem.
ENWW
Understanding lights on the formatter
219
Correcting print-quality and copy-quality problems
This section helps you define print-quality problems and what to do to correct them. Often
print-quality problems can be handled easily by making sure that the printer is properly
maintained, using print media that meets HP specifications, or running a cleaning page.
Print-quality checklist
General print-quality problems can be solved by following the checklist below.
Note
●
Check the printer driver to make sure that you are using the best available print quality
option.
●
Try printing with one of the alternative printer drivers. The most recent printer drivers
area available for download from http://www.hp.com/go/lj4345mfp_software.
●
Clean the inside of the MFP, and process a cleaning page to clean the fuser (see
Cleaning the MFP).
●
Check the paper type and quality (see Print media specifications).
●
Check to make sure that EconoMode is off in the software.
●
Troubleshoot general printing problems (see Determining MFP problems).
●
Install a new HP print cartridge, and then check the print quality again. (See the
instructions provided with the print cartridge.)
If the page is totally blank (all white) check to make sure that the sealing tape is removed
from the print cartridge and ensure that the print cartridge is installed correctly. Newer
printers and MFPs have been optimized to print characters more accurately. This might
result in characters that look lighter or thinner than you are used to from an older printer. If
the page is printing images that are darker than those from an older printer, and you want
the images to match the older printer, make these changes in your printer driver: on the
Finishing tab, select Print Quality, select Custom, click Details, and click the check box
for Print Images Lighter.
Image defect examples
Use the examples in this image-defect table to determine which print-quality problem you are
experiencing, and then see the corresponding reference pages to troubleshoot the defect.
These examples identify the most common print-quality problems. If you still have problems
after trying the suggested remedies, contact HP Customer Support. (See HP customer care.)
220
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
Defects that can occur during printing
See Light print
(partial page)
See Light print
(entire page)
See Specks
See Specks
See Dropouts
See Gray
background
See Toner smear
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
See Dropouts
See Dropouts
See Lines
Dear Mr. Abhjerhjk,
The dhjhfiuhu if teint hhkjhjnf j us a weue jd, fnk
ksneh vnk kjdfkaakd ss hsjhnckkajhdhf kashfhnduujdn.
Pkshkkhklhlkhkhyufwe4yrh9jjflkln djd skshkshdcnksnjcnal
aksnclnslskjlncsl nas lnslna, ncnsljsjscljckn nsnclknsllj
hwlsdknls nwljs nlnscl nijhsn clsncij hn. Iosi fsjs jlkh andjna this
is a hn. jns fir stie a djakjd ajjssk. Thsi ius vnvlu tyeh lch afted,
and when hghj hgjhk jdj a dt sonnleh.
Suolklv jsdj hvjkrt ten sutc of jthjkfjkn vjdj hwjd, an olk d
.at fhjdjht ajshef. Sewlfl nv atug ahgjfjknvr kdkjdh sj hvjk
sjskrplo book. Camegajd sand their djnln as orged tyehha
as as hf hv of the tinhgh in the cescmdal vlala tojk. Ho sn shj
shjkh a sjca kvkjn? No ahdkj ahhtuah ahavjnv hv vh aefve r
Tehreh ahkj vaknihidh was skjsaa a dhkjfn anj
cjkhapsldnlj llhfoihrfhthej ahjkkjna oa h j a kah w asj kskjnk as
sa fjkank cakajhjkn eanjsdn qa ejhc pjtpvjlnv4purlaxnwl. Ana
l, and the askeina of ahthvnasm. Sayhvjan tjhhjhr ajn ve fh k
v nja vkfkahjd a. Smakkljl a sehiah adheufh if you do klakc k
w vka ah call lthe cjakha aa d a sd fijs.
Sincerely,
Mr. Scmehnjcj
See Loose toner
See Repeating
defects
See Repeating
image
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
See Misformed
characters
See Page skew
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
ENWW
See Curl or wave
See Wrinkles or
creases
See Vertical
white lines
See Tire tracks
See Scattered
lines.
See Blurred print.
See Random
image repetition
(dark)
See Random
image repetition
(light)
See White spots
on black
Correcting print-quality and copy-quality problems
221
Defects that can occur when using the ADF
See Blank page (ADF)
See Horizontal lines (ADF)
See Page skew (ADF)
See Image shifted (ADF)
See Unexpected image (ADF)
See Vertical lines (ADF)
Light print (partial page)
1. Make sure that the print cartridge is fully installed.
2. The toner level in the print cartridge might be low. Replace the print cartridge.
3. The media might not meet HP specifications (for example, the paper is too moist or too
rough). See Print media specifications.
4. The MFP might be due for maintenance. Check this by printing a copy of the supplies
status page. (See Checking the MFP configuration.) If maintenance is due, order and
install the printer maintenance kit or the ADF maintenance kit. (See Performing
preventive maintenance.)
222
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
Light print (entire page)
1. Make sure that the print cartridge is fully installed.
2. Make sure that the EconoMode setting is turned off at the control panel and in the printer
driver.
3. Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the control panel. Open the PRINT QUALITY
submenu and increase the TONER DENSITY setting. See Print quality submenu.
4. Try using a different type of paper.
5. The print cartridge might be almost empty. Replace the print cartridge.
Specks
Specks might appear on a page after a jam has been cleared.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2. Clean the inside of the MFP and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser. (See Cleaning
the MFP.)
3. Try using a different type of paper.
4. Check the print cartridge for leaks. If the print cartridge is leaking, replace it.
Dropouts
1. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the MFP are being met. (See
Environmental specifications.)
2. Make sure that type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. (See
Print media specifications.)
ENWW
Correcting print-quality and copy-quality problems
223
3. If the paper is rough, and the toner easily rubs off, open the CONFIGURE DEVICE
menu at the control panel. Open the PRINT QUALITY submenu, select FUSER
MODES, and then select the paper type you are using. Change the setting to HIGH 1 or
HIGH 2, which helps the toner fuse more completely onto the paper. (See Print quality
submenu.)
4. Try using a smoother paper.
Lines
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2. Clean the inside of the MFP and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser. (See Cleaning
the MFP.)
3. Replace the print cartridge.
4. The MFP might be due for maintenance. Check this by printing a copy of the supplies
status page. (See Checking the MFP configuration.) If maintenance is due, order and
install the printer maintenance kit or the ADF maintenance kit. (See Performing
preventive maintenance.)
Gray background
1. Do not use paper that has already been run through the MFP.
2. Try using a different type of paper.
3. If you are copying, try using the BACKGROUND REMOVAL feature. See Enhancement
submenu.
4. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
5. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.
6. Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the printer control panel. On the PRINT
QUALITY submenu, increase the TONER DENSITY setting. See Print quality submenu.
7. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the printer are being met. (See
Environmental specifications.)
8. Replace the print cartridge.
224
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
Toner smear
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2. Try using a different type of paper.
3. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the MFP are being met. (See
Environmental specifications.)
4. Clean the inside of the MFP and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser. (See Cleaning
the MFP.)
5. The MFP might be due for maintenance. Check this by printing a copy of the supplies
status page. (See Checking the MFP configuration.) If maintenance is due, order and
install the printer maintenance kit or the ADF maintenance kit. (See Performing
preventive maintenance.)
6. Replace the print cartridge.
Also see Loose toner.
Loose toner
Loose toner, in this context, is defined as toner that can be rubbed off the page.
1. If paper is heavy or rough, open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the control panel.
On the PRINT QUALITY submenu, select FUSER MODES, and then select the paper
type you are using. Change the setting to HIGH1 or HIGH2, which helps the toner fuse
more completely onto the paper. (See Print quality submenu.) You must also set the
type of paper for the tray you are using. (See Printing by type and size of media (locking
trays).)
2. If you have observed a rougher texture on one side of your paper, try printing on the
smoother side.
3. Try using a different type of paper.
4. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the printer are being met. (See
Environmental specifications.)
5. Make sure that type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. (See
Print media specifications.)
ENWW
Correcting print-quality and copy-quality problems
225
6. The MFP might be due for maintenance. Check this by printing a copy of the supplies
status page. (See Checking the MFP configuration.) If maintenance is due, order and
install the printer maintenance kit or the ADF maintenance kit. (See Performing
preventive maintenance.)
Repeating defects
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2. If the distance between defects is 38 mm (1.5 inches), 55 mm (2.2 inches), or 94 mm
(3.7 inches), the print cartridge might need to be replaced. See Repetitive defect ruler.
3. If the distance between defects is 47 mm (1.9 inches) or 94 mm (3.7 inches) one of the
components in the maintenance kit might need to be replaced. See Printer preventive
maintenance.
4. Clean the inside of the MFP and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser. (See Cleaning
the MFP.)
5. The MFP might be due for maintenance. Check this by printing a copy of the supplies
status page. (See Checking the MFP configuration.) If maintenance is due, order and
install the printer maintenance kit or the ADF maintenance kit. (See Performing
preventive maintenance.)
Also see Repeating image.
Repeating image
Dear Mr. Abhjerhjk,
The dhjhfiuhu if teint hhkjhjnf j us a weue jd, fnk
ksneh vnk kjdfkaakd ss hsjhnckkajhdhf kashfhnduujdn.
Pkshkkhklhlkhkhyufwe4yrh9jjflkln djd skshkshdcnksnjcnal
aksnclnslskjlncsl nas lnslna, ncnsljsjscljckn nsnclknsllj
hwlsdknls nwljs nlnscl nijhsn clsncij hn. Iosi fsjs jlkh andjna this
is a hn. jns fir stie a djakjd ajjssk. Thsi ius vnvlu tyeh lch afted,
and when hghj hgjhk jdj a dt sonnleh.
Suolklv jsdj hvjkrt ten sutc of jthjkfjkn vjdj hwjd, an olk d
.at fhjdjht ajshef. Sewlfl nv atug ahgjfjknvr kdkjdh sj hvjk
sjskrplo book. Camegajd sand their djnln as orged tyehha
as as hf hv of the tinhgh in the cescmdal vlala tojk. Ho sn shj
shjkh a sjca kvkjn? No ahdkj ahhtuah ahavjnv hv vh aefve r
Tehreh ahkj vaknihidh was skjsaa a dhkjfn anj
cjkhapsldnlj llhfoihrfhthej ahjkkjna oa h j a kah w asj kskjnk as
sa fjkank cakajhjkn eanjsdn qa ejhc pjtpvjlnv4purlaxnwl. Ana
l, and the askeina of ahthvnasm. Sayhvjan tjhhjhr ajn ve fh k
v nja vkfkahjd a. Smakkljl a sehiah adheufh if you do klakc k
w vka ah call lthe cjakha aa d a sd fijs.
Sincerely,
Mr. Scmehnjcj
This type of defect might occur when using preprinted forms or a large quantity of narrow
paper.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2. Make sure that type and quality of the paper that you are using meet HP specifications.
(See Print media specifications.)
3. The MFP might be due for maintenance. Check this by printing a copy of the supplies
status page. (See Checking the MFP configuration.) If maintenance is due, order and
install the printer maintenance kit or the ADF maintenance kit. (See Performing
preventive maintenance.)
4. If the distance between defects is 38 mm (1.5 inches), 55 mm (2.2 inches), or 94 mm
(3.7 inches), the print cartridge might need to be replaced.
226
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
Misformed characters
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the printer are being met. (See
Environmental specifications.)
3. The MFP might be due for maintenance. Check this by printing a copy of the supplies
status page. (See Checking the MFP configuration.) If maintenance is due, order and
install the printer maintenance kit or the ADF maintenance kit. (See Performing
preventive maintenance.)
Page skew
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2. Verify that no torn pieces of paper are inside the MFP.
3. Make sure that paper is loaded correctly and that all adjustments have been made. (See
Loading input trays.) Make sure that the guides in the tray are not too tight or too loose
against the paper.
4. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.
5. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper that you are using meet HP
specifications. (See Print media specifications.)
6. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the MFP are being met. (See
Environmental specifications.)
Curl or wave
1. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.
ENWW
Correcting print-quality and copy-quality problems
227
2. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper that you are using meet HP
specifications. (See Print media specifications.)
3. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the MFP are being met. (See
Environmental specifications.)
4. If paper is lightweight and smooth, open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the control
panel. On the PRINT QUALITY submenu, select FUSER MODES, and then select the
paper type you are using. Change the setting to LOW 1, which helps reduce the heat in
the fusing process. (See Print quality submenu.) You must also set the type of paper for
the tray you are using. (See Printing by type and size of media (locking trays).)
Wrinkles or creases
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the MFP are being met. (See
Environmental specifications.)
3. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.
4. Make sure that paper is loaded correctly and all adjustments have been made. (See
Loading input trays.)
5. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper that you are using meet HP
specifications. (See Print media specifications.)
6. If envelopes are creasing, try storing envelopes so that they lie flat.
Vertical white lines
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper that you are using meet HP
specifications. (See Print media specifications.)
3. Replace the print cartridge.
228
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
Tire tracks
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
This defect typically occurs when the print cartridge has far exceeded its rated life of 18,000
pages. For example, if you are printing a very large quantity of pages with very little toner
coverage, toner might still remain in the print cartridge but you have printed more than
18,000 pages.
1. Replace the print cartridge.
2. Reduce the number of pages that you print with very low toner coverage.
White spots on black
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper that you are using meet HP
specifications. (See Print media specifications.)
3. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the MFP are being met. (See
Environmental specifications.)
4. Replace the print cartridge.
Scattered lines
1. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications.
(See Print media specifications.)
2. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the MFP are being met. (See
Environmental specifications.)
3. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.
ENWW
Correcting print-quality and copy-quality problems
229
4. Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the control panel. Open the PRINT QUALITY
submenu and change the TONER DENSITY setting. (See Print quality submenu.)
5. Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the control panel. On the PRINT QUALITY
submenu, open OPTIMIZE and set LINE DETAIL=ON.
Blurred print
1. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper that you are using meet HP
specifications. (See Print media specifications.)
2. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the MFP are being met. (See
Environmental specifications.)
3. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.
4. Do not use paper that already has been run through the MFP.
5. Decrease the toner density. Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the control panel.
Open the PRINT QUALITY submenu and change the TONER DENSITY setting. (See
Print quality submenu.)
6. Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the control panel. On the PRINT QUALITY
submenu, open OPTIMIZE and set HIGH TRANSFER=ON. (See Print quality submenu.)
Random image repetition
230
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
If an image that appears at the top of the page (in solid black) repeats farther down the page
(in a gray field), the toner might not have been completely erased from the last job. (The
repeated image might be lighter or darker than the field it appears in.)
●
Change the tone (darkness) of the field that the repeated image appears in.
●
Change the order in which the images are printed. For example, have the lighter image
at the top of the page, and the darker image farther down the page.
●
From your software program, rotate the whole page 180° to print the lighter image first.
●
If the defect occurs later in a print job, turn the MFP power off for 10 minutes, and then
turn the MFP power on to restart the print job.
Blank page (ADF)
If the page is completely blank, the original page might have been placed face-down in the
ADF, the ADF was unable to detect the original page in the ADF, or the original page fed
through the ADF with another page.
1. Remove and then reinsert the original page into the ADF, making sure it is placed faceup.
2. If several pages are feeding at the same time, check the ADF separation pad and rollers
for damage. If the rollers are dirty, clean them. See Cleaning the ADF delivery system. If
the ADF separation pad or rollers are worn, replace them. See The ADF maintenance kit.
Horizontal lines (ADF)
Horizontal lines on copied documents indicate that components of the ADF need to be
cleaned or that the scanner needs to be calibrated.
1. Clean the ADF. See Cleaning the ADF delivery system.
2. If the mylar strip is dirty or worn, replace it. Replacement mylar strips are stored in an
envelope that is underneath the white, vinly ADF backing. Follow the instructions that
are in the envelope.
3. If the problem persists, calibrate the scanner. See Calibrating the scanner.
ENWW
Correcting print-quality and copy-quality problems
231
Page skew (ADF)
A skewed image can indicate that the clear mylar strip in the ADF is dirty, the ADF needs to
be calibrated, or the ADF input tray guides are not correctly adjusted.
1. Make sure the ADF input tray guides are adjusted so that they are lightly touching the
sides of the paper stack.
2. If the mylar strip is dirty or worn, replace it. Replacement mylar strips are stored in an
envelope that is underneath the white, vinly ADF backing. Follow the instructions that
are in the envelope.
3. If the problem persists, calibrate the scanner. See Calibrating the scanner.
Vertical lines (ADF)
Vertical lines can indicate that the components in the ADF are dirty or the ADF needs to be
calibrated.
1. Clean the ADF. See Cleaning the ADF delivery system.
2. If the mylar strip is dirty or worn, replace it. Replacement mylar strips are stored in an
envelope that is underneath the white, vinly ADF backing. Follow the instructions that
are in the envelope.
3. If the problem persists, calibrate the scanner. See Calibrating the scanner.
Image shifted (ADF)
232
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
An image that is shifted on the page horizontally, vertically, or both ways indicates that the
scanner is incorrectly calibrated. See Calibrating the scanner.
Unexpected image (ADF)
If the copy does not look at all like the original document, make sure that no media is on the
flatbed glass from a previous copy job.
ENWW
Correcting print-quality and copy-quality problems
233
Repetitive defect ruler
If defects repeat at regular intervals on the page, use this ruler to identify the cause of the
defect. Place the top of the ruler at the first defect. The marking that is beside the next
occurrence of the defect indicates which component needs to be replaced.
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
First occurrence of the defect
Print cartridge (37.7 mm [1.5 inches])
Transfer roller (part of the maintenance kit) (47 mm [1.9 inches
Print cartridge (54.0 mm [2.13 inches])
Print cartridge (62.8 mm [2.5 inches])
Fuser (part of the maintenance kit) (94.0 mm [3.75 inches])
Print cartridge (94.2 mm [3.75 inches])
To identify if the print cartridge is the problem, insert a print cartridge from another
HP LaserJet 4345mfp, if one is available, before ordering a new print cartridge.
If the defect repeats at 94.0 mm (3.75 inch) intervals, try replacing the print cartridge before
replacing the fuser.
234
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
Solving e-mail problems
If you are unable to send e-mails by using the digital-send feature, you might need to
reconfigure the SMTP gateway address or the LDAP gateway address. Print a configuration
page to find the current SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses. See Configuration page. Use
the following procedures to check if the SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses are valid.
To validate the SMTP gateway address
Note
This procedure is for Windows operating systems.
1. Open an MS-DOS command prompt: click Start, click Run, and then type cmd.
2. Type telnet followed by the SMTP gateway address and then the number 25, which is
the port over which the MFP is communicating. For example, type telnet
123.123.123.123 25 where "123.123.123.123" represents the SMTP gateway
address.
3. Press Enter. If the SMTP gateway address is not valid, the response contains the
message Could not open connection to the host on port 25: Connect
Failed.
4. If the SMTP gateway address is not valid, contact the network administrator.
To validate the LDAP gateway address
Note
This procedure is for Windows operating systems.
1. Open Windows Explorer. In the address bar, type LDAP:// immediately followed by the
LDAP gateway address. For example, type LDAP://12.12.12.12 where
"12.12.12.12" represents the LDAP gateway address.
2. Press Enter. If the LDAP gateway address is valid, the Find People dialog box opens.
3. If the LDAP gateway address is not valid, contact the network administrator.
ENWW
Solving e-mail problems
235
Solving network connectivity problems
If the MFP is having problems communicationg with the network, use the information in this
section to resolve the problem.
Troubleshooting network printing problems
Note
Note
HP recommends that you use the MFP CD-ROM to install and set up the MFP on a network.
●
Make sure that the network cable is securely seated into the MFP's RJ45 connector.
●
Make sure that the Link LED on the formatter is lit. See Understanding lights on the
formatter.
●
Make sure that the I/O card is ready. Print a configuration page (see Checking the MFP
configuration). If an HP Jetdirect print server is installed, printing a configuration page
also prints a second page that shows the network settings and status.
The HP Jetdirect embedded print server supports various network protocols (TCP/IP, IPX/
SPX, Novell/Netware, AppleTalk, and DCL/LLC). Make sure that the correct protocol is
enabled for your network.
On the HP Jetdirect configuration page, verify the following items for your protocol:
–
Under HP Jetdirect Configuration, the status is "I/O Card Ready".
–
The status is "Ready".
–
An IP address is listed.
–
The configuration method (Config by:) is listed correctly. See the network
administrator if you are not sure which method is correct.
●
Try printing the job from another computer.
●
To verify that a MFP works with a computer, use a parallel cable to connect it directly to
a computer. You will have to reinstall the printing software. Print a document from a
program that has printed correctly in the past. If this works, a problem with the network
might exist.
●
Contact your network administrator for assistance.
Verifying communication over the network
If the HP Jetdirect configuration page shows an IP address for the MFP, use this procedure
to verify that the MFP is communicating with other devices on the network.
To verify communication over the network
1. Open a command prompt:
a. Windows: Click Start, click Run, and then type cmd. An MS-DOS command prompt
opens.
236
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
b. Mac: Click Applications, click Utilities, and then open the Terminal application. The
terminal window opens.
2. Type ping followed by the IP address. For example, type ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
where "XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" is the IP address that is shown on the HP Jetdirect
configuration page. If the MFP is communicating over the network, the response is a list
of replies from the MFP.
3. Verify that the IP address is not a duplicate address on the network by using the address
resolution protocol (arp -a) command. At the prompt, type arp -a. Find the IP address
in the list and compare its physical address to the hardware address that is listed on the
HP Jetdirect configuration page in the section called HP Jetdirect Configuration. If the
addresses match, all network communications are valid.
4. If you cannot verify that the MFP is communicating over the network, contact the
network administrator.
ENWW
Solving network connectivity problems
237
238
Chapter 10 Solving problems
ENWW
A
Supplies and accessories
This section provides information about ordering parts, supplies, and accessories. Use only
parts and accessories that are specifically designed for this printer.
ENWW
●
Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies
●
Part numbers
239
Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies
Several methods are available for ordering parts, supplies, and accessories:
●
Ordering directly from HP
●
Ordering through service or support providers
●
Ordering directly through the embedded Web server (for printers that are connected to a
network)
●
Ordering directly through the HP Toolbox software (for printers that are directly
connected to a computer)
Ordering directly from HP
You can obtain the following directly from HP:
●
Replacement parts To order replacement parts in the U.S. see http://www.hp.com/go/
hpparts/. Outside the United States, order parts by contacting your local authorized
HP service center.
●
Supplies and accessories To order supplies in the U.S., see http://www.hp.com/go/
ljsupplies. To order supplies worldwide, see http://www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html. To
order accessories, see http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.
Ordering through service or support providers
To order a part or accessory, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See HP
customer care.)
Ordering directly through the embedded Web server (for
printers that are connected to a network)
Use the following steps to order printing supplies directly through the embedded Web server.
(See Using the embedded Web server for an explanation of this feature.)
To order directly through the embedded Web server
1. In the Web browser on the computer, type the IP address for the MFP. The MFP status
window appears.
2. In the Other links area, double-click Order Supplies. This provides a URL from which
to purchase consumables. Supplies information with part numbers and printer
information is provided.
3. Select the part numbers that you want to order and follow the instructions on the screen.
Ordering directly through the HP Toolbox software (for
printers that are directly connected to a computer)
The HP Toolbox software gives you the ability to order supplies and accessories directly
from the computer. To order supplies by using the HP Toolbox, click Toolbox Links, and
then click Order Supplies. A link is provided to the HP Web site for ordering supplies.
240
Appendix A Supplies and accessories
ENWW
Part numbers
The following list of accessories was current at the time of printing. Ordering information and
availability of the accessories might change during the life of the printer.
Accessories
Item
Description
Part number
Optional 500-sheet tray and
feeder unit
Optional tray to increase paper
capacity. Holds Letter, A4,
Legal, A5, B5 (JIS), Executive,
and 8.5 x 13 inch paper sizes.
Q5968A
The printer can accommodate
up to three optional 500-sheet
feeders.
Envelope feeder
Holds up to 75 envelopes.
Q2438B
Duplexer (duplex printing
accessory)
Allows automatic printing on
both sides of the paper.
Q5969A
3-bin mailbox
Provides three output bins that
hold a total of 700 sheets.
Q5692A
500-sheet stapler/stacker
Allows for high-volume output
with automatic job finishing.
Staples up to 30 sheets of
paper.
Q5691A
5,000-staple cartridge
Provides one staple cartridge.
C8091A
Storage cabinet
Raises the height of the MFP
and provides room to store
paper.
Q5970A
HP LaserJet analog fax
accessory 300
Provides fax capability for the
mfp. This is included with the
HP LaserJet 4345x mfp,
4345xs mfp, and 4345xm mfp
models.
Q3701A
Item
Description
Part number
HP LaserJet print cartridge
18,000-page cartridge
Q5945A
Print cartridges
ENWW
Part numbers
241
Maintenance kits
Item
Description
Part number
Printer maintenance kit.
110-volt printer maintenance kit
Q5998A
Includes a replacement fuser, a
transfer roller, a transfer-roller
tool, a pickup roller, eight feed
rollers, and one pair of
disposable gloves. Includes
instructions for installing each
component.
220-volt printer maintenance kit
Q5999A
Contains maintenance parts for
the ADF
Q5997A
Item
Description
Part number
100-pin DDR memory DIMM
(dual inline memory module)
64 MB
Q2625A
128 MB
Q2626A
256 MB
Q2627A
Greater than 20-GB
permananent storage for fonts
and forms. Also used for
making multiple original prints
and for job-storage features.
J6054B
The printer maintenance kit is a
consumable item, and its cost
is not covered under the
warranty or most extended
warranty options.
ADF maintenance kit
Includes a roller assembly, a
separation pad, and mylar
shields.
The ADF maintenance kit is a
consumable item, and its cost
is not covered under the
warranty or most extended
warranty options.
Memory
Boosts the ability of the printer
to handle large or complex print
jobs.
Hard disk
242
Appendix A Supplies and accessories
ENWW
Cables and interfaces
Item
Description
Part number
Enhanced I/O (EIO) cards
HP Jetdirect 620n Fast
Ethernet (10/100Base-TX) print
server
J7934A
HP Jetdirect Connectivity card
for USB, serial, and LocalTalk
connections
J4135A
2-meter IEEE 1284-B cable
C2950A
3-meter IEEE 1284-B cable
C2951A
HP Jetdirect print server multiprotocol EIO network cards
Parallel cables
Print media
For more information about media supplies, go to http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies.
Item
Description
Part number
HP LaserJet paper
Letter (8.5 x 11 inch),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream
carton
HPJ1124/North America
Legal (8.5 x 14 inch),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream
carton
HPJ1424/North America
A Letter (220 x 280 mm),
500 sheets/ream, 5-ream carton
Q2398A/Asia-Pacific countries/
regions
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/
ream, 5-ream carton
Q2400A/Asia-Pacific countries/
regions
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/
ream
CHP310/Europe
Letter (8.5 x 11 inch),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream
carton
HPP1122/North America and
Mexico
Letter (8.5 x 11 inch),
500 sheets/ream, 3-ream carton
HPP113R/North America
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/
ream, 5-ream carton
CHP210/Europe
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 300 sheets/
ream, 5-ream carton
CHP213/Europe
For use with HP LaserJet
printers. Good for letterhead,
high-value memos, legal
documents, direct mail, and
correspondence.
Specifications: 96 bright, 24 lb
(90 g/m2).
HP Printing paper
For use with HP LaserJet and
inkjet printers. Created
especially for small and home
offices. Heavier and brighter
than copier paper.
Specifications: 92 bright, 22 lb.
ENWW
Part numbers
243
Item
Description
Part number
HP Multipurpose paper
Letter (8.5 x 11 inch),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream
carton
HPM1120/North America
For use with all office
equipment-laser and inkjet
printers, copiers, and fax
machines. Created for
businesses that want one
paper for all their office needs.
Brighter and smoother than
other office papers.
Specifications: 90 bright, 20 lb
(75 g/m2).
Letter (8.5 x 11 inch),
500 sheets/ream, 5-ream carton
Letter (8.5 x 11 inch),
250 sheets/ream, 12-ream
carton
HPM115R/North America
HP25011/North America
HPM113H/North America
HPM1420/North America
Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 3-hole,
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream
carton
Legal (8.5 x 14 inch),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream
carton
HP Office paper
For use with all office
equipment-laser and inkjet
printers, copiers, and fax
machines. Good for highvolume printing.
Specifications: 84 bright, 20 lb
(75 g/m2).
244
Appendix A Supplies and accessories
Letter (8.5 x 11 inch),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream
carton
HPC8511/North America and
Mexico
Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 3-hole,
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream
carton
HPC3HP/North America
Legal (8.5 x 14 inch),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream
carton
HPC8514/North America
Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), Quick
Pack; 2,500-sheet carton
HP2500S/North America and
Mexico
Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), Quick
Pack 3-hole; 2,500-sheet carton
HP2500P/North America
A Letter (220 x 280 mm),
500 sheets/ream, 5-ream carton
Q2408A/Asia-Pacific countries/
regions
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/
ream, 5-ream carton
Q2407A/Asia-Pacific countries/
regions
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/
ream, 5-ream carton
CHP110/Europe
A4 (210 x 297 mm), Quick
Pack; 2500 sheets/ream, 5ream carton
CHP113/Europe
ENWW
Item
Description
Part number
HP Office recycled paper
Letter (8.5 x 11 inch),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream
carton
HPE1120/North America
Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 3-hole,
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream
carton
HPE113H/North America
Legal (8.5 x 14 inch),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream
carton
HPE1420/North America
Letter (8.5 x 11 inch),
50 sheets to a carton
92296T/North America, AsiaPacific countries/regions, and
Europe
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 50 sheets
to a carton
922296U/Asia-Pacific countries/
regions and Europe
For use with all office
equipment-laser and inkjet
printers, copiers, and fax
machines. Good for highvolume printing.
Satisfies U.S. Executive
Order 13101 for
environmentally preferable
products.
Specifications: 84 bright, 20 lb,
30% post-consumer content.
HP LaserJet transparencies
For use only with HP LaserJet
monochrome printers. For
crisp, sharp text and graphics,
rely on the only transparencies
specifically designed and
tested to work with
monochrome HP LaserJet
printers.
Specifications: 4.3-mil thickness.
ENWW
Part numbers
245
246
Appendix A Supplies and accessories
ENWW
B
Service and support
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
HP PRODUCT
HP LaserJet 4345mfp, HP LaserJet 4345x mfp,
HP LaserJet 4345xs mfp, HP LaserJet 4345xm mfp
DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY
1 year, On-site
HP warrants HP hardware, accessories, and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the
period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option,
either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or likenew.
HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions, for the period specified above,
due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such
defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software media which does not execute its programming
instructions due to such defects.
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a
reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, customer will be entitled to a refund
of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to
incidental use.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b)
software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation
outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or
maintenance.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER
WARRANTY, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW,
THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE THE CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR
LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT
OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND; THE WARRANTY TERMS
CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE,
RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE
TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
The warranty period begins on the date of the delivery or on the date of installation if installed by HP. If customer
schedules or delays HP installation more than 30 days after delivery, warranty begins on the 31st day from
delivery.
ENWW
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
247
Print Cartridge Limited Warranty Statement
This HP Print Cartridge is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship.
This warranty does not apply to print cartridges that (a) have been refilled, refurbished,
remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from
misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications
for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written
description of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s
option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase
price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE
AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
(INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN
ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF
THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
248
Appendix B Service and support
ENWW
Availability of support and service
Around the world, HP provides a variety of service and support options for purchase.
Availability of these programs will vary depending upon your location.
HP maintenance agreements
HP has several types of maintenance agreements that meet a wide range of support needs.
Maintenance agreements are not part of the standard warranty. Support services vary by
location. Contact HP Customer Care or to to http://www.hp.com/services/carpack to
determine the services that are available to you and for more information about maintenance
agreements. In general, the MFP will have the following maintenance agreements:
Priority Onsite Service
This agreement provides 4-hour service response to your site for calls made during normal
HP business hours.
Next business day
This agreement provides next-business-day service, Monday through Friday. This service
agreement comes standard with the MFP for a period of one year. You can purchase an
extension of this agreement.
Installation and maintenance-kit replacement
An HP-authorized service or support provider will come to your site to install the MFP or to
replace the maintenance kits.
ENWW
HP maintenance agreements
249
Repacking the MFP
If HP Customer Care determines that your MFP needs to be returned to HP for repair, follow
the steps below to repack the MFP before shipping it.
CAUTION
Shipping damage as a result of inadequate packing is the customer’s responsibility.
To repack the MFP
1. Remove and retain any DIMMs or flash memory cards that you have purchased and
installed in the printer. Do not remove the DIMM that came with the MFP. Also remove
the HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 and any EIO cards that are installed.
CAUTION
Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist
strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare
metal on the printer. To remove the DIMMs, see Installing memory.
2. Remove and retain the print cartridge.
CAUTION
It is extremely important to remove the print cartridge before shipping the MFP. A print
cartridge that is left in the MFP during shipping will leak and entirely cover the MFP with toner.
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, avoid touching the roller on it, and store the print
cartridge in its original packing material or so that it is not exposed to light.
3. Lock the scanner lock.
4. Remove and retain the power cable, interface cable, and optional accessories.
5. If possible, include print samples and 50 to 100 sheets of paper or other print media that
did not print correctly.
6. Include a completed copy of the Service information form.
7. In the U.S., call HP Customer Care to request new packing material. In other areas, use
the original packing material, if possible. Hewlett-Packard recommends insuring the
equipment for shipment.
250
Appendix B Service and support
ENWW
Service information form
WHO IS RETURNING THE EQUIPMENT?
Date:
Person to contact:
Phone:
Alternate contact:
Phone:
Return shipping address:
Special shipping instructions:
WHAT ARE YOU SENDING?
Model name:
Model number:
Serial number:
Please attach any relevant printouts. Do NOT ship accessories (manuals, cleaning supplies, etc.) that are not required to
complete the repair.
HAVE YOU REMOVED THE PRINT CARTRIDGE?
You must remove the print cartridge before shipping the MFP, unless a mechanical problem prevents you from doing so.
Yes.
No, I cannot remove it.
WHAT NEEDS TO BE DONE? (Attach a separate sheet if necessary.)
1. Describe the conditions of the failure. (What was the failure? What were you doing when the failure occurred? What
software were you running? Is the failure repeatable?)
2. If the failure is intermittent, how much time elapses between failures?
3. If the unit connected to any of the following, give the manufacturer and model number.
Personal computer:
Modem:
Network:
4. Additional comments:
HOW WILL YOU PAY FOR THE REPAIR?
Under warranty
Purchase/received date:
(Attach proof of purchase or receiving document with original received date.)
Maintenance contract number:
Purchase order number:
Except for contract and warranty service, a purchase order number and/or authorized signature must accompany
any request for service. If standard repair prices do not apply, a minimum purchase order is required. Standard repair
prices can be obtained by contacting an HP-authorized repair center.
Authorized signature:
Billing address:
ENWW
Phone:
Special billing instructions:
Service information form
251
252
Appendix B Service and support
ENWW
C
MFP specifications
This section provides the following specifications:
●
Physical specifications
●
Electrical specifications
●
Acoustic specifications
●
Environmental specifications
●
Image area
●
Skew specifications
Specifications for the HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 are available in the
HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide. A printed copy of this guide is provided
with the HP LaserJet 4345x mfp, HP LaserJet 4345xs mfp, and HP LaserJet 4345xm mfp.
ENWW
253
Physical specifications
Product dimensions
Product
Height
Depth
Width
Weight1
HP LaserJet 4345mfp
545 mm
(21.5 inches)
483 mm
(19.0 inches)
762 mm
(30.0 inches)
44.1 kg
(97.2 lb)
HP LaserJet 4345x mfp
667 mm
(26.3 inches)
483 mm
(19.0 inches)
762 mm
(30.0 inches)
52.4 kg
(115.5 lb)
HP LaserJet 4345xs mfp
111.0 cm
(43.7 inches)
483 mm
(19.0 inches)
914 mm
(36.0 inches)
58.4 kg
(128.7 lb)
HP LaserJet 4345xm mfp
111.0 cm
(43.7 inches)
483 mm
(19.0 inches)
914 mm
(36.0 inches)
58.2 kg
(128.3 lb)
Optional 500-sheet feeder
122 mm
(4.8 inches)
483 mm
(19.0 inches)
559 mm
(22.0 inches)
8.3 kg (18.3 lb)
Optional cabinet
440 mm
(17.3 inches)
762 mm
(30.0 inches)
825.5 mm
(32.5 inches)
41.8 kg
(92.2 lb)
Optional stapler/stacker
6.0 kg (13.2 lb)
Optional 3-bin mailbox
5.8 kg (12.8 lb)
Optional Envelope feeder
2.5 kg (5.5 lb)
Optional duplexer
2.5 kg (5.5 lb)
1
Without print cartridge
Product dimensions, with all doors and trays fully opened
254
Product
Height
Depth
Width
HP LaserJet 4345mfp
889 mm
(35.0 inches)
876 mm
(34.5 inches)
142.2 cm
(56.0 inches)
HP LaserJet 4345x mfp
101 cm
(39.8 inches)
876 mm
(34.5 inches)
142.2 cm
(56.0 inches)
HP LaserJet 4345xs mfp
145 cm
(57.0 inches)
117 cm
(46.0 inches)
157.5 cm
(62.0 inches)
HP LaserJet 4345xm mfp
145 cm
(57.0 inches)
117 cm
(46.0 inches)
157.5 cm
(62.0 inches)
Appendix C MFP specifications
ENWW
Electrical specifications
WARNING!
Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not
convert operating voltages. This can damage the printer and void the product warranty.
Power requirements (HP LaserJet 4345mfp Series)
Specification
110-volt models
230-volt models
Power requirements
110 to 127 volts (± 10%)
220 to 240 volts (± 10%)
50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz)
50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz)
10.0 Amps
4.5 Amps
Rated current
Power consumption HP LaserJet 4345mfp Series (average, in watts)1
Product model
Copying
Printing2
Ready
Sleep
Off
HP LaserJet 4345mfp
800 W
790 W3
44 W
15 W
0.25 W
HP LaserJet 4345x mfp
800 W
790 W3
49 W
15 W
0.25 W
HP LaserJet 4345xs mfp
800 W
790 W3
49 W
15 W
0.25 W
HP LaserJet 4345xm mfp
800 W
790 W3
49 W
15 W
0.25 W
1
Values subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp for current infromation.
Power numbers are the highest values measured using all standard voltages.
3
HP LaserJet 4345mfp Series printing and copying speeds are 45 ppm Letter size and
43 ppm A4 size.
4
Default time from Ready mode to Sleep = 60 minutes.
5
Recovery time from Sleep to start of printing = less than 10 seconds.
6
Heat dissipation in Ready mode = 167 BTU/hour.
2
ENWW
Electrical specifications
255
Acoustic specifications
Sound power and pressure level1 (HP LaserJet 4345mfp Series)
Sound power level
Declared per ISO 9296
Printing2
LWAd= 7.0 Bels (A) [70 dB(A)]
Copying
LWAd= 7.2 Bels (A) [72 dB(A)]
Ready
LpAm=33 dB (A)
Sound pressure level
Declared per ISO 9296
Printing2
LpAm=55 dB (A)
Copying
LpAm=56 dB (A)
Ready
LpAm=33 dB (A)
1
Values subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp for current information.
HP LaserJet 4345mfp Series speed is 43 ppm A4 size.
3
Configuration tested (HP LaserJet 4345mfp): Base model, simplex printing with A4 paper
size.
2
256
Appendix C MFP specifications
ENWW
Environmental specifications
ENWW
Environmental condition
Printing
Storage/standby
Temperature (printer and print
cartridge)
10° to 32.5°C (50° to 89°F)
-20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
Relative humidity
10% to 80%
10% to 90%
Environmental specifications
257
Image area
The MFP can place printed or copied images on the page within the following margins:
●
Printing: 4.23 mm (0.167 inches) from each edge
●
Copying (standard): 4.23 mm (0.167 inches) from each edge
●
Copying (edge-to-edge): 2.0 mm (0.08 inches) from each edge
To use edge-to-edge copying, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, touch SYSTEM SETUP, touch
COPY/SEND SETTINGS, and then touch EDGE-TO-EDGE COPIES.
Note
Do not use edge-to-edge copying as the default setting because it can result in printing off
the page. This can cause print-quality defects and can cause damage to the MFP internal
components.
Note
Margins vary when using digital sending. The margins depend on the type of file being sent
and its dpi resolution.
258
Appendix C MFP specifications
ENWW
Skew specifications
The MFP has the following skew specifications:
ENWW
●
Print engine (cut-sheet paper): less than 1.5 mm (0.059 inches) over a 260 mm
(10.24 inch) length
●
Print engine (envelopes): less than 3.3 mm (0.13 inches) over a 220 mm (8.66 inch)
length
●
ADF and scanner glass (cut-sheet paper): less than 0.6%
Skew specifications
259
260
Appendix C MFP specifications
ENWW
D
Media specifications
Print media specifications
For complete paper specifications for all HP LaserJet printers and MFPs, see the
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide (available at http://www.hp.com/support/
ljpaperguide).
Category
Specifications
Acid content
5.5 pH to 8.0 pH
Caliper
0.094 to 0.18 mm (3.0 to 7.0 mils)
Curl in ream
Flat within 5 mm (0.02 inch)
Cut edge conditions
Cut with sharp blades that create no visible fray.
Fusing compatibility
Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release
hazardous emissions when heated to 200°C
(392°F) for 0.1 second.
Grain
Long grain
Moisture content
3% to 9% by weight
Smoothness
100 to 250 Sheffield
Printing and paper storage environment
Ideally, the printing and paper storage environment should be at or near room temperature,
and not too dry or too humid. Remember paper is hygroscopic; it absorbs and loses moisture
rapidly.
Heat works with humidity to damage paper. Heat causes the moisture in paper to evaporate,
while cold causes it to condense on the sheets. Heating systems and air conditioners
remove most of the humidity from a room. As paper is opened and used, it loses moisture,
causing streaks and smudging. Humid weather or water coolers can cause the humidity to
increase in a room. As paper is opened and used it absorbs any excess moisture, causing
light print and dropouts. Also, as paper loses and gains moisture it can distort. This can
cause jams.
As a result, paper storage and handling are as important as the paper-making process itself.
Paper storage environmental conditions directly affect the feed operation.
ENWW
Print media specifications
261
Care should be taken not to purchase more paper than can be easily used in a short time
(about 3 months). Paper stored for long periods might experience heat and moisture
extremes, which can cause damage. Planning is important to prevent damage to a large
supply of paper.
Unopened paper in sealed reams can remain stable for several months before use. Opened
packages of paper have more potential for environmental damage, especially if they are not
wrapped with a moisture-proof barrier.
The paper storage environment should be properly maintained to ensure optimum MFP
performance. The required condition is 20° to 24°C (68° to 75°F), with a relative humidity of
45% to 55%. The following guidelines should be helpful when evaluating the paper's storage
environment:
●
Paper should be stored at or near room temperature.
●
The air should not be too dry or too humid (due to the hygroscopic properties of paper).
●
The best way to store an opened ream of paper is to rewrap it tightly in its moistureproof wrapping. If the printer environment is subject to extremes, unwrap only the
amount of paper to be used during the day's operation to prevent unwanted moisture
changes.
Envelopes
Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary considerably, not only between
manufacturers, but also within a box from the same manufacturer. Successful printing on
envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes, consider
the following components:
Note
262
●
Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 105 g/m2 (28 lb) or
jamming might occur.
●
Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm (0.25 inch)
curl, and should not contain air.
●
Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
●
Temperature: You should use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and
pressure of the printer.
●
Size: You should use only envelopes within the following size ranges.
●
Minimum: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)
●
Maximum: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
Use only tray 1 or the optional envelope feeder to print envelopes.You might experience
some jams when using any media with a length less than 178 mm (7 inches). This might be
caused by paper that has been affected by environmental conditions. For optimum
performance, make sure you are storing and handling the paper correctly (see Printing and
paper storage environment). Choose envelopes in the printer driver (see Using the printer
drivers).
Appendix D Media specifications
ENWW
Envelopes with double side seams
Double side-seam construction has vertical seams at both ends of the envelope rather than
diagonal seams. This style might be more likely to wrinkle. Be sure the seam extends all the
way to the corner of the envelope as illustrated below.
1
2
Acceptable envelope construction
Unacceptable envelope construction
Envelopes with adhesive strips or flaps
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal
must use adhesives compatible with the heat and pressure in the printer. The extra flaps and
strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or even jams and might even damage the fuser.
Envelope margins
The following gives typical address margins for a commercial #10 or DL envelope.
Note
Type of address
Top margin
Left margin
Return address
15 mm (0.6 inch)
15 mm (0.6 inch)
Delivery address
51 mm (2.0 inches)
89 mm (3.5 inches)
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm (0.6 inch) from the edges
of the envelope. Avoid printing over the area where the envelope's seams meet.
Envelope storage
Proper storage of envelopes helps contribute to print quality. Envelopes should be stored
flat. If air is trapped in an envelope, creating an air bubble, then the envelope might wrinkle
during printing.
For more information, see Printing on envelopes.
ENWW
Print media specifications
263
Labels
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the MFP, use only labels recommended for laser printers. Never print on
the same sheet of labels more than once or print on a partial sheet of labels.
Label construction
When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component:
●
Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 200°C (392°F), the printer's
fusing temperature.
●
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel
off sheets with spaces between the labels, causing serious jams.
●
Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm (0.5 inch) of curl in
any direction.
●
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation.
For more information, see Printing on labels.
Choose labels in the printer driver (see Using the printer drivers).
Note
Transparencies
Transparencies used in the printer must be able to withstand 200°C (392°F), the printer's
fusing temperature.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the MFP, use only transparencies recommended for use in HP LaserJet
printers, such as HP-brand transparencies. (For ordering information, see Part numbers.)
For more information, see Printing on transparencies.
Note
264
Choose transparencies in the printer driver (see Using the printer drivers).
Appendix D Media specifications
ENWW
Supported types and sizes of print media
Supported types of media
Type of media
Tray 1
Trays 2,
3, 4, and 5
Optional
duplexer
Optional
envelope
feeder
3-bin
mailbox
or stacker
part of
stapler/
stacker
Stapler
part of
stapler/
stacker
Plain
X
X
X
X
X
X
Preprinted
X
X
X
X
X
X
Letterhead
X
X
X
X
X
X
Transparency
X
X
Prepunched
X
X
Labels
X
X
Bond
X
Recycled
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Color
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rough
X
X
X
X
X
X
Envelope
X
X
X1
1
Face-up delivery only.
ENWW
Supported types and sizes of print media
265
Tray 1 supported sizes and weights
Size
Dimensions1
Weight
Capacity2
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
60 to 200 g/m2
(16 to 53 lb)
100 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb) paper
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 inches)
Legal
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
Executive
184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 inches)
Statement
140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 inches)
8.5x13
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 inches)
A5
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 inches)
B5 (JIS)
182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 inches)
Executive (JIS)
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 inches)
D Postcard (JIS)
148 x 200 mm
(5.8 x 7.9 inches)
16K
197 x 273 mm
(7.75 x 10.75 inches)
Custom3
Minimum:
76 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 inches)
75 to 105 g/m2
(20 to 28 lb)
10 envelopes
Maximum:
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
Envelope Commercial
#10
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 inches)
EnvelopeDL ISO
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 inches)
EnvelopeC5 ISO
162 x 229 mm
(6.4 x 9.0 inches)
EnvelopeB5 ISO
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 inches)
EnvelopeMonarch
#7-3/4
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 inches)
1
The MFP supports a wide range of sizes. Check the MFP software for supported sizes.
Capacity can vary depending on paper weight and thickness, as well as environmental
conditions.
3
To print on custom-size paper, see Printing on small sizes, custom sizes, or heavy paper.
2
266
Appendix D Media specifications
ENWW
Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 supported sizes and weights
Size
Dimensions1
Weight
Capacity2
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
60 to 120 g/m2
(16 to 32 lb)
500 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb) paper
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 inches)
Executive
184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 inches)
Legal
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
B5 (JIS)
182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 inches)
A5
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 inches)
8.5x13
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 inches)
Executive (JIS)
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 inches)
16K
197 x 273 mm
(7.75 x 10.75 inches)
Custom3
Minimum:
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 inches)
Maximum:
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
1
The MFP supports a wide range of sizes. Check the MFP software for supported sizes.
Capacity can vary depending on paper weight and thickness, as well as environmental
conditions.
3
To print on custom-size paper, see Printing on small sizes, custom sizes, or heavy paper.
2
ENWW
Supported types and sizes of print media
267
Optional duplexer supported sizes and weights
Size
Dimensions
Weight
Letter
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb)
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 inches)
Executive
184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 inches)
Legal
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
B5 (JIS)
182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 inches)
A5
148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 inches)
8.5x13
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
Executive (JIS)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
16K
197 x 273 mm
(7.75 x 10.75 inches)
Optional envelope feeder supported sizes and weights
268
Size
Dimensions
Weight
Capacity
Monarch #7-3/4
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 inches)
75 to 105 g/m2
(20 to 28 lb)
75 envelopes
Commercial#10
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 inches)
DL ISO
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 inches)
C5 ISO
162 x 229 mm
(6.4 x 9.0 inches)
B5 ISO
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 inches)
Appendix D Media specifications
ENWW
Optional 3-bin mailbox or stacker part of the stapler/stacker supported sizes and
weights
Size
Dimensions1
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 inches)
Executive
184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 inches)
Legal
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
B5 (JIS)
182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 inches)
A5
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 inches)
Statement
140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 inches)
8.5x13
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 inches)
Executive(JIS)
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 inches)
DPostcard(JIS)
148 x 200 mm
(5.8 x 7.9 inches)
16K
197 x 273 mm
(7.75 x 10.75 inches)
Envelope #10 4
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 inches)
Envelope Monarch
#7-3/4 4
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 inches)
Envelope C5 ISO 4
162 x 229 mm
(6.4 x 9.0 inches)
Envelope DL ISO 4
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 inches)
Envelope B5 ISO 4
176 x 250 mm
(6.7 x 9.8 mm)
Custom3
Minimum:
76 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 inches)
Weight
Capacity2
For the stacker on the
stapler/stacker or the
lower bin on the 3-bin
mailbox: 500 sheets of
75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper
For the top two bins on
the 3-bin mailbox:
each can hold
100 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb) paper.
Maximum:
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
1
The MFP supports a wide range of sizes. Check the MFP software for supported sizes.
Capacity can vary depending on paper weight and thickness, as well as environmental
conditions.
3
To print on custom-size paper, see Printing on small sizes, custom sizes, or heavy paper.
4
Face-up delivery only.
2
ENWW
Supported types and sizes of print media
269
Stapler part of the optional stapler/stacker supported sizes and weights
Size
Dimensions
Weight
Capacity
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 inches)
For plain media:
60 to 120 g/m2
(16 to 32 lb)
For plain media:
30 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb) paper
For glossy media:
20 sheets
Legal
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
For thick media:
128 to 199 g/m2
(34 to 53 lb)
8.5x13
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 inches)
Executive(JIS)
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 inches)
For thick media: the
stack height must not
exceed 7 mm
(0.27 inch)
ADF supported sizes and weights
270
Size
Dimensions
Weight
Capacity
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
60 to 120 g/m2
(16 to 32 lb)
50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 inches)
A5
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 inches)
Legal
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
Appendix D Media specifications
ENWW
E
MFP memory and expansion
This section explains the memory features of the printer and provides steps for expansion.
ENWW
●
Memory overview
●
Determining memory requirements
●
Installing memory
●
Checking memory installation
●
Saving resources (permanent resources)
●
Installing EIO cards
271
Memory overview
The MFP has two double data rate (DDR) DIMM slots to provide more MFP memory. DDR
DIMMs are available in 64, 128, and 256 MB, and can be combined in the MFP for a
maximum of 512 MB.
The MFP has two flash memory slots to provide the following features:
Note
●
Flash memory cards, available in 16, 32, and 64 MB. Unlike standard MFP memory,
flash memory cards can be used to permanently store downloaded items in the MFP,
even when the MFP is off. The MFP supports Type 1 and Type 2 flash memory.
●
To add flash-based memory accessory fonts, macros, and patterns, use the appropriate
DDR DIMM.
●
To add other flash-based printer languages and MFP options, use the appropriate DDR
DIMM.
Single in line memory modules (SIMMs) that are used on previous HP LaserJet products are
not compatible with this MFP.
For ordering information, see Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies, or go to
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4345mfp.
272
Appendix E MFP memory and expansion
ENWW
Determining memory requirements
The amount of memory you need depends on the types of documents you print. Your MFP
can print most text and graphics at 1,200 dpi FastRes without additional memory.
You might want to add more memory to the MFP if you often print complex graphics or
PostScript (PS) documents, print two-sided documents (duplex printing), or use many
downloaded fonts.
ENWW
Determining memory requirements
273
Installing memory
Use this procedure to install additional memory. Before you begin, print the configuration
page (touch Menu, touch INFORMATION, and then touch PRINT CONFIGURATION) to find
out how much memory is installed in the MFP before adding more memory.
CAUTION
Static electricity can damage DDR DIMMs. When handling DDR DIMMs, either wear an
antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then
touch bare metal on the MFP.
To install memory DIMMs
1. If you have not already done so, print the configuration to find out how much memory is
installed in the MFP before adding more memory.
2. Turn off the MFP, and disconnect all the cables.
3. Remove the output bin, the 3-bin mailbox, or the stapler/stacker.
4. At the back of the MFP, remove the formatter cover.
5. Open the formatter door.
274
Appendix E MFP memory and expansion
ENWW
6. Remove the DIMM from the antistatic package. Hold the DIMM with your fingers against
the side edges and thumbs against the back edge. Align the notches on the DIMM with
the DIMM slot. (Check that the locks on each side of the DIMM slot are open, or outward.)
7. Press the DIMM straight into the slot (press firmly). Make sure the locks on each side of
the DIMM snap inward into place. (To remove a DIMM, the locks must be released.)
8. Close the formatter door.
9. Replace the formatter cover.
ENWW
Installing memory
275
10. Reinstall the output bin, the 3-bin mailbox, or the stapler/stacker.
11. Reconnect all the cables, and turn on the MFP.
To install a flash memory card
CAUTION
Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera into the
MFP. The MFP does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card. If you
install a camera-type flash memory card, a message asking if you want to reformat the flash
memory card appears on the control-panel display. If you choose to reformat the card, all
data on the card will be lost.
1. Turn off the MFP, and disconnect all the cables.
2. Remove the output bin, the 3-bin mailbox, or the stapler/stacker.
276
Appendix E MFP memory and expansion
ENWW
3. At the back of the MFP, remove the formatter cover.
4. Open the formatter door.
5. Remove the flash memory card from the antistatic package. Hold the flash memory card
with your fingers against the side edges and thumbs against the back edge.
6. Press the flash memory card straight into the slot. If it does not go in easily, rotate it
180 degrees and try to insert it again.
CAUTION
Do not insert the flash memory card at an angle.
Note
The first flash memory slot, marked "Firmware Slot," is reserved for firmware only. Slots 2
and 3 should be used for all other solutions.
ENWW
Installing memory
277
7. Close the formatter door.
8. Replace the formatter cover.
9. Reinstall the output bin, the 3-bin mailbox, or the stapler/stacker.
10. Reconnect all the cables, and turn on the MFP.
Replacing the hard-disk drive
If the hard-disk drive becomes corrupted, use this procedure to remove it and to install a new
one.
1. Turn off the MFP, and disconnect all of the cables.
278
Appendix E MFP memory and expansion
ENWW
2. Remove the output bin, the 3-bin mailbox, or the stapler/stacker.
3. At the back of the MFP, remove the formatter cover.
4. Open the formatter door.
5. The hard disk is attached to the inside of the formatter door. Disconnect the ribbon cable
from the top of the hard disk by gently pulling up on both ends of the blue plastic
connector.
CAUTION
Be careful not to tear the ribbon cable.
6. On the left side of the hard disk, press inward on the black plastic latch to release the
hard disk. Slide the hard disk up to remove it from the MFP.
Note
ENWW
You might need to push with some force to begin moving the hard disk.
Installing memory
279
7. Slide the new hard disk into the slot on the formatter door. Make sure that the black
plastic latch on the left side of the hard disk is firmly seated in its slot.
8. Reconnect the ribbon cable to the top of the new hard disk.
9. Close the formatter door.
10. Replace the formatter cover.
11. Reinstall the output bin, the 3-bin mailbox, or the stapler/stacker.
280
Appendix E MFP memory and expansion
ENWW
12. Reconnect all of the cables, and turn on the MFP.
ENWW
Installing memory
281
Checking memory installation
After installing the DIMM or flash memory card, make sure that the installation was
successful.
To verify that memory devices are installed correctly
1. Check that Ready appears on the control-panel display when the MFP power is turned
on. If an error message appears, a memory device might have been incorrectly installed.
See Understanding MFP messages.
2. Print a new configuration page. (See Checking the MFP configuration.)
3. Check the memory section on the configuration page and compare it to the configuration
page that was printed before the memory installation. If the amount of memory has not
increased, the DIMM or flash memory card might not be installed correctly, or the DIMM
or flash memory card might be defective. Repeat the installation procedure. If
necessary, install a different DIMM or flash memory card.
Note
282
If you installed a printer language (personality), check the "Installed Personalities and
Options" section on the configuration page. This area should list the new printer language.
Appendix E MFP memory and expansion
ENWW
Saving resources (permanent resources)
Utilities or jobs that you downloaded to the MFP sometimes include resources (for example,
fonts, macros, or patterns). Resources that are internally marked as permanent remain in the
MFP memory until you turn the MFP off.
If you do not have a flash memory card for storing downloaded resources, you might want to
change the amount of memory that is allocated to each language when you download an
unusually large number of fonts, or if the MFP is in a shared environment.
The minimum amount of memory that can be allocated to resource-saving is 400 KB each
for PCL and PS.
ENWW
Saving resources (permanent resources)
283
Installing EIO cards
Follow this procedure to install an EIO card.
To install EIO cards
1. Turn off the MFP, and disconnect all of the cables.
2. Remove the two screws and cover plate from the EIO slot on the left side of the MFP.
Note
Do not discard the screws or the cover plate. Save them for future use if you remove the EIO
card.
3. Install the EIO card in the EIO slot and tighten the screws.
4. Reconnect all the cables, and turn on the MFP.
5. Print a configuration page to verify that the EIO card was successfully installed. See
Checking the MFP configuration.
284
Appendix E MFP memory and expansion
ENWW
F
Regulatory information
Introduction
This section contains the following regulatory information:
ENWW
●
FCC regulations
●
Environmental Product Stewardship program
●
Declaration of conformity (HP LaserJet 4345mfp)
●
Laser safety statement
●
Canadian DOC statement
●
Korean EMI statement
●
Finnish laser statement
Introduction
285
FCC regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation; the presence of interference can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television communications, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
Note
●
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●
Increase distance between equipment and receiver.
●
Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
located.
●
Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician.
Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of
FCC rules.
286
Appendix F Regulatory information
ENWW
Telecom
The HP LaserJet 4345x mfp, HP LaserJet 4345xs mfp, and HP LaserJet 4345xm mfp
models have the HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 already installed to provide
communication to the public switch telephone network (PSTN) for fax functionality. See the
HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide for all regulatory approval information
and regulatory notices associated with the fax functionality and that device.
ENWW
Telecom
287
Environmental Product Stewardship program
Protecting the environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally
sound manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts
on our environment.
Ozone production
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3).
Energy consumption
Power usage drops significantly while in sleep mode, which saves natural resources and
saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. This product qualifies
for ENERGY STAR® (Multifunctional devices, Version 1.0), which is a voluntary program to
encourage the development of energy-efficient office products.
ENERGY STAR® is a U.S. registered service mark owned by the U.S. government. As an
ENERGY STAR partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined that this product meets
ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency. For more information, see
http://www.energystar.gov.
Toner consumption
EconoMode uses significantly less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge.
Paper use
This product's optional automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and n-up printing
(multiple pages printed on one page) capabilities can reduce media usage and the resulting
demands on natural resources. (The automatic duplex feature is available only for models
that include a built-in duplexer. Manual duplexing is available for all models. See Printing on
both sides of paper (optional duplexer).)
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance
the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product's life.
288
Appendix F Regulatory information
ENWW
HP LaserJet printing supplies
In many countries/regions, this product's printing supplies (for example, print cartridge and
fuser) can be returned to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Environmental Program. An
easy-to-use and free take back program is available in more than 30 countries/regions.
Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet
print cartridge and supplies package.
HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Information
Since 1992, HP has offered HP LaserJet supplies return and recycling free of charge in 86%
of the world market where HP LaserJet supplies are sold. Postage-paid and pre-addressed
labels are included within the instruction guide in most HP LaserJet print cartridge boxes.
Labels and bulk boxes are also available through the Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle.
More than 10 million HP LaserJet print cartridges were recycled globally in 2002 through the
HP Planet Partners supplies recycling program. This record number represents 26 million
pounds of print cartridge materials that were diverted from landfills. Worldwide, HP recycled
an average of 80% of the print cartridge by weight, consisting primarily of plastic and metals.
Recycled plastics and metals are used to make new products, such as HP products, plastic
trays, and spools. The remaining materials are disposed of in an environmentally
responsible manner.
●
U.S. returns For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and
supplies, HP encourages the use of bulk returns. Simply bundle two or more cartridges
together and use the single, prepaid, preaddressed UPS label that is supplied in the
package. For more information in the U.S., call 1-800-340-2445 or visit the HP LaserJet
Supplies Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle.
●
Non-U.S. returns Non-U.S. customers should call the local HP Sales and Service Office
or visit the http://www.hp.com/recycle Web site for further information regarding
availability of the HP Supplies Returns and Recycling Program.
Paper
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines
outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. Go to http://www.hp.com/
support/ljpaperguide to download this guide in .PDF format. This product is suitable for the
use of recycled media according to EN12281:2002.
Material restrictions
This HP product contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the control-panel liquid-crystaldisplay that might require special handling at end of life.
This HP product may initially contain lead in solder that might require special handling at endof-life. This product will eventually switch to lead-free construction in compliance with the
European Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) law.
This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life.
ENWW
Type
Lithium Carbon Monofluoride (BR1632), 3 Volt,
button-style battery, 1.5 grams
Materials
Mercury-free, Cadmium-free, Lead-free
Location
On printed circuit board
User removable
No
Environmental Product Stewardship program
289
For recycling information, you can contact http://www.hp.com/recycle or contact your local
authorities or the Electronics Industry Alliance: http://www.eiae.org.
Material safety data sheet
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies that contain chemical substances (for
example, toner) can be obtained by contacting the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/
msds or http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/community/environment/productinfo/safety.
For more information
To obtain information about the following environmental topics, visit http://www.hp.com/go/
environment or http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/community/environment/productinfo/safety.
290
●
Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products.
●
HP's commitment to the environment
●
HP's environmental management system
●
HP's end-of-life product return and recycling program
●
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
Appendix F Regulatory information
ENWW
Declaration of conformity (HP LaserJet 4345mfp)
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer's Name:
Manufacturer's Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares that the product
Product Name:
Model Number:
HP LaserJet 4345 mfp
Q3942A
Regulatory model number: BOISB-0407-003)
ALL
Product Options:
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety:
IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A11 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)
GB4943-2001
EMC:
CISPR 22:1998 / EN 55022:1998 - Class B1)
EN 61000-3-2:2000
EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1:2001
EN 55024:1998
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B2) / ICES-003, Issue 4
GB9254-1998
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries
the CE-Marking accordingly.
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2) This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the marketing
name or the product number(s).
Boise, Idaho , USA
May 26, 2004
For regulatory topics only:
Australia Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph Street Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia
European Contact:
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards
Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 140 , D-71034, Böblingen (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160 Boise, ID 83707-0015, (Phone:
208-396-6000)
ENWW
Declaration of conformity (HP LaserJet 4345mfp)
291
Declaration of conformity (HP LaserJet 4345x mfp, 4345xs mfp,
and 4345xs mfp)
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer's Name:
Manufacturer's Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares that the product
Product Names:
Model Numbers:
HP LaserJet 4345x mfp, HP LaserJet 4345xs mfp, HP LaserJet 4345xm mfp
Q3943A, Q3944A, Q3945A
Regulatory Model: BOISB-0404-013
ALL
Product Options:
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety:
IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A11 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)
EMC:
CISPR 22:1998 / EN 55022:1998 - Class B1)
EN 61000-3-2:2000
EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1:2001
EN 55024:1998
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B2) / ICES-003, Issue 4
GB9254-1998
Telecom:4
TBR-21:1998, EG 201 121:1998
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries
the CE-Marking accordingly.
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2) This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the marketing
name or the product number(s).
4) The product includes the HP Analog Fax Accessory, HP Regulatory Model Number BOISB-0308-00.
Boise, Idaho , USA
May 26, 2004
For regulatory topics only:
Australian Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph Street Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia
European Contact:
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards
Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 140 , D-71034, Böblingen (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160 Boise, ID 83707-0015, (Phone:
208-396-6000)
292
Appendix F Regulatory information
ENWW
Country-/region-specific safety statements
Laser safety statement
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug
Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1,
1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The printer is
certified as a "Class 1" laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human
Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for
Health and Safety Act of 1968.
Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings
and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user
operation.
WARNING!
Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in
this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
Canadian DOC statement
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
«Conforme àla classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques
(CEM).»
Japanese VCCI statement
Korean EMI statement
ENWW
Country-/region-specific safety statements
293
Finnish laser statement
LASERTURVALLISUUS
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
HP LaserJet 4345mfp, HP LaserJet 4345x mfp, HP LaserJet 4345xs mfp,
HP LaserJet 4345xm mfp -laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite.
Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen
ulkopuolelle.
Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS!
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän
turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren
utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP LaserJet 4345mfp, HP LaserJet 4345x mfp, HP LaserJet 4345xs mfp,
HP LaserJet 4345xm mfp -kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita.
Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi
huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai
muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka
voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
VARO!
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle laitteen
ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING!
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för
osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:
Aallonpituus 770-800 nm
Teho 5 mW
Luokan 3B laser
Australia
This equipment complies with Australian EMC requirements.
294
Appendix F Regulatory information
ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
3-bin mailbox
capacity 6
jams, clearing 193
light status 216
media specifications 269
media types supported 265
models including 3
modes 124
part number 9, 241
reattach error message 214
selecting 77, 124
specifications, physical 253
500-sheet input tray
models including 2
500-sheet trays
adding 9
cabinet/stand 131
configuring media settings 28
insert or close error message 212
jams, clearing 191
loading 24, 70, 73
locking 74
locking and unlocking 11
media sizes supported 267
part numbers 9, 241
registration, setting 89
selection settings 52
settings 39
specifications, physical 253
unexpected size or type error message 206
usage page 164
A
access denied message 209
accessories
lights 216
locking and unlocking 11
moving 10
ordering 240
part numbers 9, 241
troubleshooting 217
accounting hardware 139
acoustic specifications 256
ENWW
address books, e-mail
auto-complete function 113
importing 150
LDAP server errors 212
LDAP support 108
recipient lists, creating 114
ADF
blank pages 231
capacity 6
cleaning delivery system 174
coying from 103
error messages 210
image shift, troubleshooting 233
jams, clearing 198
jams, frequent 201
lines on copies 231, 232
maintenance kit 179, 242
media specifications 270
skewed pages 232
troubleshooting print quality 222
ADF input tray
locating 8
ADF output bin
capacity 6
selecting 77
adhesive labels. See labels
agreements, maintenance 249
Alerts tab, HP Toolbox 153
allocating memory 283
Alternative Letterhead Mode 71, 82
analog fax accessory. See fax accessory
anticounterfeit website 166
Apple Macintosh. See Macintosh
Australian EMC statement 294
authentication error messages 210
Auto Cleaning Page 174
Auto Clenaing Page 51
auto continue 54
automatic document feeder. See ADF
autoscaling copies 104
AUX connection 6
B
background removal, copying
battery specifications 289
binding edge settings 87
104
Index
295
bins
capacities 6
full, error messages 213
jams, clearing 193
locating 8
reattach error message 214
selecting 77
usage page 164
blank pages, troubleshooting 220, 231
blurred print, troubleshooting 230
both sides, printing on
error messages 209, 210, 211, 214, 206
layout options 87
loading paper 87
paper sizes supported 86
registration, setting 89
using duplexer 86, 88
browser requirements
embedded Web server 148
HP Toolbox 152
HP Web Jetadmin 155
buffer overflow errors 205
buttons, control panel 30, 31
C
cabinet/stand
locking and unlocking 11
models including 3
part number 9, 241
setting up 131
specifications, physical 253
cables
error messages 210
cables, part numbers 243
calibrating scanner 178
Canadian DOC statement 293
capacity
3-bin mailbox 6, 269
500-sheet tray 267
ADF 6, 270
envelope feeder 268
output bins 6
stacker 269
stapler 270
stapler/stacker 6
tray 1 266
card stock
output path 78
printing on 83
cartridges
status, viewing with embedded Web server 149
status, viewing with HP Toolbox 153
cartridges, print
EconoMode 50
error messages 210, 212
jams, clearing 186
life expectancy 166
296
Index
low toner message 167
non-HP 166
ordering iii
out of toner message 168
part numbers 241
recycling 289
storing 166
supplies status page, printing 163
supply level, checking 167
warranty 248
cartridges, staple
empty, stop or continue settings 129
jams 199
loading 129
low error message 214
part numbers 9, 241
characters, misformed 227
chosen personality not available 211
cleaning
about 173, 175
ADF delivery system 174
ADF rollers 175
fuser 173
glass 173
outside of MFP 173
touchscreen 173
cleaning page
automatic 174
manual 173
settings 51
clearable warnings 54
clock
error message 204
setting 158
close door error messages 211
coated paper 83
colored paper, copying 104
configuration page 161
configurations, models 2
Configure device menu 40
connectivity features 6
consumables. See supplies
contracts, maintenance 249
contrast, copy 104
control panel
access denied 209
buttons 30, 31
cleaning touchscreen 173
Configure device menu 40
copy-screen 100
Copy/send settings 55
Copying submenu 41
Diagnostics menu 64
EIO X Jetdirect submenu 58
Embedded Jetdirect submenu 58
Enhancement submenu 41
e-mail screen 111
ENWW
Fax menu 63
features 29
help 33
I/O submenu 57
Information menu 36
jam messages 185
lights 30
locating 8
locking menus 144
menu map 34
messages, alphabetical list 204
messages, numerical list 204
messages, settings 54
messages, troubleshooting 203
navigation 32
Originals submenu 40
Paper handling menu 28, 37
PCL submenu 46
print cartridge supply level, checking 167
Print quality submenu 48
Printing submenu 44
Resets submenu 61
Retrieve job menu 35
Sending submenu 42
Service menu 67
System setup submenu 51
troubleshooting 184
Copitrak devices 139
Copy Connect card error messages 211
Copy/send settings 55
copying
background removal 104
contrast settings 104
control-panel navigation 100
error messages 215
features 5, 99
Job Mode 103
multiple originals 103
Originals settings 40
quality, troubleshooting 220
reducing or enlarging 104
sharpness 104
speed specifications 4
storing jobs 105
usage page 164
using ADF 103
using custom settings 101
using default settings 101
using scanner glass 103
Copying submenu 41
counterfeit supplies 166
covers, locating 8
covers, paper 91
creased paper, troubleshooting 228
crooked pages 227, 232
curled paper, troubleshooting 227
ENWW
custom-size paper
3-bin mailbox specifications 269
500-sheet tray specifications 267
driver settings 91
loading 23, 26
printing on 83
tray 1 specifications 266
tray settings 84
customer support
embedded Web server links 151
HP Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE) iii
Macintosh iv
maintenance agreements 249
online iii
repacking printer 250
service dealers iv
service information form 251
telephone iii
D
date, setting 158
declaration of conformity 291
default settings, restoring 61
defects, repeating 226, 234
delay, sleep 160
density, troubleshooting 222
Describe Original settings 101
Device Settings window, HP Toolbox 154
DHCP servers 156
Diagnostics menu 64
dial-up connections 7
digital faxing 122
digital sending
about 107, 112
address books 114
configuring e-mail 109
control-panel settings 111
embedded Web server settings 150
error messages 211, 212, 213, 214, 215
folders 116
LDAP support 108
loading documents 112
Originals settings 40
Secondary E-mail option 116
sending documents 112
settings 42
SMTP servers 108
troubleshooting 184
validating gateway addresses 235
workflow 116
Digital Sending tab, embedded Web server 150
DIMMs
error messages 207
expansion slots 272
installing 274
part numbers 242
verifying installation 282
Index
297
disk. See hard disk
Disk Erase feature 141
Disk Management Utility 17
DLC/LLC settings 58
document feeder. See ADF
document feeder kit, replacing 179
dots, troubleshooting 223, 229
double-sided printing
error messages 209, 210, 211, 214, 206
layout options 87
loading paper 87
paper sizes supported 86
registration, setting 89
using duplexer 86, 88
downloading software iii
drivers
downloading iii
help 16
Linux 13
Macintosh iv
operating systems supported 13
OS/2 14
Print Task Quick Sets 90
selecting 14
settings 14
dropouts, troubleshooting 223
drum life out message 168
DSL conections 7
duplex printing accesory
specifications, physical 253
duplex printing accessory
binding options 87
error messages 209, 210, 211, 214, 206
jams 192
locating 8
media specifications 268
media types supported 265
models including 2
orienting media 70
paper orientation 87
paper sizes supported 86
part number 9, 241
registration, setting 89
usage page 164
using 86, 88
duty cycle 4
E
EconoMode 50
edge-to-edge printing 89
EIO cards
buffer overflow 205
errors 209
installing 284
part numbers 243
electrical specifications 255
Embedded Jetdirect submenu 58
298
Index
embedded Web server
assigning a password 138
Digital Sending tab 150
features 148
Information tab 149
IP address, changing 157
Networking tab 150
opening 148
Other Links tab 151
print cartridge supply level, checking 167
Settings tab 149
system requirements 148
energy consumption 288
energy specifications 255
ENERGY STAR compliance 288
Enhancement submenu 41
enlarging documents
copying 104
printing 91
envelope feeder
envelope specifications 268
error messages 210
installing 132
jams, clearing 188
load error message 212
loading 132, 133
media types supported 265
part number 9, 241
removing 133
settings 37, 74
specifications 79
specifications, physical 253
envelopes
loading 23, 70
margins 79, 263
printing from envelope feeder 132, 133
printing from tray 1 79
specifications 262, 266
storing 263
wrinkled, troubleshooting 228
environment, specifications 257
environmental stewardship 288
EOP X Jetdirect submenu 58
Equitrac devices 139
erasing hard disk 141
error messages
alphabetical list 204
jams 185
numerical list 204
printing event log 64
settings 54
troubleshooting 203
Ethernet cards 6
Ethernet cards, part numbers 243
event log 64
ENWW
Explorer, versions supported
embedded Web server 148
HP Toolbox 152
HP Web Jetadmin 155
Extended Service iv
extended warranty 249
e-mail
about 107, 112
address books 114
auto-complete function 113
configuring 109
control-panel settings 111
embedded Web server settings 150
error messages 211, 212, 213, 214, 215
LDAP errors 212
LDAP support 108
loading documents 112
Originals settings 40
Secondary option, security 116
sending documents 112
settings 42
SMTP servers 108
system requirements 7
troubleshooting 184
validating gateway addresses 235
e-mail alerts 153
F
face-down output 78
face-up output 78
factory default settings, restoring 61
fans, troubleshooting 184
FastRes 49
fax accessory
configuration page 161
connecting phone line 120
installing 118
light status 219
models including 2
part number 9, 241
user guide 117
Fax menu 63
faxing, digital 122
FCC statements 286
features 2, 4
Finnish laser statement 294
firmware, upgrading 169
first page, paper for 91
flash memory
HP Disk Management Utility 17
flash memory cards
installing 276
types supported 272
verifying installation 282
Flip Pages Up binding option 88
ENWW
folders
error messages 212
sending to 116
fonts
HP Disk Management Utility 17
included 5
lists, printing 165
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) 6, 10, 139
formatter cage, locking 145
formatter cover, locating 8
formatter lights 218
front side optical system errors 212
FTP, sending to 116
function-separator mode, 3-bin mailbox 124
fuser
cleaning 173
error messages 207
jams, clearing 195
paper wrapping errors 213
replacing 179
fuser modes 76
G
gateways
configuring 109
error messages 211
finding 110
settings 42
validating addresses 235
glass
cleaning 173
copying from 103
graphical display, control panel 30, 32
gray background, troubleshooting 224
H
hard disk
erasing 141
font lists 165
HP Disk Management Utility 17
part number 242
replacing 278
heartbeat LED 218
heavy paper
output path 78
printing on 83
held jobs 97
help
control panel 33
drivers 16
HP Digital Sending Software (HP DSS) 116
HP Disk Management Utility 17
HP DSS (Digital Sending Software) 116
HP Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE)
Index
iii
299
HP Jetdirect print server
configuration page 163
error messages 209
firmware updates 171
installing 284
IP address 156
lights 218
models including 2
part numbers 243
HP Jetdiret print server
settings 58
HP media, ordering 243
HP OpenVMS drivers 14
HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program
289
HP Toolbox
Alerts tab 153
Device Settings window 154
features 152
links 154
opening 153
print cartridge supply level, checking 167
Status tab 153
HP Web Jetadmin
browsers supported 155
downloading 155
firmware updates 171
IP address, changing 156
HP-Authorized Dealers iv
humidity requirements 257
I
I/O submenu 57
IBM OS/2 drivers 14
image area specifications 258
image repetition, troubleshooting 230
Information menu 36
information pages 161
Information tab, embedded Web server 149
input trays. See trays
insert tray error messages 212
install cartridge error message 212
installing
cabinet/stand 131
EIO cards 284
envelope feeder 132
fax accessory 118
flash memory cards 276
hard disk 278
Macintosh software 20
memory 274
network software, Macintosh 19
network software, Windows 18
Windows printing system 17
Windows software using New Hardware Found
wizard 21
insufficient memory 212, 205
300
Index
interface ports
included 6
locating 10
internal clock errors 204
Internet Explorer, versions supported
embedded Web server 148
HP Toolbox 152
HP Web Jetadmin 155
Internet fax 122
IP addresses, configuring 156
IPX/SPX settings 58
ISPE (HP Instant Support Professional Edition) iii
J
jam-access lever, locating 8
jams
3-bin mailbox 193
500-sheet trays 191
ADF 198
control-panel messages 185
duplex printing accessory 192
envelope feeder 188
frequent, troubleshooting 201
fuser 195
locations 185
output bin 193
print-cartridge area 186
print-quality problems 186
recovery settings 55
staple 199
stapler/stacker 193
top-cover 186
tray 1 189
Japanese VCCI statement 293
Jetadmin
browsers supported 155
downloading 155
firmware updates 171
IP address, changing 156
Jetdirect print server
configuration page 163
error messages 209
firmware updates 171
installing 284
IP address 156
lights 218
models including 2
part numbers 243
settings 58
Job Mode, copying 103
job storage
copies 105
features 94
private 94
proof and hold 97
QuickCopy 96
ENWW
Retrieve job menu 35
settings 51
stored 95
K
Kensington locks 145
kits, maintenance
part number 242
supplies status page, printing 163
using 179
Korean EMI statement 293
L
labels
loading 23
printing 81
specifications 264
LAN fax 122
LAN-connector 6
landscape orientation
duplexing options 87
orignals settings 40
language, control panel 184
languages, printer 5, 53
laser safety statements 293
LDAP servers
connecting to 108
embedded Web server settings 150
error messages 212
settings 42
validating gateway addresses 235
LEDs. See lights
letterhead
loading 70
printing on 82
light print, troubleshooting 222
lights
accessories 216
control panel 30
fax accessory 219
formatter 218
lines, troublehsooting 231, 232
lines, troubleshooting 224, 228
link speed, network 58
links
embedded Web server 151
HP Toolbox 154
Linux driver support 13
loading
500-sheet trays 24
coated paper 83
custom-size paper 84
envelope feeder 132, 133
envelopes in tray 1 79
error messages 212
labels 81
orienting media 70
ENWW
paper for duplexing 87
preprinted paper 82
staples 129
transparencies 81
tray 1 23
unexpected size or type error message 206
locking
accessories 11
control panel menus 144
formatter cage 145
trays 74
log, event 64
loose toner, troubleshooting 186, 225
low on staples 214
low toner message 167
M
Macintosh
drivers supported 13
installing software 20
network installation 19
operating systems supported 12
PPDs 17
software 17
support Web sites iv
mailbox mode 124
mailbox, 3-bin
capacity 6
jams, clearing 193
light status 216
media specifications 269
media types supported 265
models including 3
modes 124
part number 241
part numbers 9
reattach error message 214
selecting 77, 124
specifications, physical 253
maintenance agreements iv, 249
maintenance kit
part number 242
supplies status page, printing 163
using 179
manual feed, tray 1 75
map, menu 34
margins, envelopes 79, 263
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) 290
mechanical error message 213
media
3-bin mailbox specifications 269
500-sheet tray specifications 267
ADF specifications 270
curled 227
custom-size, driver settings 91
custom-size, printing 83, 84
different first page 91
Index
301
duplexer specifications 268
duplexing, sizes supported 86
envelope feeder specifications 268
fuser modes 76
HP, ordering 243
loading 23, 70
manual feed 75
pages per sheet 92
preprinted 82
prepunched 82
settings 44
small 84
specifications 261
stacker specifications 269
stapler specifications 270
stapling 127
storing 261
tray 1 specifications 266
tray selection 73, 74
tray settings 28, 37
types supported 265
usage page 164
wrinkled 228
media jams. See jams
memory
allocating 283
DIMM error messages 207
expansion 272
features 4
flash, installing 276
included 2
installing DIMMs 274
insufficient 212, 205
part numbers 242
permanent storage error messages 208
requirements 273
supply errors 204
verifying installation 282
Menu button 30
menu map, control panel 34
menus, control panel
access denied 209
Configure device 40
Copy/send settings 55
Copying 41
Diagnostics 64
EIO X Jetdirect 58
Embedded Jetdirect 58
Enhancement 41
Fax 63
I/O 57
Information 36
locking 144
Originals 40
Paper handling 28, 37
PCL 46
Print quality 48
302
Index
Printing 44
Resets 61
Retrieve job 35
Sending 42
Service 67
System setup 51
mercury specifications 289
messages
alphabetical list 204
jams 185
numerical list 204
settings 54
troubleshooting 203
messages, control panel
printing event log 64
Microsoft Windows. See Windows
misformed characters, troubleshooting 227
models, features 2
monthly duty cycle 4
moving the MFP 10
multiple pages per sheet 92
N
n-up printing 92
narrow paper, printing on 84
Netscape Navigator, versions supported
embedded Web server 148
HP Toolbox 152
HP Web Jetadmin 155
Networking tab, embedded Web server 150
networks
connectivity features 6
e-mail system requirements 7
HP Jetdirect configuration page 163
HP Jetdirect print server error messages 209
installing EIO cards 284
installing Macintosh software 19
installing Windows software 18
IP addresses 156
print servers included 2
settings 58
SMTP servers 108
troubleshooting printing 236
validating gateway addresses 235
noise specifications 256
non-HP print cartridges 166
Novell login required 213
number of copies 44
NVRAM errors 208
O
on/off switch, locating 8
online customer support iii
online help
control panel 33
drivers 16
OpenVMS drivers 14
ENWW
operating environment specifications 257
operating systems supported 12, 13
Order Cartridge message 167
order, page 78
ordering
media, HP 243
part numbers for 241
supplies and accessories 240
ordering supplies iii
orientation, page
duplexing options 87
orignals settings 40
orientation, paper 70
Originals submenu 40
OS/2 drivers 14
Other links
embedded Web server 151
HP Toolbox 154
out of toner message 168
output bins
capacities 6
full, error messages 213
jams, clearing 193
locating 8
reattach error message 214
selecting 77
usage page 164
output path open error message 213
output quality
after jams 186
settings 49
troubleshooting 220
ozone specifications 288
P
packaging printer 250
page orientation
duplexing options 87
orignals settings 40
pages per minute 4
pages per sheet 92
paper
3-bin mailbox specifications 269
500-sheet tray specifications 267
ADF specifications 270
coated 83
curled 227
custom-size, driver settings 91
custom-size, printing 83, 84
different first page 91
duplexer specifications 268
duplexing, sizes supported 86
fuser modes 76
HP, ordering 243
loading 23, 70
manual feed 75
pages per sheet 92
ENWW
preprinted 82
prepunched 82
settings 44
small 84
specifications 261
stacker specifications 269
stapler specifications 270
stapling 127
storing 261
tray 1 specifications 266
tray selection 73, 74
tray settings 28, 37
types supported 265
usage page 164
wrinkled 228
Paper handling menu 28, 37
paper jams. See jams
paper path
cleaning 174
testing 64, 201
parallel cable, part number 243
parallel port
buffer overflow error message 205
features 6
locating 10
not supported for Macintosh 20
part numbers
cables 243
EIO cards 243
maintenance kit 242
media, HP 243
memory 242
print cartridges 241
trays 241
PCL drivers
features 14
operating systems supported 13
See also drivers
PCL font list 165
PCL submenu 46
PDEs, Macintosh 17
perform printer maintenance message 179
permanent storage errors 208
personality settings 53
phone line, connecting fax accessory 120
phone numbers
ordering supplies iii
service agreements iv
support iii
physical specifications 253
PINs, private jobs 94
platforms supported 12, 13
portrait orientation
duplexing options 87
orignals settings 40
Index
303
ports
included 6
locating 10
postcards 83
PostScript fonts 17
PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files, Macintosh
17
power
consumption 288
specifications 255
troubleshooting 182
power switch, locating 8
PPDs, Macintosh 17
preprinted paper
loading 70
printing on 82
prepunched paper
loading 70
printing on 82
print cartridges
EconoMode 50
error messages 210, 212
jams, clearing 186
life expectancy 166
low toner message 167
non-HP 166
ordering iii
out of toner message 168
part numbers 241
recycling 289
status, viewing with embedded Web server 149
status, viewing with HP Toolbox 153
storing 166
supplies status page, printing 163
supply level, checking 167
warranty 248
print quality
after jams 186
settings 49
troubleshooting 220
Print quality submenu 48
Print Task Quick Sets 90
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs), Macintosh 17
printer drivers. See drivers
printer languages 5, 53
printer maintenance kit
part number 242
supplies status page, printing 163
using 179
printing
documents 72
output bin, selecting 77
speed specifications 4
usage page 164
Printing submenu 44
priority onsite service 249
private jobs 94
304
Index
processor speed 4
proof and hold jobs 97
ProRes 49
protocol settings 58
PS driver
features 14
operating system supported 13
See also drivers
PS font list 165
punched paper
loading 70
printing on 82
Q
quality
after jams 186
settings 49
troubleshooting 220
quick sets 90
R
reattach output bin error message 214
recycling
plastics 288
print cartridges 289
reducing documents
copying 104
printing 91
registration, tray 89
regulatory statements
Australian EMC 294
Canadian DOC statement 293
declaration of conformity 291
FCC 286
Finnish laser statement 294
Japanese VCCI statement 293
Korean EMI statement 293
laser safety 293
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) 290
Telecom 287
remote firmware update (RFU) 169
removing software, Windows 22
repacking printer 250
repeated images 230
repeating defects, troubleshooting 226, 234
replacing
hard disk 278
maintenance kits 179
print cartridges 167
staple cartridges 129
Reset button 30, 31
Resets submenu 61
resizing documents
copying 104
printing 91
ENWW
resolution
settings 49
specifications 4
troubleshooting quality 220
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)
resource saving 283
restoring default settings 61
retention, job
copies 105
features 94
private 94
proof and hold 97
QuickCopy 96
Retrieve job menu 35
stored 95
Retrieve job menu 35
reverse page order 78
rollers
cleaning ADF 175
maintenance kit, included 179
ruler, repetitive defect 234
50
S
saving settings 90
scaling documents
copying 104
printing 91
scanner calibration 178
scanner errors 212, 214
scanner glass
cleaning 173
copying from 103
scanner tests 64
scanning
speed specifications 4
scanning e-mail
validating gateway addresses 235
scanning to e-mail
about 107, 112
address books 114
configuring 109
control-panel settings 111
embedded Web server settings 150
error messages 211, 212, 213, 214, 215
LDAP support 108
loading documents 112
Originals settings 40
Secondary option, security 116
sending documents 112
settings 42
SMTP servers 108
troubleshooting 184
Secure Disk Erase 141
ENWW
security
disk erase 141
e-mail 116
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) 139
locking control panel menus 144
locking formatter cage 145
security features 6
Send to Folder 116
Send to Workflow 116
Sending submenu 42
sending to e-mail
about 107, 109, 112
address books 114
embedded Web server settings 150
error messages 211, 212, 213, 214, 215
LDAP support 108
loading documents 112
Originals settings 40
Secondary option, security 116
sending documents 112
settings 42, 111
SMTP servers 108
troubleshooting 184
validating gateway addresses 235
sensor test 64
serial buffer overflow 205
service
agreements iv, 249
HP-authorized dealers iv
information form 251
repacking printer 250
Service menu 67
Set Registration 89
settings
configuration page 161
drivers, changing 14
Print Task Quick Sets 90
restoring defaults 61
Settings tab, embedded Web server 149
sharpness, copy settings 104
shipping printer 250
Show me how Help 33
size, media
3-bin mailbox specifications 269
500-sheet tray specifications 267
ADF specifications 270
default settings 45
duplexer specifications 268
envelope feeder specifications 268
printing small or custom 83
stacker specifications 269
stapler specifications 270
tray 1 specifications 266
tray selection 73, 74
tray settings 37
unexpected, error message 206
Index
305
size, paper
printing 91
skew specifications 259
skewed pages 227, 232
Sleep button 30
sleep settings
delay 160
power specifications 255
wake time 159
small paper, printing on 84
smeared toner, troubleshooting 225
SMTP gateways
error messages 214
SMTP servers
connecting to 108
validating gateway addresses 235
software
digital sending (HP DSS) 116
downloading iii
HP Disk Management Utility 17
HP Toolbox 152
installing Macintosh 20
installing on Windows 17
installing using New Hardware Found wizard
Linux 13
Macintosh iv
Macintosh, included 17
network installation, Macintosh 19
network installation, Windows 18
operating systems supported 12
uninstalling from Windows 22
space requirements 253
specifications
acoustic 256
electrical 255
envelopes 262
features 4
image area 258
labels 264
operating environment 257
paper 261
physical 253
skew 259
transparencies 264
specifications, media
envelope feeder 268
specks, troubleshooting 223, 229
speed specifications 4
spots, troubleshooting 223, 229
stacker mode, 3-bin mailbox 124
standard output bin
capacity 6
jams, clearing 193
locating 8
reattach error message 214
selecting 77
306
Index
21
staple cartridges
empty, stop or continue settings 129
jams 199
loading 129
low error message 214
part numbers 9, 241
stapler/stacker
capacity 6
empty, stop or continue settings 129
light status 216
loading staples 129
media specifications 269, 270
media types supported 265
models including 3
moving the MFP 10
paper jams 193
part number 9, 241
printing to 127
reattach error message 214
selecting 77
specifications, physical 253
staple jams 199
stapling options 92
too many pages error message 214
stapling documents 127
Start button 30, 31
status
e-mail alerts 153
Information tab, embedded Web server 149
lights 216
viewing with HP Toolbox 153
Status button 30
Status tab, HP Toolbox 153
Stop button 30, 31
storage cabinet
locking and unlocking 11
models including 3
part number 9, 241
setting up 131
specifications, physical 253
storage, job
copies 105
features 94
private 94
proof and hold 97
QuickCopy 96
Retrieve job menu 35
settings 51
stored 95
stored jobs 95
storing
envelopes 263
paper 261
print cartridges 166
straight-through paper path 78
ENWW
supplies
memory errors 204
non-HP 166
ordering iii, 240
part numbers 9, 241
recycling 289
status, viewing with embedded Web server 149
status, viewing with HP Toolbox 153
supply level, print cartridges 167
support
embedded Web server links 151
HP Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE) iii
Macintosh iv
maintenance agreements 249
online iii
repacking printer 250
service dealers iv
service information form 251
telephone iii
system requirements
drivers 13
embedded Web server 148
HP Toolbox 152
HP Web Jetadmin 155
printing software 12
system requirements, e-mail 7
System setup submenu 51
T
TCP/IP settings 58, 156
technical support
embedded Web server links 151
HP Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE) iii
Macintosh iv
maintenance agreements 249
online iii
repacking printer 250
service dealers iv
service information form 251
telephone iii
Telecom statement 287
telephone numbers
ordering supplies iii
service agreements iv
support iii
temperature requirements 257
tests 64
text quality, troubleshooting 227, 230
time, setting 158
tire tracks, troubleshooting 229
toner
EconoMode 50
output quality, troubleshooting 225
usage page 164
toner cartridges. See print cartridges
ENWW
Toolbox
Alerts tab 153
Device Settings window 154
features 152
links 154
opening 153
Status tab 153
top cover
jams, clearing 186
locating 8
touchscreen, cleaning 173
transparencies
HP, ordering 245
loading 23
printing 81
specifications 264
tray 1
configuring media settings 28
custom-size paper settings 84
duplexing 87
envelopes, printing 79
insert or close error message 212
jams, clearing 189
load error message 212
loading 23, 70
locating 8
locking 74
manual feed 75
media sizes supported 266
media types supported 265
printing from 73
registration, setting 89
selection settings 52
settings 38
unexpected size or type error message 206
usage page 164
trays
cabinet/stand 131
configuring media settings 28
custom-size paper settings 84
duplexing 87
included 2
insert or close error message 212
jams, clearing 189, 191
loading 23, 70
locking 74
manual feed 75
media size specifications 267
media types supported 265
part numbers 241
registration, setting 89
selecting 73
selection settings 52
settings 38, 39
specifications, physical 253
unexpected size or type error message 206
usage page 164
Index
307
trays 2, 3, 4, or 5. See 500-sheet trays
troubleshooting
accessories 216, 217
ADF output quality 231
blank pages 220, 231
blurred print 230
checklist 182
control panel 184
control-panel messages 203
curled paper 227
digital sending 184
dropouts 223
error messages, alphabetical list 204
error messages, numerical list 204
gateway addresses 235
gray background 224
jams, clearing 185
jams, frequent 201
light print 222
lines 224, 228, 231, 232
network printing 236
paper path test 201
quality 220
repeating defects 226, 234
repetitive images 230
skewed pages 227, 232
smeared toner 225
specks 223
staple jams 199
text quality 227, 230
tire tracks 229
white spots 229
wrinkled paper 228
TrueType fonts 17
TrueType fonts included 5
two-sided printing
error messages 209, 210, 211, 214, 206
layout options 87
loading paper 87
paper sizes supported 86
registration, setting 89
using duplexer 86, 88
typefaces
font lists 165
HP Disk Management Utility 17
included 5
U
unable to connect, copy, or send 215
unexpected size or type error messages
uninstalling software, Windows 22
UNIX driver support 13
unlocking accessories 11
upgrading firmware 169
usage page 164
308
Index
206
V
validating gateway addresses 235
voltage specifications 255
voltage, troubleshooting 184
W
wake time, setting 159
warranty
extended iv, 249
MFP 247
print cartridge 248
watermarks 90
wavy paper, troubleshooting 227
Web browser requirements
embedded Web server 148
HP Toolbox 152
Web Jetadmin
browsers supported 155
downloading 155
firmware updates 171
IP address, changing 156
Web sites
anticounterfeit 166
customer support iii
downloading software iii
environmental information 290
HP Web Jetadmin, downloading 155
Macintosh support iv
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) 290
ordering supplies iii, 240
paper specifications 261
recycling supplies 289
service agreements iv
UNIX and Linux drivers 13
weight, media specifications
3-bin mailbox 269
500-sheet tray 267
ADF 270
duplexer 268
envelope feeder 268
stacker 269
stapler 270
tray 1 266
What is this? Help 33
white lines or spots, troubleshooting 228
Windows
drivers supported 13
installing software 17
installing using New Hardware Found wizard
network installation 18
uninstalling software 22
versions supported 12
Windows 2000 fax 122
workflow, send to 116
wrinkled paper, troubleshooting 228
21
ENWW
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising